…

[Page] GRAMMATICA LATINA IN USUM SCHOLARUM ADORNATA.

Grammatices Lilianae verbis, (quantum fieri licuit,) retentis; multis ejus erroribus emendatis: minùs-necessariis amputatis; pluribus, quae deficerent, suppletis; & omnibus Methodo faciliori ad tenellae aetatis captum conformata, dispositis.

Operâ & Studio CAROLI HOOLE, A. M. è C. L. Oxon. Scholarchae olim Rotherhamiensis in agro Ebor. jam verò privatae Scholae Grammaticae Institutoris in Aurisicum viculo, haud procul ab Alnorum & Clinicorum portis apud Londinates.

Adjecta est insuper (nè quid huic instituto desit) in juventutis gratiam, in adversa paginâ, Angli­cana interpretatio.

FRANC. PATRI.

Grammatica est omnium Disciplinarum Fundamentum

LONDINI, Typis Guil. Du-Gard; veneúnt (que) apud Joannem Clark jun. in Mercatorum Sacello, ad inferiorem partem Vici Cheapsidiani. Anno Dom. 1651.

M. FAB. Quintil. Instit. Orat. l. 1. c. 4.

HAec Professio—plus habet in re­cessu quàm in fronte promittit—Quò minùs sunt ferendi, qui hanc Artem ut tenuem ac jejunàm ca­villantur: quae nisi Oratori futu­rò fundamenta fideliter jecerit, quicquid super­struxeris, corruet: & quae vel sola omni studio­rum genere plus habet operis, quàm ostentationis. Nè quis igitur tanquam parva fastidiat Gram­matices elementa; non quia magnae sit operae, consonantes à vocalibus discernere, ipsás que eas in semivocalium numerum, mutarùmque partiri: sed quia interiora velut sacri hujus adeuntibus, apparebit multa rerum subtili as, quae non modò acuere ingenia puerilia, sed exercere altissimam quoque eruditionem, ac scientiam possit.

CICERO de Oratore lib. 3.

PRaecepta latinè loquendi puerilis doctrina tra­dit, & subtilior cognitio, ac ratio literarum alit; aut consuetudo sermonis quotidiani, ac do­mestici libri confirmant, & lectio veterum Orato­rum & Poêtarum.

Desid. ERASMUS Rotterodamus.

PRoclivius est vel in triplici jure Doctoris no­men, quàm semel boni Grammatici titulum promeruisse.

GRAMMATICA LATINA.
De Grammaticâ, & ejus partibus.

Grammatica Latina rectè loquendi Lati­ne praecepta continet. Ejus quatnor sunt partes,

GRammatica est rectè Scribendi atque Lo­quendi Ars.

Latinis Latiné.

Grammaticae qua­tuor sunt partes.1Orthográphia.Lib. I.
2Etymológia.Lib. II.
3Syntaxis.Lib. III.
4Prosódia.Lib. IV.

Nomen Grammaticae impositum est à literis, quas grammata G [...]ci vocant; sonátque idem quod literatura, quasi Artem L [...]erariam dicas: literae enim sunt prima hujus Artis mitia, ex quibus fiunt syllabae; ex syllabis, dictiones; & è dictionibus, [...]tio; quae soli [...] vel ligata est.

Orthographia versatur in Literis, Prosodia in Syllabis, Etymo­logia in Dictionibus & Syntaxis in Oratione. Ordo igitur natu­ralis postulat, ut Prosodia in secundo loco collocetur. Nobis autem methodum Vulgaris Grammatices observantibus (quippe, Syllabarum quantitas ante Vocum intelligentiam non tam facilè pe [...]pi queat) ultimum Prosodia locum assignare, visum est.

Lib. I. De Orthographia.

1. Orthogra­phia agit

ORthographia est prima pars Grammatices, quâ docemur quibus quaeque dictio sit formanda li­teris; ut lectio non lexio.

Orthographia autem agitDe Literis.Cap. I.
De Syllabis.Cap. II.
De Orthoëpia.Cap. III.
De Sententiarum punctis.Cap. IV.

Cap. 1. De Literis.

1. De Literis quae sunt Vocale, & Consonantes. Minusculae & Majusculae. quae signifi­cant Vocabulum aut Numerum

LItera est minima pars Dictionis.

Literae Latinae sunt viginti tres. A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P Q R S T V X Y Z.

Tria accidunt unicuique literae.1. Nomen, quo apellatur.
2. Figura, quâ notatur.
3. Potestas, quâ pronunciatur.

Distinguuntur Literae secundùm sonum inVocales, &
Consonantes.

Vocalis est litera quae per se sonat; & sunt quin­que, a e i o u, & y Grae [...]: ex quibus variè di­spositis totidem fiunt Dipthongi, ae au ei eu oe, & ij.

Consonans est litera, quae non nisi cum vocali jun­cta sonat; ut B C D &c. J etiam & V consonan­tes fiunt, cùm vel sibi, vel aliis vocalibus in eâdem syllabâ praeponuntur; ut Juno, Jovis; voluntas, vul­tus.

Consonan­tium aliae sunt1. Mutae, quae sonum nullum à seipsis habent, & sunt novem, b c d f g k p q t, in quibus sonus vocalis sequi­tur.
Nam f respondet φ Graecorum, & q ut sonat semper adsciscit u.
2. Semivocales, quae aliquid soni à se­ipsis habent, & sunt septem, l m n r s x z, in quibus sonus vocalis praece­dit.

[Page 7]

Semivocalium aliae suntLiquidae, quae post Mutam in eâdem syllaba liquescunt, sive vim suam amittunt; ut l m n r.
Duplices, quae duarum literarum vim habent; ut x. z & j inter duas vocales. Nam in jejunium, primum j videtur esse consona simplex, se­cundum duplex, & tertium vo cale.

S nec Liquida est, nec Muta, sed suae potestatis, (sive pronuntiationis) litera; quam idcirco non­nulli Monadicon appellârunt.

H propriè quidem non est litera, sed asspiratio­nis nota; ut pulcher, homo, hiatus; sed ante i e rarò pronunciatur; dicere enim solemus Hjeremias, Hjerosolyma, quasi ab J consona inciperet; sed Hie­rarchia, tanquam inciperet ab i vocali.

Literae quo­ad formam su­am suntMinusculae, quae minusculis chara­cteribus scribuntur, ut a b c:
Majusculae, quae majusculis characte­ribus scribuntur, ut A B C.

Majusculis inchoantur

1. Sententiae; ut Deum time. Regem honora.

2. Propria nomina; ut, Carolus, Londinum, Tha­misis.

3. Dictiones quaelibet in oratione notatu digni­ores; ut,

Riligionis Christianae fundamentum est Fides.

4. In Carminibus versus singuli; ut,

Ʋtendum est aetate: cito pede praeterit aetas;
Nec bona tam sequitur, quàm bona prima fuit.

[Page 9] In reliquis locis maxima ex parte Minusculae scribuntur, è quibus istae sunt praecipuè notandae, quae duplicem obtinent characterem, ut i u and s; nam i & u vocales sunt; j ve­rò & v sunt consonae; quas aliqui ja & va nominârunt. s Longum etiam semper in principio, vel medio dictionis pin­gitur, sed [...] breve in fine; ut, scripsimus.

Literae majusculae cùm solae aut paucae scribun­tur, significant

aliquandoIntegra vocabula; ut, M. T. C. Marcus Tullius Cicero. S. P. D. Salutem pluri­mam dicit. A. M. Anno Mundi. A. D. Anno Domini. R. P. Respublica. P. C. Patres Conscripti. H. S. aut LL. S. Duae librae & semis. N. B. Nota bene.
Numerum; ut, I unum, V quinque, X decem, L quinquaginta, C centum, ∽ vel CC ducenti, D vel D quingenti, ∞ vel M vel M mille, ↁ quinque millia CCIↃↃ decem millia. ↇ quinqua­ginta millia. ↈ centena millia. (roman 500000) quingenta millia. (roman 1000000) decies centena millia.

Minor numerus praepositus tantundem demit ma­jori sequenti; postpositus verò tantundem addit: ut, IV valet quatuor, VI verò sex: IX valet novem, at XI undecim.

Linea transversa notis numericis superposita, eas­dem tot millia continere innuit, quot alioqui mi­nores numeros continerent, ut III tria millia, X decem millia, & sic de caeteris.

Cap. 2. De Syllabis.

2 De Syllabla: & earundem di­stinctione, vel connexione.

SYllaba est comprehensio literarum uno spiritu prolata; ut, vir-tus.

EstqueImpropria, quae constat ex solâ vocali vel diphthongo; ut, Ae-a-cus.
Propria, quae constat ex consonante unâ vel pluribus, cum vocali vel diphthongo comprehensis; ut, Coe­lestis.

Rectè scripturo discendum est syllabas, inter seri­bendum, aptè distinguere, atque connectere.

Notandum igitur quòd

1. Syllaba apud Latinos numerum senarium litera­rum non excedat; ut, Stirps, Scrobs.

2. In Polysyllabis consonans inter duas vocales po­sita ad posteriorem pertineat; ut, Do-mi-nus.

3. Si consonans geminetur, prior ad praecedentem, posterior ad sequentem syllabam pertinet; ut, An-nus.

4. Consonae, quae in initio vocis conjungi non pos­sunt, in medio sunt distinguendae; ut, Sul-cus: Et è contrà; ut, No-ster.

5. In simplicibus vocibus hae literae vocali sequenti semper adhaerent, viz.

bdutHe-bdomas.quia diciturBdellium.
cnTe-chna.Cneus.
ctDo-ctus.Ctesipho.
gnA-gnus.Gnatus.
mnA-mnis.Mnemosyne.
phthNa-phtha.Phthisis.
psScri-psi.Psittacus.
ptA-ptus.Ptolomaeus.
sbLe-sbia.Sbesis.
scPi-scis.Scamnum.
smCo-smus.Smaragdus.
spA-sper.Spero.
sqTe-squa.Squalor.
stPa-stor.Sterto.
tlA-tlasTleptolemus.
tmLa-tmius.Tmolus.
tnAe-tna.Thnesko.

6. In compositis quaeque pars ab alterâ separanda est; ut Abs-con-do.

7. In compositis cum praepositione auribus & Eupbo­niae serviendum est; ut, Aufero, non absfero, & ab­stuli, non autuli: ideóque Consonantes non rarò in­terseruntur; ut, Redamo pro Reamo, Ambigo pro Amigo.

8. Post X in compositis, quorum simplicia incipi­unt ab S, rectissimè scribitur s; ut, Exscribo, ab ex & scribo; exsul, ab ex & solum; sed non in aliis; ut exoro, ab ex & oro; exigo, ab ex & ago.

Cap. 3. De Orthoëpia.

3. De Ortho­ëpia, & vitiis sermon it o­mendatia [...].

ORthoëpia est rectè Enuntiandi ratio; ut, Homo non Omo.

Pueri nec sermonem praecipitent, nec ad singulas quasque voces censilescant. Deterrendi sunt autem à vitiis sermonis vulgò propriis, cujusmodi sunt

1. Traulismus, qui est haesitantia vel titubantia oris; ut, Cacacanit pro canit. Cui vitio facilè succurritur, si cen­tones quosdam affectatae difficultatis, quàm citissimè volvant; ut,

Arx, tridens, rostris, sphinx, praester, torrida, seps, strix.

[Page 11] 2. Plateasmus, est justo crassior pronunciatio; ut Argò pro Ergô. Mountes pro Montes. Taibai pro tibi.

3. Ischnotes, est justo exilior pronunciatio; ut, Nync pro Nunc. Eliquis pro Aliquis. Aut blaesior; ut, Aputh pro Apud. Amath pro Amat.

Cap. 4. De Sententiarum Punctis.

4: De senten­tentiarum punctis, quae sunt, 1. Comma , 2. Colon : 3. Semico­lon ; 4. Periodus . 5. Parenthe­sis () 6. Interroga­tio ? Exclamatio ! 8. Hyphen -

PUnctum sive Pausa est nota distinctionis, respiran­di intervallum significans. Horum octo sunt prae­cipuè notanda.

1. Comma est semi-circulus, sententiam sustinens, breviores ejus clausulas distinguendo; ut,

Grammaticus, rhetor, geometres, pictor, aliptes,
Graeculus esuriens, in coelum, jusseris, ibit.

2. Colon sunt duo puncta, quae sententiam diuti­ùs suspendunt, medias ejus partes dirimendo; ut,

Ʋtendum est aetate: cito pede praeterit aetas.

3. Semicolon est punctum cum Commate subjecto, sententiam diutiùs paulò sustinens quàm Comma; minùs diu verò quàm Colon; ut, Tu, quid divitiae possint, consideras; quid virtus, non item.

4 Periodus est punctum plenum post perfectam sententiam; ut, Deum time. Regem honora.

5. Parenthesis sunt duae semilunulae sententiam in­cludentes, quâ remotâ sermo tamen manet inte­ger; ut.

—Princeps (quia bella minantur
Hostes) militibus urbes praemunit, & armis.

6. Interrogatio signat quaestionem duobus punctis, quorum superius est caudatum; ut, Quomodo vales?

7. Exclamatio item notatur duobus punctis, quo­rum superius est lineola in punctum descendens; ut, O'tempora! O mores!

8. [Page 17] Hyphen est lineola interposita voci dissectae in fine lineae; ut, Humanis­simé: aut in vocibus unitis, sed non compositis; ut, Res-publica.

LIB. II. De Etymologia.

Etymologia agit

ETYMOLOGIA est pars Gram­maticae, quae docet dictionum diserimina, singularum proprietates, sive Accidentia diligenter expen­dens.

Est autem dictio sive vox, pars ora­tionis, quae ipsa aliquid significat, sed in partes signi­ficantes dividi non potest; ut, Pi-e-tas.

Cap. 1. De octo Partibus Orationis, & earum Ac­cidentibus generalibus.

De octo Partibus Oratio­nis, quae sunt Declinabile [...] Indeclinabiles, Quibus acci­dunt, Numeri duo Singularis & Pluralis. Personae tr [...]s. Prima. Secunda. Tertia.

OCto sunt vocum genera.

  • 1. Nomen. Cap. 2.
  • 2. Pronomen. Cap. 23.
  • 3. Verbum. Cap. 24.
  • 4. Participium. Cap. 39.
  • [Page 19]5. Adverbium. Cap. 40.
  • 6. Conjunctio. Cap. 41.
  • 7. Praepositio. Cap. 42.
  • 8. Interjectio. Cap. 43.

Atque hae vulgò vocantur Partes Orationis, quòd ex hisce omnis oratio conficiatur.

Harum quatuorprioressuntDeclinabiles, sive va­riabiles, quae in fine possunt variari.
posterioresIndeclinabiles, sive in­variabiles, quae in fine non possunt variari.

Accidunt cuique Parti Orationis

1. Species,secundùm quam vox diciturPrimitiva, quae aliunde non trahitur; ut, Arbor, Amo.
 Derivativa, quae aliunde for­matur; ut, Arbustum, Ami­cus.
 Simplex, ut, Amicus, Amo.
2. Figura,Composita, ut, Inimicus, Re­damo.

Accidunt vocibus Declinabilibus

1. Analogia, cùm dictio convenit Communi Regulae; ut, Musa, Amo.

2. Anomalia, cùm dictio recedit à Communi Regulâ; ut, Filia, Fero.

3. NumeriSingularisloquiturde uno; ut, Lapis.
duo de pluribus; ut, Lapides.
quorum.Pluralis

[Page 21]

4. Personae tres,Prima, quae loquitur de se; ut, Ego nugans puer ludo.
Secunda, ad quam loquimur; ut, Tu nugans puer ludis.
Tertia, de quâ loquimur,; ut Ille nu­gans puer ludit.

Ego & Nos sunt semper Primae personae.

Tu & Vos, & omnes Vocativi Secundae.

Caetera Nomina, Pronomina, & Participia sunt Tertiae personae, nisi ista exprimantur vel subintel­ligantur.

Cap. 2. De Nomine, & ejus Accidentibus spe­cialibus.

Nomen rem nominat, estque Substantivum Vel Adjectivum Proprium Vel Commune. Ejus sunt

NOmen est Pars Orationis quae rem nominat sine ulla Temporis aut Personae differentiâ; ut, Ma­nus, Domus.

Estque

Substantivum, quod per se in Oratione subsistit, & nihil addi postulat ad suam significationem ex­primendam; ut, Homo.

Adjectivum quod Substantivo indiget ad suam si­gnicationem exprimendam; ut Bonus.

Substantivum indicat quid sit; ut, Equus.

Adjectivum indicat quale sit; ut, Albus.

Quorum utrunque est

Proprium, quod rem uni individuo propriam signi­ficat; ut, Carolus, Londinum, Thamisis, Anglus, Sco­tus.

Commune, sive Appellativum, quod rem multis [Page 23] communem significat; ut, Homo, Ʋrbs, Fluvius, Regio, Magnus.

Accidunt Nomini, Pronomini, & Partieipio,Casus.Cap. 3.
Genus.Cap. 4.
Declinatio.Cap. 11.
Comparatio.Cap. 17.

Cap. 3. De Casu.

Sex Casus Nominativus. Genitivus. Dativus. Accusativus. Vocativus. Ablativus.

CAsus est specalis Nominis, Pronominis, aut Par­ticipii terminatio.

Sunt autem Sex casus in utroque numero.

1. Nominatiuus est prima vox, quâ rem aliquam nominamus: praecedit autem Verbum, & respondet quaestioni Quis, aut Quid? ut, Magister docet.

2. Genitivus significat cujus sit res quaepiam, & re­spondet quaestioni Cujus? ut, Doctrina Magistri.

3. Dativus quid cuipiam attribuit, & respondet quaestioni Cui? ut, Do librum Magistro.

4. Accusativus sequitur Verbum, utpote in quem actio Verbi immediatè transit, & respondet quaesti­oni, Quem, vel Quid? ut, Amo Magistrum.

5. Vocativus vocandis compellandisve personis accommodatur; ut, O Magister.

6. Ablativus conjungitur ferè Praepositioni Ablati­vo inservienti; & respondet quaestioni à quo; ut, Accepi librum à Magistro.

Nominativus aliquando Rectus casus dicitur: caeteri verò Ob­liqui, quòd eorum terminationes flectunt à Nominativo.

Cap. 4. De Genere.

Genera septem Masculinum: Foemininum Neutrum, Commune du­orum. Commune tri­um. Dubium. Epicoenum

GEnus est Sexûs discretio ratione sermonis. Di­scernit enim inter ea nomina, quae tanquam mares aut foeminae construuntur, propter convenientiam Substantivi & Adjectivi cognoscendam.

Genera Nominum sunt septem: quorum tria prima non ineptè Simplicia, quatuor verò postrema Com­posita dici queant.

Dignoscuntur autem suis Articulis (sive notis) qui à Pronominibus accipiuntur, & in hunc modum vari­antur.

Singulariter MascFoem.NeutPluraliterMasc.Foem.Neut.
Nom.HicHaecHocHiHaeHaec
Gen.HujusHujusHujusHorumHarumHorum
Dat.HuicHuicHuicHisHisHis
Acc.HuncHancHocHosHasHaec
       
Abl.HôcHacHôcHisHisHis

1. Masculinum genus maribus attribuitur; cujus nota est Hic; ut Hic vir.

2. Foemininum foeminis attribuitur; cujus nota est Haec; ut, Haec mulier.

3. Neurrum nec maribus, nec foeminis attribuitur; cujus nota est Hoc; ut, Hoc saxum.

[Page 27] 4. Commune duorum ex Masculino & Foeminino componitur; cujus nota est Hic & Haec; ut, Hic & Haec Parens.

5. Cmmune trium ex omnibus simplicibus generi­bus componitur; cujus nota est Hic, Haec & Hoc; ut, Hic, Haec, & Hoc, Felix.

6. Dubium aut Masculinum aut Foemininum Ar­ticulum indifferenter assumere potest; cujus nota est Hic vel Haec; ut, Hic vel Haec Dies.

Epicoenum sub uno Articulo utrunque sexum com­plectitur; ut, Hic passer. Hoc autem in genere, ad vitan­dam ambiguitatem, sexum exprimere solemus per marem & foe­minam; ut, Passer mas, Passer foemina.

Propria quae Maribus: VEL, GUILIELMI LILII Regulae DE GENERIBUS NOMINUM.

CAP. 5. De Regulis Generalibus Propriorum.

Regulae de ge [...]erious nomi­num. 1. Generales. 1. Substantivotum Propriorum. 1. Propria 1. Deorum, 2. Virorum, 3. Fluviorum 4. Mensium, 5. Ventorum, mascula sunt. 2. Propria 1. Dearum, 2. Mulierum. 3. Uibium, 4. Regionum, 5. Insulatum, Faeminina sunt,

1. PRopria, quae maribus tribuuntur, Mascula dicas; Ʋt sunt 1. Divorum, Mars, Bacchus, Apollo. 2. Viro­rum, Ʋt, Cato, Virgilius. 3. Fluviorum; ut, Tibris, Orontes. 4. Mensium; ut, October. 5. Ventorum; ut, Lybs, Notus, Au­ster.

PRopria foemineum referentia nomina sexum,
Foemineo generi tribuuntur: sive 1. Dearum
Sunt; ut, Juno, Venus: 2. Mulierum; seu, Anna, Philotis.
3. Urbium; ut Elis, Opus. 4. Regionum; ut, Graecia, Persis.
5. Insulae item nomen; ceu, Creta, Britannia, Cyprus.
Excipienda tamen quaedam sunt Ʋrbium; ut, ista
1. Mascula, Sulmo, Agragas: 2. quaedam neutralia; ut Argos
Tybur, Praeneste: & genus Anxur quod dat utrumque.
Cap. 6. De Regulis Generalibus Appella­tivorum.

II: Generalis Appellativo­tum. 1. Appellati [...] Arborum sunt foeminina. 2. Appellative voluerum, fo­tarum, & [...] Epico [...] sunt. 3. Omne i [...] [...] & inva [...] abile [...] Regulae speci­ales Appella­tivorum sunt tres.

I.
APpellativa arborum erunt muliebria; ut, alnus,
Cupressus, cedrus. Mas pinus, mas oleaster:
Et sunt neutra, siler, suber, thus, robur, acérquo
II.
SƲnt etiam volucrum; ceu, passer, hirundo: ferarum,
Ʋt, Tygris, Vulpes: & piscium; ut ostrea, cetus,
Dicta Epicoena: quibus vox ipsa genus feret aptum.
III.
Attamen ex cunctis, quae diximus antè, notandum,
Omne quod exit in um, (si hominum modò Propria tollas)
Esse genus neutrum: sic invariabile nomen.
Sed nunc de reliquis, quae Appellativa vocantur,
Aut quae sunt tanquam Appellativa, ordine dicam:
Nam genus his semper dignoscitur ex Genitivo:
Infrà ut monstrabit Specialis Regula triplex.
Cap. 3. De primâ Regulâ Speciali, & ejus Exceptionibus.

1. Nomen non crescens, est Muliebre. Excipiuntur Masculin [...]. Neutra. [...]. Communia. Excipe haec Puerpep.

NOmen non crescens genitivo, ceu caro, carnis;
Capra, caprae; nubes, nubis; genus est muli­ebre.
1.
MAscula nomina in a dicuntur multa virorum;
Ʋt, Scriba, assecla, scurra, rabula, lixa, lanista.
2. Mascula Graecorum quot declinatio prima
Fundit in as & in es, & ab illis quot per a fiunt;
Ʋt, Satrapas, Satrapa; Athletes, Athleta. 3. Leguntur
Mascula item verres, natalis, aqualis. 4. Ab asse
Nata; ut, centussis. 5. Conjunge lienis, & orbis,
Callis, caulis, follis, collis, mensis, & ensis,
Fustis, funis, panis, penis, crinis, & ignis,
Cassis, fascis, torris, sentis, piscis, & unguis,
Et vermis, vectis, postis, societur & axis.
[Page 33] 6. Mascula in er, ceu venter; in os, vel us, ut logos, annus.
Foeminei generissunt 1. mater, 2. humus, domus, alvus,
Et colus, & quartae pro fructu ficus, acúsque
Porticus, atque tribus, socrus, nurus & manus, idus;
Huc anus addenda est, huc mystica vannus Iacchi.
3. His jungas os in us vertentia Graeca, Papyrus,
Antidotus, costus, diphthongus, byssus, abyssus,
Crystallus, Synodus, sapphirus, eremus, & arctus,
Cum multis allis quae nunc perscribere longum est.
II.
NEutrum nomen in e, si gignit is; ut, mare, rete.
2. Et quot in on vel in um fiunt; ut, barbiton, ovum.
Est neutrum hyppomanes genus, & neutrum cacoë­thes,
Et virus, pelagus. 4. Neutrum modò, màs modò vulgus.
III.
INcerti generis sunt talpa, & dama, canalis,
Et balanus, finis, clunis, restis, penus, amnis,
[Page 35] Pampinus, & corbis, linter, torquis, specus, anguis,
Pro morbo ficus, fici, dans; atque phaselus,
Lecythus, ac atomus, grossus, pharus, & Paradisus.
IV.
COmpositum à verbo dans a commune duorum est,
Grajugena, à gigno; agricola, à colo; id advena monstrat,
A venio: adde senex, auriga, & verna, sodalis,
Vates, extorris, patruelis, pér que duellis,
Affinis, juvenis, testis, civis, canis, hostis.
Cap. 3. De secundâ Speciali Regulâ, & ejus Exceptionibus.

II. Nomen acu [...] crescens est muliebre. Excipiuntur, Masculina, Neuters. Dubia, Communi

NOmen, crescentis penultima si genitivi
Syllaba acuta sonat, velut haec pietas, pietatis,
Virtus, virtutis monstrat, genus est muliebre.
I.
MAscula dicuntur monosyllaba nomina quaedam,
Sal, sol, ren, & splen, Car, Ser, vir, vas-vadis, as, mas,
Bes, Cres, praes, & pes, glis-gliris habens genitvo,
Mos, flos, ros, & Tros, mus, dens, mons, pons, simul & fons,
[Page 37] Seps pro serpente, gryps, Thrax, Rex, grex-gregis, & Phryx.
2. Mascula sunt etiam polysyllaba in n, ut, Acarnan,
Lichen, & delphin: 3. & in o signantia corpus,
Ʋt leo, curculio, sic senio, ternio, sermo.
4. Mascula in er, or, & os; ceu crater, conditor, heros.
5, Sic torrens, nefrens, oriens, cum pluribus in dens,
Quale bidens, quando pro instrumento reperitur.
6. Adde gigas, elephas, adamas, Garamásque, tapésque,
Atque lebes, Cures, magnes, unúmque meridi.
Es, nomen quintae. 7. Et quae componuntur ab asse,
Ʋt dodrans, semis. 8. Jungantur Mascula Samnis,
Hydrops, nycticorax, thorax, & mascula vervex,
Phoenix, & bombyx, pro vermiculo. Attamen ex his
Sunt muliebre genus, Syren, nec non soror, uxor.
II.
SƲnt neutralia & haec monosyllaba nomina, mel, fel,
Lac, far, ver, cor, aes, vas-vasis, os-ossis, & oris,
Rus, thus, jus, crus, pus. Et in al polysyllaba in árque,
[Page 39] Ʋt capital, laquear. Neutrum halec, & muliebre.
III.
SƲnt dubia haec Python, scrobs, serpens, bubo, rudens, grus.
Perdix, lynx, lymax, stirps pro trunco, pedis & calx.
Adde dies numero tantùm mas esto secundo.
IV.
SƲnt Commune, parens, autórque, infans, adole­scens,
Dux, illex, haeres, exlex; à fronte creata,
Ʋt bifrons, custos, bos, fur, sus, atque sacerdos.
Cap. 9. De tertia Speciali Regulâ, & ejus exceptionibus.

III. Nomen graviter crescens, ef [...] masculinum. Excipiuntur Foemiaina. Neutra, Dubia. Commnnit.

NOmen, crescentis penultima si genitivi
Sit gravis, ut sanguis, genitivo sanguinis, est mas.
I.
Foeminei generis sit hyperdissyllabon in do,
Quod dinis; atque in go, quod dat ginis in genitivo.
Id tibi dulcedo faciens dulcedinis, idque
Monstrat compago, compaginis. 2. Adjice virgo,
Grando, fides, compes, teges, & seges, arbor, hyémsque.
[Page 41] Sic bacchar, sindon, Gorgon, icon, & Amazon.
3. Graecula in as vel in is finita; ut, Lampas, Iaspis.
5. His forfex, pellex, carex, simul atque supellex,
Appendix, histrix, coxendix, adde filixque.
6. Halcyon, & mulier, possunt hâc classe reponi.
II.
ESt neutrale genus signans rem non animatam,
Nomen in a; ut, problema; en, ut omen; ar, ut jubar; ur dans,
Ʋt jecur; us, ut onus; put, ut occiput. 2. Attamen ex his
Mascula sunt pecten, furfur. 3. Sunt neutra cadaver,
Verber, iter, suber, pro fungo tuber, & uber,
Gingiber, & laser, cicer, & piper, atque papaver,
Et siser, atque siler. 4. Neutra aequor, marmor, adórque.
5. Atque pecus, quando pecoris facit in genitivo.
III.
SƲnt dubii generis cardo, margo, cinis, obex,
[Page 43] Pulvis, adeps, forceps, pumex, ramex, anas, imbrex,
Adde culex, natrix, & onyx cum prole, siléxque,
Quamvis haec meliùs vult mascula dicier usus.
IV.
COmmunis generis sunt ista, vigil, pugil, exsul,
Praesul, homo, nemo, martyr, Ligur, augur, & Arcas,
Antistes, miles, pedes, interpres, comes, hospes,
Sic ales, praeses, princeps, auceps, eques, obses,
2. Atque alia à verbis quae nomina multa creantur;
Ʋt, conjux, judex, vindex, opifex, & aruspex.

Cap. 10. De Generibus Adjectivorum.

1. Adjectiv [...] unius vocis sunt omnis ge­neris. Adjectiva ge­miuae vocis in prima sunt Commune du­st [...], in secun­da Neutra [...]. Adjectiva tr [...] ­um vocum, in prima sunt Masculini, in secunda foemi­nini, in tertia neutrius ge­neris. 1. Adjectiva propè Sub­stantiva. Adjectiva quaeper er & is [...].

I.
ADjectiva unam duntaxat habentia vocem,
Ʋt felix, audax, retinent genus omne sub una;
II.
Sub gemina si voce cadant, velut omnis, & omne;
Vox commune duûm prior est, Vox altera neutrum.
[Page 45] At si tres variant voces, sacer, ut sacra, sacrum;
Vox prima est mas, altera foemina, tertia neutrum.
1.
At sunt quae flexu propè Substantiva vocares;
Adjectiva tamen naturâ usúque reperta.
Talia sunt pauper, puber, cum degener, uber,
Et dives, locuples, sospes, comes, atque superstes;
Cum paucis aliis quae lectio justa docebit.
2.
Haec proprium quendam sibi flexum adsciscere gaudent,
Campester, volucer, celeber, celer, atque saluber:
Junge pedester, equester, & acer, junge paluster.
Ac alacer, sylvester: At haec tu sic variabis,
Hic celer, hoc celeris, neutro hoc celere; aut aliter sic,
Hic atque haec celeris, rursum hoc celere est tibi Neu­trum.

Cap. 11. De Declinatione primâ.

Declinatio­nes sunt quin­que. Nomina Pri­mae variantur ut Musa,

DEclinatio est variatio dictionis per Casus.

Sunt antem Declinationes nominum quin­que.

Dignoscitur nomen cujus sit Declinationis ex terminatione genitivi singularis; desinit enim

genitivus1mae2dae3tiae4tae5tae
inaeiisûsei

Genitivus fit à Nominativo, (qui est prima vox) mutatâ terminatione; alii autem casus à Genitivo formantur.

Vocativus singularis plerunque similis est Nomi­nativo; pluralis semper.

Nomina neutrius generis habent nominativum, ac­cusativum, & vocativum similes in utroque numero; qui tres casus in plurali desinunt in a.

Dativus, & Ablativus plurales semper sunt si­miles.

Genitivus pluralis in complurimis Syncopen ad­mittit.

Prima Declinatio est nominum Latinorum (ple­runque foemininorum) non crescentium in a; quae variantur sicut Musa.

Primae Declinationis terminatio­nes suntSingulariterNominativocasuaEjus Exemplum sive Typus estMusa
GenitivoaeMusae
DativoaeMusae
AccusativoamMusam
VocativoaMusa
AblativoâMusâ
PluraliterNominativocasuaeMusae
GenitivoarumMusarum
DativoisMusis
AccusativoasMusas
VocativoaeMusae
AblativoisMusis

As in Genitivo reperiturad Graecorum imitationem; ut, Pater­familias.

Prisci dissolvebant ae in a [...],; ut, aulai pro aulae.

Filia, nata, dea, equa, cum paucis aliis Dativum & Ablati­vum pluralem mittunt in abus, ut distinguantur à suis Masculi­nis, Filius, natus, Deus, equus, quae sequuntur formam secundae Declinationis.

Est etiam haec Detlinatio Graecorum Masculinorum in as, & es, & Foemininorum in a, & e.

As, & a, Accusativum am & an faciunt; ut,

Nom.Gen.Dat.Acc.Voc.Ablat.
AeneasAeneaeAeneaeAeneam, anAeneaAeneâ
MaiaMaiaeMaiaeMaiam, anMaiaMaiâ

Graeca in plurali declinantur ut Latina.

Es, in Accusativo en sumit, in Vocativo vel Ablativo e, vel a; ut,

Nom.Gen.Dat.Acc.Voc. & Ablat.
AnchisesAnchisaeAnchisaeAnchisenAnchise vel Anchisâ

E, Genitivum in es mittit, Dativum in e, Accusativum in en, Vocativum & Ablativum in e; ut,

Nom.Gen.Dat.Acc.Voc. & Abl.
PenelopePenelopesPenelopePenelopenPenelope

Sunt qui huc addunt Hebraea quaedam in am, ut, Adam, Adae; quae tamen meliùs ad secundam Declinationem reducun­tur, addendo us; ut, Adamus, Adami.

Cap. 12. De secunda Declinatione.

Secundae; ut [...] Magister, Do­minus, Regnum

SEcunda Declinatio est (plerunque) Masculino­rum,

inerutMagisterNeutrorum in um; ut, Regnum.
usDominus

Terminationes hujus Declinatio­nis suntSingulariterNom.r, us, um.Ejus Exempla sive Typi suntMagisterDominusRegnum
Gen.i.MagistriDominiRegni
Dat.o.MagistroDominoRegno
Acc.um.MagistrumDominumRegnum
Voc.r, e, um.MagisterDomineRegnum
Abl.o.MagistroDominoRegno
PluraliterNom.i, a.MagistriDominiRegna
Gen.orum.MagistrorumDominorumRegnorum
Dat.is.MagistrisDominisRegnis
Acc.os, a.MagistrosDominosRegna
Voc.i, a.MagistriDominiRegna
Abl.is.MagistrisDominisRegnis

Quando Nominativus exit in us, Vocativus exit in e; sed Deus format ô Deus, & Filius, ô fili.

Propria Hominum in ius faciunt Vocativum in i; ut, Nom. Georgius, Voc. Georgi.

Agnus, lucus, chorus, fluvius, formant Vocativum in e, & in us.

Legimus pluraliDiiDeorumDiis, Deos, Dii, Diis.
DeiDeûm

Nomina Graeca hujus Declinationis tres habent terminationes; viz. eus Masculini, os Masculini & Foeminini, & on Neu­trius.

Eus Genitivum ferunt in eï, vel eos, Dativum in eï Accusa­tivum in ea, Vocativum in eu, Ablativum in eo.

Nom.Gen.Dat.Acc.Voc.Abl.
Orpheuspheï, pheosOrpheïOrpheapheupheo

Os Accusativum in on mittit; ut, Nom. Delos, Gen. Deli' Dat. Delo, Acc. Delon, Voc. Delt, Abl. Delo.

Sed Attica in os, Genitivum in o mittunt; Androgeos, An­drogeo, &c. Etcontracta in us formant Vocaivum in u; ut Oedi­pus, Oedipu.

On formatur more aliorum Neutrorum; ut. Nom. Ilion, Gen. Ilii, Dat. Ilio, Acc. Ilion, Voc. Ilion, Abl. Ilio.

Cap. 13. De tertia Decliatione.

Tertiae, ut La­pis, aut Caput. Quae nomina formant Acc [...] in im. Im & em. Abl. ju [...]. Nom pl. in ia. Es & eis. Gen. in ium. Abl. in i [...] & [...].

TErtia Declinatio est admodum varia. continet enim omnia genera, & undecim (ad minimum) terminationes in Nominativo singulari: a, c, e, i, l, n, o, r, s, t, x.

Terminationes hujus Declinatio­nis suntSingular.Nom.variaeEjus Exempla sive Typi suntLapisCaput
Gen.isLapidisCapitis
Dat.iLapidiCapiti
Acc.emLapidemCaput
Voc.variaeLapisCaput
Abl.eLapideCapite
Plural.Nom.esLapidumCapita
Gen.umLapidesCapitum
Dat.ibusLapidibusCapitibus
Acc.esLapidesCapita
Voc.esLapidesCapita
Abl.ibusLapidibusCapitibus

[Page 55] Quorundam Accusativi flectuntut tantùm in im; ut, Vim, ravim, sitim, tussim, maguderim, Charybdim, & amussim. Quibus addas & Fluviorum nomina; ut, Ara­rim, Tybrim.

Quaedam Accusativos flectunt in im, & em com­muniter; ut, Pelvis, turris, buris, puppis, torquis, secu­ris, restis, febris, clavis, bipennis, aqualis, navis.

Quorum Accusativus in im tantùm desinit, iis ab­lativus exit in i; Tussim, Abl. tussi.

Mensium nomina in er, & is, Ablativum in i so­lùm mittunt; ut, September, Abl. bri; Aprilis, Abl. Aprili.

Neutra desinentia in al, ar, & e, Ablativum ma­gna ex parte mittunt in i;

ut,Vectigal, Abl. li.Nam Rete in Ablati­vo, est à Retis.
Calcar, Abl. ri.
Rete, Abl. ti.

Haec tamen in ar & e retinent e in Ablativo: Far, hepar, jubar, nectar, gausape, praesaepe, Soracte, Prae­neste, Reate.

Adjectiva, quae Nominativum communem in is vel er, & e Neutrum habent Ablativum mittunt in i; ut, Fortis, forti; acer, vel acris, acri.

Quae Adjectivorum naturam induunt, majori exparte mittunt Ablativum in i; ut, Sodalis, li.

[Page 57] Excipe propria; ut, Clemens, te.

Nomina, quorum Accusativi per em & im fini­unt, formant Ablativos in e & i; ut, Puppis, Acc. pem vel pim, Abl. pe vel pi.

Par, quoque cum compositis, e & i habet. Com­parativa etiam, ut melior, & reliqua Adjectiva, prae­ter ea quae suprà dicta sunt in er & is. Sed Pauper, degener, uber, sospes, hospes, in e tantùm faciunt Abla­tivum.

Substantiva quaedam, ut, Ignis, amnis, anguis, su­pellex, vectis, unguis: Gentilia, ut, Arpinâs: et Ver­balia in trix; ut, Victrix, Ablativum mittunt in e & i.

Neutra, quorum Ablativus exit in i, vel in e & i, Nominativum pluralem mittunt in ia; ut, fortis, for­tia; felix, felicia. Praeter Comparativa; ut, fortiora; Plus haber plura & pluria. Nonnulla Nominativum & Accusativum pluralem mittunt per es & eis diph­thongum; ut, Omnes vel omneis. Eis autem aliquan­do contrahitur in is; ut, Sardis.

Ex Ablativis in i tantùm, vel in e & i, fit pluraliter Genitivus in ium; ut, utili, utilium; puppi vel puppe, puppium. Praeter Comparativa; ut, meliorum, Item praeter ista; Supplicum, complicum, strigilum, artificum, veterum, vigilum [Page 59] Memorum, inopum, pugilum. At plus, plurium for­mat.

Quando Nominativi singulares duabus consonan­tibus finiuntur, genitivi plurales exeunt in ium; ut, Pars, partium.

Excipe. Hyemum, principum, forcipum, municipum, inopum, caelibum, clientum, participum.

Ubi in Nominativis & Genitivis singularibus re­periuntur pares syllabae, Genitivus pluralis exit in ium; ut, Collis, collium. His adde; virium, salium, ditium, manium, penatium, litium.

Excipe tamen vatum, juvenum, canum, opum, apum, panum.

As format assium; mas, marium; vas-vadis, vadium; nox, noctium; nix, nivium; os, ossium; faux, faucium; mus, murium; caro, carnium; cor, cordium.

[Page 61] Ales facit alituum, & coelites, coelituum, assumen­do u.

Boum à bos bovis, anomalum est, ut etiam bobus vel bubus, pro bovibus,

Festorum nomina quae tantùm pluralia sunt, Ge­nitivum aliquando in orum; ut, Agonalia, liorum: aliquando in ium; ut, Floralia, lium: aliquando tam in orum, quàm in ium mittunt; ut, Saturnalia, lio­rum, & lium.

Neutra Graeca singularia in a, faciunt Dativum & Ablativum pluralem in is & ibus; ut, Problema, ma­tibus, vel matis. Sic etiani Quinquatria, triis, vel tri­bus.

Graeco fonte derivata quando juxta linguae suae morem variantur, haec exempla imitantur.

Sing.Nom.Gen.Dat.Acc.Voc.Abl.Horum nonnul­la formant Geniti­vum pluralem in ων vel ium.
Titanananosanianaanane
Arcasasadosadiadaasade
Phyllisisidosidiidaiide
Genesisisis, eosiim, inii
Opususuntosuntiuntauunte
Tethysysyosyiynyy
Didooûsoooo
Achilleseseosieaee

Cap. 14. De quarta Declinatione.

QUarta Declinatio duas tantùm sortitur termina­tiones in Recto singulari,

Masculinorum & Foeminorum in usutManus:
Neutrorum in u [...]Cornu.

[Page 63]

Terminationes hujus Declinatio­nis suntSingularlyNom.us, u.Ejus Exempla five Typi suntManusCornu
Gen.ûs, u.ManûsCornu
Dat.ui, u.ManuiCornu
Acc.um, u.ManumCornu
Voc.us, u.ManusCornu
Abl.u, u.ManuCornu
Plural.Nom.us, ua.ManusCornua
Gen.uum,ManuumCornuum
Dat.ibus.ManibusCornibus
Acc.us, ua.ManusCornua
Voc.us, ua.ManusCornua
Abl.ibus.ManibusCornibus

Olim Genitivus singularis exibat in i & üis, in­dè Veteres dixerunt fructi pro fructûs, & anüis pro anûs.

Sacro-sanctum nomen Jesus habet in Accusati­vo Jesum, in reliquis verò casibus Jesu.

Dativus interdum u habet; ut, fructu pro fructui.

Haec Dativum & Ablativum pluralem in ubus for­mant; viz. Artus, arcus, tribus, acus, ficus, specus, quer­cus, lacus, partus, veru, genu. Caetera omnia in ibus.

Cap. 15. De quinta Declinatione.

Quintae, [...].

QUinta Declinatio unicam habet terminatio­nem in es; ut; Facies.

Omnia nomina hujus Declinationis sunt foemini­na; exceptis Dies, & meridies.

Terminationes hujus Declinat.SingulariterNom.esEius Exemplum sive Typus estFaciesGenitivus singularis o­lim etiam in es, ii, & e, ex­ibat, & Dativus aliquando in e.
Gen.eiFaciei
Dat.eiFaciei
Acc.emFaciem
Voc.esFaciesQuaedam nomina tertiae Declinationis juxta hanc flectebantur; ut, Plebs, plebei.
Abl.eFacie
PluraliterNom.esFaciesHaec Declinatio Genit. Dat. & Ablativum plura­lem in nullis sortita est, praeter Res, species, facies, acies, dies, & meridies.
Gen.erumFacierum
Dat.ebusFaciebus
Acc.esFacies
Voc.esFacies
Abl.ebusFaciebus

Cap. 16. De flexione Adjecti­vorum.

Adjectiva tri­um Termina­tionum vati­antur sicut Bonus. Adjectiva tri­um Arriculo­rum variantur ut, Felix, aut Tristis.

ADjectiva flectuntur tribus Terminationibus, vel tribus Articulis.

Adjectiva trium Terminationum variantur ad for­mam primae & secundae Declinationis, viz. r sicut Magister; us sicut Dominus; a sicut Musa; um sicut Regnum.

Horum exemplum sive typus fitSingulariterNom.BonusBonaBonum
Gen.BoniBonaeBoni
Dat.BonoBonaeBono
Acc.BonumBonamBonum
Voc.BoneBonaBonum
Abl.BonoBonâBono
PluraliterNom.BoniBonaeBona
Gen.BonorumBonarumBonorum
Dat.BonisBonisBonis
Acc.BonosBonasBona
Voc.BoniBonaeBona
Abl.BonisBonisBonis

[Page 67] Ʋnus, totus, solus, ullus, alter, uter, & eorum com­posita formant Genitivum in ïus, & Dativum in i: sic & alius, alia, aliud, Gen. alius, Dat. alii, &c.

Ambo & duo sunt anomala, & formant neutrum ge­nus per o: sic autem variantur.

PluraliterNom.AmboAmbaeAmbo
Gen.AmborumAmbarumAmborum
Dat.AmbobusAmbabusAmbobus
Acc.AmbosAmbasAmbo
Voc.AmboAmbaeAmbo
Abl.AmbobusAmbabusAmbobus

Adjectiva unius vel duarum Terminationum se­quuntur formam tertiae Declinationis, & flectuntur tribus Articulis.

Horum Exempla sintSingul.NomHic, haec, & hoc, Felix.Singul.Nom.Hic, & haec, Tristis, & hoc, Triste.
Gen.Hujus, Felicis.Gen.Hujus, Tristis.
Dat.Huic, Felici.Dat.Huic, Tristi.
Acc.Hunc, & hanc, Felicem, & hoc, Felix,Acc.Hunc, & hanc Tri­stem, & hoc Triste.
Voc.Felix.Voc.Tristis, & Triste.
Abl,Hoc, hac, & hoc, Felice, vel Felici.Abl.Hoc, hac, & hoc, Tristi
Plural.Nom.Hi, & hae, Felices, & haec, Felicia.Plural.Nom.Hi, & hae, Tristes, & haec Tristia.
Gen.Horum, harum, & ho­rum, Felicium.Gen.Horum, harum, & horum, Tristium.
Dat.His, FelicibusDat.His, Tristibus.
Acc.Hos, & has, Felices, & haec. Felicia.Acc.Hos, & has, Tristes, & haec, Tristia.
Voc.Felices, & Felicia.Voc.Tristes, & Tristia.
Abl.Felicibus.Abl.His, Tristibus.

[Page 69] Nomina Composita à duobus rectis declinantur in utrisque; ut, Res-publica, Rei-publicae; jus-jurandum, juris-jurandi

Composita verò à recto & obliquo, declinantur tantùm ex parte recti; ut, Pater-familiâs, patris-fami­liâs.

Cap. 17. De Comparatione.

Comparatjo­nis Gradus sunt tres. Positivus. Comparativus Superlativus. Quo'undam verò Compara­tio est Irregu­laris. Inufitatior. Defectival Abusiva.

COmparantur nomina, quorum significatio augeri, minuive potest.

Comparatio est variatio dictionis per Gradus.

Gradus Comparationis sunt tres,Positivus.
Comparativus.
Superlativus.

Positivus Gradus est prima vox quae rem simplici­ter, & sine excessu significat; ut, Tristis, durus.

Comparativus Positivi significationem per magis auget; ut, Tristior, durior.

Superlativus supra Positivum cum Adverbio valdè vel maximè significat; ut, Tristissimus, durissimus.

Compara­tivusfit regulariter à primo Posi­tivi casu in i, addendoor, & us; ut, à Tristi fit tristior, & tristius; à Duri, durior, & durius.
Superla­tivusssimus; ut, à Tristi, fit tri­stissimus; à Duri, durissi­mus.

Positiva in r, formant Superlativum assumendo rimus; ut, Pulcer, pulcerrimus.

[Page 71] Excipiuntur autem Dexter, dexterior, dextimus; & sinister, sinisterior, sinistimus, prout antiqui forma­bant.

Sex ista in lis formant Superlativum mutando lis in limus; viz. Docilis, docillimus; agilis, agillimus; gracilis, gracillimus; humilis, humillimus; similis, simil­limus; facilis, facillimus.

Quae derivantur à dico, loquor, volo, facio, compa­rantur tanquam à Positivis in ens; ut,

Maledicus, Maledicentior, Maledicentissimus.
Magniloquus, Magniloquentior, Magniloquentissimus.
Benevolus, Benevolentior, Benevolentissimus.
Magnificus, Magnificentior, Magnificentissimus.

Si vocalis praecedit us finale, fit gradus Com­parativus per magis, & Superlativus per maximè; ut, Pius, magis Pius, maximè Pius.

Haec etiam à Regula Generali praecedente excipi­untur.

Bonus, melior, optimus. Malus, pejor, pessimus. Magnus, major, maximus. Parvus, minor, minimus.Multus plurimus, multa plu­rima, multum plus plurimum. Vetus, veterior, veterrimus. Maturus, maturior, maturi­mus, & maturissimus.
 Nequam, nequior, nequissi­mus.

Et istiusmodi multa, quorum Positivi ab Adverbiis & Praepositionibus derivantur; ut,

Citer, citerior, eitimus, à Citra.
Exterus, exterior,extimus,ab Extra.
extremus,
Inferus, inferior, infimus, ab Infra.
Posterus, posterior, postremus, à post.
Superus, superior,supremusà Supra.
summus

Quibus addi solent, Ʋltra, ulterior, ultimus. Propè, pro­pior, proximus. Pridem, prior, primus; & Diu, diutior, diurissimus.

Haec in legendis autoribus rarò occurrunt, rarò igitur sunt usurpanda, viz. Assiduior, strenuior: egregi­issimus, mirificissimus, pientissimus, vel piissimus, ipsissimus, perpetuissimus, tuissimus, exiguissimus, multissimus, pro­ximior.

Quaedam carent Positivo, Ocyor, ocyssimus; Potior, potissimus; Deterior, deterrimus; Penitior, penitissimus.

Quaedam carent Comparativo; Novus, novissimus; Inclytus, inclytissimus; Invitus, invitissimus, Meritus, meritissimus; Sacer, sacerrimus; Falsus, falsissimus; Fidus, fidissimus; Nuper, nuperus, nuperrimus; Diversus, diversissimus.

Quaedam carent Superlativo; ut, Opimus, opimior; Ju­venis, junior; Senex, senior; Declivis, declivior; Longinquus, [Page 75] ginquior; salutaris, salutarior; supinus, supinior; adoles­cens, adolescentior; ingens, ingentior; satur, saturior; an­tè, anterior; infinitus, infinitior; taciturnus, taciturnior; communis, communior.

Licentior est solus Comparativus.

Interdum etiam à Substantivis fit Comparatio, sed abusivè; ut, Nero, Neronior; Poenus, Poenior.

Quae Genus: SIVE ROB. ROBINSONI Regulae de Heteroclitis, seu Anomalis.

Cap. 18. De Heteroclitis variantibus.

Heteroclits sunt Vatint

1. QƲae genus aut flexum variant, 2. quaecunque novato Ritu deficiunt, 3. superántve, Heteroclita sunto.

Haec genus ac partim flexum variantia cornis,
[Page 77] 1. Pergamus infelix urbs Troum Pergama gignit;
Quod nisi plurali careat facit ipsa supellex;
Singula foemineis, neutris pluralia gaudent.
2. Dat prior his numerus neutrum genus, alter utrunque;
Rastrum, cum fraeno, filum, simul atque capistrum.
3. Argos item & coelum sunt singula neutra: sed audi,
Mascula duntaxat coelos vocitabis & Argos.
4. Nundinum, & hinc epulum, quibus addito balneum, & haec sunt
Neutra quidem primo, muliebria ritè secundo.
Balnea plurali Juvenalem constat habere.
5. Haec maribus dantur singularia, plurima neutris;
Maenalus, atque sacer mons Dindymus, Ismarus, atque
Tartara, Taygetus, sic Taenara, Massica, & altus
Gargarus. 6. At numerus genus his dabit alter utrunque;
Sibilus, atque jocus, locus, & Campanus Ayernus.
Cap. 19. De Heteroclitis defectivis Casu.

2. Defectiva Ca­sus.

2. QƲae sequitur manca est Numero, Casúve propago:

1. Quae nullum variant casum; ut, fas, nîl, nihil, instar; Multa & in u simul i, ut sunt haec cornú que, genú que; Sic gummi, frugi; sic Tempe, tot, quot, & omnes A tribus ad centum numeros Aptota vocabis.

2. Estque Monoptoton nomen, cui vox cadit una; Ceu noctu, natu, jussu, injussu, simul astu, Promtu, permissu, plurali legimus astus, Legimus inficias, sed vox ea sola reperta est.

2. Sunt Diptota, quibus duplex flexura remansit, Ʋt, fors, forte dabit sexto; spontis quoque sponte; Sic plus, pluris habet; repetundarum, repetundis; Jugeris, & sexto dat jugere; verberis autem Verbere; suppetiae quarto quoque suppetias dant. Tantundem, dat tantidem, simul impetis hoc dat Impete; junge vicem sexto vice: nec lego plura Verberis, atque vicem, sic plus, cum jugere, cunctos Quatuor haec numero casus tenuere secundo.

3. Tres quibus inflectis casus Triptota vocantur, Ʋt, precis, atque precem, petit & prece blandus amicam, Sic opis est nostrae fer opem legis, atque ope dignus. Integra vox vis est, nisi desit fortè Dativus; Omnibus his mutilus numerus prior, integer alter.

5. Quae referunt, ut, qui; quae percontantur, ut, ecquis? Et quae distribuunt; ut, nullus, neuter, & omnis.

[Page 81] Infinita solent his jungi, ut, quilibet, alter; Quinto haec saepe carent casu; & Pronomina praeter Quatuor haec infrà, noster, nostras, meus, & tu.

Cap. 20. De Heteroclitis defectivis Numero.

Defectiva numero. singulars [...]

1.
PRopria cuncta notes, quibus est natura coërcens,
Plurima nè fuerint, ut, Mars, Cato, Gallia, Roma,
Ida, Tagus, Laelaps, Parnassus, Bucephalúsque.
His frumenta dabis, pensa, herbas, uda, metalla;
In quibus Autorum quae sint placita ipse requiras;
Est ubi pluralem retinent haec, est ubi spernunt.
2.
Hordea, farra, forum, mel, mulsum, defruta, thúsque,
Tres tantùm similes voces pluralia servant.
3.
Hesperus, & vesper, pontus, limúsque, fimúsque,
Sic pecus, & sanguis, sic aether, nemo; sed ista
Mascula sunt numerum vix excedentia primum.
Nemo caret genito, quinto, numeróque secundo.
4.
Singula foeminei generis, pluralia rarò;
Pubes, atque salus, sic talio cum indole, tussis,
[Page 83] Pix, humus, atque lues, sitis, & fuga, junge quiétem,
Sic cholera, atque fames, bilisque senecta, juventus:
Sed tamen haec soboles, labes, ut & omnia quintae,
Tres similes casus plurali saepe tenebunt:
Excipe res, species, facies, aciésque diésque,
Quas voces numero totas licet esse secundo,
Istis multa solent muliebria nectere ut haec sunt;
Stultitia, invidia, sapientia, desidia, atque
Id genus innumerae voces, quas lectio praebet.
Rariùs his numerum, quandoque sed, adde secundum.
5.
Nec licet his Neutris numerum deferre secundum;
Delicium, senium, lethum, coenúmque salúmque;
Sic barathrum, virus, vitrum, viscúmque penúmque:
Adde gelu, solium, jubar. Hic quoque talia ponas,
Quae tibi, si observes, occurrent multa legenti.
6.
Mascula sunt numero tantùm contenta secundo;
Manes, majóres, cancelli, liberi, & antes;
Menses [profluvium,] lemures, fasti, atque minores.
Cùm genus assignant, natales: adde penates.
Et loca plurali, quales Gablique, Locrique,
Et quaecunque legas passim similis rationis.
7.
Hac sunt Foeminei generis, numerique secundi;
[Page 85] Exuviae, phalerae, gratésque, manubiae, & idus,
Antiae, & induciae, simul insidiaeque, minaeque,
Excubiae, nonae, nugae, tricaeque, calendae,
Quisquiliae, thermae, cunae, dirae, exequiaeque,
Inferiae, & feriae, sic primitiaeque plagaeque
Retia signantes, & valvae, divitiaeque,
Nuptiae item & lactes. Addantur Thebae, & Athenae;
Quod genus invenias, & nomina plura locorum.
8.
Rariùs haec primo plurali neutra leguntur;
Moenia, cum tesquis, praecordia, lustra ferarum,
Arma, mapalia, sic bellaria, munia, castra,
Funus justa petit, petit & sponsalia virgo,
Rostra disertus amat, puerique crepundia gestant;
Infantésque colunt cunabula, consulit exta
Augur, & absolvens superis effata recantat.
Festa Deûm poterunt, ceu Bacchanalia, jungi.
Quòd si plura leges, licet hâc quoque classe reponas.
Cap. 21. De Heteroclitis Redun­dantibus.

3. Redundantia.

1.
HAec quasi luxuriant varias imitantia form as:
Nam genus & vocem variant, tonitrus, tonitrú que;
Sic clypeus, clypeum; baculus, baculum, at (que) bacillum,
Sensus, & hoc sensum; tignus, tignúm que; tapétum,
Atque tapéte, tapes; punctus, punctúm que; sinapi,
Quod genus immutans fertur scelerata sinapis;
Sinus, & hoc sinum; [vas lactis,] mendá que mendum;
Viscus, & hoc viscum; sic cornu & flexile cornum;
At Lucanus aït cornûs tibi cura finistri.
Eventus, simul eventum; Sed quid moror istis?
Talia doctorum tibi lectio mille ministrat.
2.
Sed tibi praeterea quaedam sunt Graeca notanda,
Quae quarto casu foetum peperêre Latinum:
Nam panther panthera creat, craterá que crater,
Cassida cassis habet, sed & aether aethera fundit.
Hinc cratera venit, venit aethera; sic caput ipsum
Cassida magna tegit, nec vult panthera domari.
3.
Vertitur his rectus, sensus manet & genus [...];
Gibbus, & hic gibber; cucumis, cucumer; stipis, & stips;
Sic cinis, atque ciner; vomis, vomer; scobis & scobs;
Pulvis, item pulver; pubes, puber; quibus addes
Quae pariunt or & os; honor, & labor, arbor, odór que.
[Page 89] His & apes, & apis, plebs, plebis. Sunt quoque multa
Accepta à Graecis geminam referentia formam;
Ʋt, delphin, delphinus, & hic elephas, elephantus,
Sic congrus, conger, Meleagrus, sic Meleager;
Teucrus, item Teucer. Dabis huc & caetera cuncta,
Quae tibi par ratio dederint & lectio casta.
4.
Haec simul & quarti flexûs simul atque secundi;
Laurus enim lauri facit, & laurûs genitivo;
Sic quercus, pinus, pro fructu ac arbore ficus,
Sic colus, atque penus, cornus quando arbor habetur;
Sic lacus atque domus, licèt haec nec ubique recurrant.
His quoque plura leges, quae priscis jure relinquas.
Tolle me, mu, mi, mis, si declinare domum vis.
5.
Et quae luxuriant sunt, Adjectiva notanda
Multa, sedimprimis quot & haec tibi nomina fundunt,
Arma, jugum, nervus, somnus, clivúsque, animúsque,
Et quot limus habet, quot fraenum, & cera, bacillum;
A quibus us, simul is formes, ut, inermus, inermis.
Rarior est hilarus, vox est hilaris bene nota.
Cap. 22. De Speciebus Nominum.

Nomina sunt 1. Primitiva. 2. Derivativa.

1. NOmina Primitiva sunt haec quae sequuntur, & hujusmodi, viz.

1. Collectivum, quod singulari numero multitudi­nem significat; ut, Turba, grex.

2. Fictitium, quod à sono fingitur; ut, Sibilus, tin­tinnabulum.

3. Interrogativum, quo in interrogando utimur; ut, Quot? qualis?

4. Redditivum, quod Interrogativo responsum reddit; ut Tot, talis.

Atque haec duo migrant ali­quando inIndefinita, quae certam rem non definiunt.
Relativa, quae ad vocem praece­dentem referuntur; ut, Talis erat, qualem nunquam vidi.

5. Numerale, quod numerum aliquo modo signi­cat, cujus etiam species multae sunt, viz.

1. Cardinale, à quo alia numeralia dimanant; ut, Ʋnus, duo.

2. Ordinale, quod ordinem denotat; ut, Primus, secundus.

3. Distributivum, quod totum in partes distribuit; ut, Singuli, bini.

4. Partitivum, quod significat vel multa singula­tim; ut, Quisque, uterque; vel unum è multis; ut, Alter, aliquis.

5. Ʋniversále, quod universaliter rem significat; ut, Omnis, nullus.

6. Particuláre, quod partem universalis significat; ut, Quidam, aliquis.

[Page 93] 7. Multiplicativum, quod multiplicitatem rei signi­ficat; ut, Simplex, duplex.

8. Proportionále, quod proportionem significat; ut, Simplum, duplum.

9. Temporále, quod tempus significat; ut, Binus, trinus; & Biennis, triennis.

10. Ponderále, quod pondus significat; ut, Ternari, us, centenarius.

II. Derivativa, etiam sunt multiplicia, quorum hae sunt praecipuae species.

1. Verbále, quod à Verbo derivatur; ut, Lectio, fle­xilis.

2. Patrium, quod patriam significat; ut, Londi­nensis.

3. Gentile, quod gentem, partes, aut sectam signi­ficat; ut, Graecus, Ciceroniánus, Christiánus.

4. Patronymicum, quod vel à patre, vel ab alia quâ­piam suae familiae personâ derivatur; ut, Aeácides.

5. Desinunt au­tem Patro­nymica vel indes,utLatoïdesMasculina.
ion,Iapétion
as,utIlias,Foeminina.
is,Meneláis,
ne,Nerine,

6. Diminutivum, quod significationem sui Primi­tivi minuit; ut, Stultulus, lapillulus.

[Page 95] 7. Possessivum, quod possessionem significat; ut, Regius, paternus.

8. Denominativum, quod ab alio solâ terminatione differt; ut, Justitia, à justus.

9. Materiale, quod materiam significat; ut, Au­reus.

10. Locale, quod locum denotat; ut, Hortensis, agrestis.

11. Participiale, quod à Participio fit; ut, Sapiens.

12. Adverbiale, quod ab Adverbio derivatur; ut, Crastinus, à cras. Diligenter autem hic observandum, quòd,

1. Omnes voces habeantur pro Primitivis in La­tina linguâ, quorum origo in eadem vel ignota vel incerta est; imò, licèt ab alia linguâ dimanent; ut, Ego, musa.

2. Nè ridiculus sis in investigandis dictionum originibus, diligenter observes terminationes quae Primitivis accedunt; ut, ab Amo, fit amator, amicus, amabilis, &c.

Cap. 23. De Pronomine.

Pronomen pro Nomin [...] ponitur. Sunt autem Pronomina quindecits Quorum alia Primitiva. Et alia Deri­vativa sunt, Pronomina quatuor ha­bent Declina­tiones. Primae sunt Ego, tu, sus. Secundae, Ille, ipse, i [...]te. Hic, is. Terriae, Meus, Tuus, Suus, Noster, Ve­ster, & Cujus. Quartae, No­stras, vestras, o [...]jas.

PRonomen est pars Orationis pro Nomine posita, & vicem ejus supplens.

Pronomina sunt quindecim; Ego, tu, suî, ille, ipse, iste, hic, is, meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, nostras, vestras.

[Page 97] Quibus addi possint, Qui, quis, cujus, & cujas.

Horum autem alia dicun­turSubstantiva, viz. Ego, tu, suî, quae ad tria genera referuntur sine varia­tione.
Adjectiva, viz. omnia reliqua quae per tria genera variantur; ut, Me­us, mea, meum.

Secundùm Speciem suam di­cuntur1. Primitiva, quae sunt primae voces, viz. Ego, tu, suî, ille, ipse, iste, hic, is, & qui.
Atquae haec vocanturDemonstrativa, quae in re aliqua non priùs demonstranda usur­pantur; ut, Ego, tu, suî, ille, ipse, hic, is.
Relativa, quibus in repetenda re aliquâ priùs dictâ utimur; ut; Ille, ipse, iste, hic, is, & qui.
2. Derivativa, quae derivantur à suis Primitivis; ut, Meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, nostras, vestras, quis, cujus, & cujas.

Ex his etiam alia sunt

Possessiva, quae possessionem significant; ut, Meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester.

Gentilia, quae gentem aut nationem, vel partes & sectas significant; ut, Nostras, vestras, & cujas, quae proferebant ur olim ut nomina in átis, & áte.

Finita, quae definiunt certam personam; ut, Ego, tu.

Indefinita, quae certam personam non definiunt; ut, Quis, cujus.

Reciproca, quae recipiunt se ad eandem tertiam personam quae praecessit; ut, Suî, suus.

Petrus rogat nè se deseras. Parcit quisque erroribus suis.

Trahit sua quemque voluptas, i. e. Quisque trahitur à voluptate suâ.

[Page 101] Declinationes Pronominum sunt quatuor.

Genitivus Singularis primae Declinationis exit in i, Secundae in ius, vel jus, Tertiae in i, ae, i, Quartae in atis.

Ego, tu, suî, primae sunt Declinationis, & sic vari­anur.

Singular.Nom.EgoPlural.Nom.Nos
Gen.MeîGen.Nostrûm, vel Nostrî
Dat.MihiDat.Nobis
Acc.MeAcc.Nos
Voc. Voc. 
Abl,à MeAbl.Nobis
Singul.Nom.TuPlural.Nom.Vos
Gen.TuîGen.Vestrûm, vel vestrî
Dat.TibiDat.Vobis
Acc.TeAcc.Vos
Voc.TuVoc.Vos
Abl.à TeAbl.Vobis

Sing. & Plur.Gen.SuîCaret autem Nomina­tivo & Vocativo utrius­que numeri.
Dat.Sibi
Acc.Se
Abl.Se

Ille, ipse, iste, hic, is, qui, & quis, secundae sunt De­clinationis & sic variantur.

SingulariterNom.Iste, ista, istud.PluraliterNom.Isti, istae, ista.
Gen.Istius.Gen.Istorum, istarum, istorum.
Dat.Isti.Dat.Istis.
Acc.Istum, istam, istud.Acc.Istos, istas, ista—
Voc. Voc. 
Abl.Isto, ista, isto.Abl.Istis.

Ille, & ipse variantur sicut iste, nisi quòd ipse in Neutro genere in Nominativo & Accusativo singu­lari facit ipsum.

[Page 101] Hic declinatur ut priùs in Articulis dictum est, pag. 7.

SingulariterNom.Is, ea, id.PluraliterNom.Ii, eae, ea.
Gen.Ejus:Gen.Eorum, earum, eo­rum.
Dat.Ei.Dat.Iis, vel eis.
Acc.Eum, eam, id.Acc.Eos, eas, ea.
Voc. Voc. 
Abl.Eo, eâ, eo.Abl.Iis, vel eis.

Sic variatur etiam compositum ab is & demum:Sing.Nom.Idem, eadem, idem.
Gen.Ejusdem.
Dat.Eidem.
Acc.Eundem, eandem, idem.

SingulariterNom.Qui, quae, quod. PluraliterNom.Qui, quae, quae.
Gen.Cujus. Gen.Quorum, quarum, quorū.
Dat.Cui. Dat.Quibus, vel queis.
Acc.Quem, quam, quod. Acc.Quos, quas, quae.
Voc.  Voc. 
Abl.Quo,quâ, quo.Abl.Quibus.
Quî,Queis.

Ad hunc modum etiam variatur Quis, quae, quid, &c.

Ejus compo­situm sic:Nom.Quisquis, quicquid.
Acc.Quicquid.
Abl.Quoquo, quaquâ, quoquo.

Meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, & cujus, tertiae sunt Declinationis, & variantur ad formam Adjectivo­rum trium Terminationum in hunc modum.

NominativoMeus, mea, meum.GenitivoMei, meae, mei.Et sic in reli­quis casibus.
Tuus, tua, tuum.Tui, tuae, tui.
Suus, sua, suum.Sui, suae, sui.
Noster, nostra, nostrum.Nostri, nostrae, nostri,
Vester, vestra, vestrum.Vestri, vestrae, vestri.
Cujus, cuja, cujum. 

Sed Meus habet Mi, mea, meum, in Vocativo singulari.

[Page 103] Nostras, vestras, & cujas, quartae sunt Declinationis, & variantur ad formam Adjectivorum trium Articu­lorum.

Ut,Nom.Nostras,Gen.Nostratis.&c.
Vestras,Vestratis.
Cujas,Cujatis

Pronomina Componuntur,

1. Inter se; ut, Ego-ipse, meî-ipsius, mihi-ipsi. istic, & illic.

Istic & illic sic variantur,Nom.Istic, istaec, istoc, vel istuc.
Acc.Istinc, istanc, istoc vel istuc.
Abl.Istoc, istac, istoc.

Plur. Nom. & Acc. Istaec.

2. Cum Nominibus; ut, Aliquis, hujusmodi.

3. Cum Verbis; ut, Quivis, quilibet.

4. Cum Adverbiis; ut, Nequis.

Sic etiamEccum, eccam,ab ecce & isEllum, Ellam,
Eccos, Eccas,Ellos, Ellas, ab ecce & ille.

5. Cum Conjunctione; ut, Quisnam, siquis.

6. Cum praepositione; ut, Mecum, nobiscum.

7. Cum syllabicis adjectionibus, met, te, pte, ce, cine, quarum met adjicitur primae & secundae personae; ut, Egomet, tuimet, sibimet, etiam & semet dicimus. Sed tumet non dicimus, nè videatur esse Verbum à tu­meo.

Te adjicitur tantùm tu & te; ut, Tute, tete.

Pte apponitur istis Ablativis foemininis, Meâ, tuâ, suâ, nostrâ, vestrâ; ut, Meâpte, tuâpte, suâpte, nostrâ­pte, vestrâpte, & interdum eorundem masculinis & neutris; ut, Meópte labore. suópte jumento.

Ce adjiciur obliquis horum Pronominum, Hic, ille iste, quoties in s desinunt; ut, Hujusce, hosce, hisce. Dicimus etiam hicce, huncce, & ejusce, & interdum hice legitur.

Cine apponitur casibus in c desinentibus; ut, [Page 105] Hiccine, haeccine, hoccine; Hunccine hanccine, hoccine, &c.

Quis, & qui in hunc modum componuntur.

Quis in compositione hisce particulis postponi­tur, viz.

En,utEcquis.
Ne,Nequis.
Alius,Aliquis.
Num,Nunquis.
Si,Siquis.

Et haec tam in foeminino singulari, quàm in neutro plurali, qua habent, non quae; ut, Siqua mulier. Ne­qua flagitia. Sed Ecquis habet ecquae & ecqua in foe­minino.

His autem particulis praeponitur Quis in compo­sitione, viz.

Nam,utQuisnamEt haec ubique quae re­tinent; ut, Quaenam doctrina; quaecunque ne­gotia.
Piam,Quispiam.
Putas,Quisputas.
Quam,Quisquam.
Que,Quisque.

Qui in compositione praeponitur his particulis, viz.

Dam,utQuidam
Vis,Quivis.
Libet,Quilibet.
Cunque,Quicunque.

Cap. 24. De Verbo, & ejus Accidentibus.

III. Verbum es­se agere aut pati signifi­cat. Estque Personale, Vel Impersona­le. Accidunt Verboquin­que genera. Activum. Passivum. Neutrum. Deponens. Commune. Modi qua­tuor. Indicativus. Imperati­vus. Subjuncti­vus. Infinitivus. Ad quem pertinent, Gerundia Di, do, dum. Supina, Um, & u. Tempora quinque. Praesens. Imperfe­ctum. Perfectum. Plusquam perfectum. Futurum. Conjugati­ones quatu­ro. Prima ha­bet a lon­gum. Secunda e longum. Tertia e breve. Quarta [...] longum an­te re & ris.

VERBUM est pars Orationis, quae esse aliquid, ageréve, aut pati significat; ut, Sum, Amo, Amor.

Verrbum dividitur inpri­mis inPersonale, quod tribus personis in utroque numero distinguitur; ut, Singulariter Amo, Amas, Amat; Plur. Amamus, Amatis, Amant.
Impersonale, quod nullius personae aut nu­meri certam significationem, nisi ex ad­juncto casu obliquo, sortitur; ut, Oportet me, oportet te; Statur à me, statur à te.

Verbo quidem accidunt, I. Genus. II. Modus. III. Tempus. IV. Conjugatio..

I. Quinque sunt Genera Verborum.

1. Activum, quod agere significat, & in o fini­tur; ut, Amo: assumto verò r Passivum formare potest; ut, Amor.

2. Passivum, quod pati significat, & in or finitur, demto verò r Activi formam resumere potest; ut, Amor.

3. Neutrum, quod in o vel m finitum, nec ad­mittit r ut fiat Passivum; u, Curro, Sum.

Neutrorum tria sunt genera, secundùm eorum significationem.

Substantivum, quod subsistentiam rei significat; ut, Sum.

Absolutum, quod ipse sensum absolvit; ut, Dormio.

[Page 109] Transitivum, cujus actio in rem cognatae significati­enis transit; ut, Curro stadium.

4. Deponens, quod in or finitum, vel Activi signifi­cationem habet; ut, Loquor verbum; vel neutrius; ut, Glorior.

5. Commune, quod in or finitum, tam Activam, quàm Passivam significationem habet; ut, Osculor.

II. Modi Verborum sunt quatuor:

1. Indicativus simpliciter aliquid indicat, aut in­terrogat; ut, Ego amo. Amas tu?

2. Imperativus imperat aut rogat; ut, Ama tu. Da mihi.

3. Subjunctivus subjungitur alteri Verbo in eâdem sententiâ; ut, Cùm amarem, eram miser.

Atque hic Modus dicitur Optativus, quando in o­ptando usurpatur; Potentialis verò quando per possum, volo,, aut debeo exponitur.

4. Infinitivus, certam personam, aut numerum non definit; ut, Amare. Et ad hunc Modum pertinent Tria Gerundia, quae à Nomine casum, à Verbo signi­ficationem accipiunt.

Di,utAmandi.
Do,Amando.
Dum,Amandum.

Duo Supina quorumPrius exit in um, & Activè significat; ut, Amatum.
Posterius exit in u, & Passivè signifi­cat; ut, Amatu.

III. Tempora Verborum sunt quinque.

1. Praesens, quod de tempore praesenti loquitur, & aliquid nunc agere vel fieri significat; ut, Amo.

[Page 111] 2. Praeteritum imperfectum, de tempore nondum perfectè praeterito loquitur, & aliquid fieri, sed non­dum absolvi significat; ut, Amabam.

3. Praeteritum perfectum de tempore perfectè prae­terito loquitur, & aliquid jam perfici significat; ut, Amavi.

4. Praeteritum plusquam perfectum de tempore plus quàm perfecto loquitur, & aliquid jamdiu perfe­ctum significat; ut, Amaveram.

5. Futurum loquitur de tempore futuro, & aliquid de futuro significat; ut, Amabo.

Subjunctivi Futurum dicitur Exactum, quòd prae­teriti simul & futuri significationem habeat; ut, Cùm Amavero.

IV. Conjugatio est variatio Verbi per Modos & Tem­pora.

Verborum quatuor sunt Conjugationes, quae à se invicem certis indicibus, sive literis characteristicis distinguuntur.

1. Prima Conjugatio habet a productum ante re & ris; ut, Amáre, amáris. 
2, Secunda Conjugatio habet e productum ante re & ris; ut, Docére, docéris.In Infinitivo praesenti Verbo­rum in o.
3. Tertia Conjugatio habet e correptum ante re & ris; ut, Légĕre, légĕris.Et in secunda persona singula­ris Indicativi praesentis Verbo­rum in or.
4. Quarta Conjugatio habet i productum ante re & ris; ut, Audire, audiris. 

As in Praesenti: SIVE GUILIELMI LILII Regulae de Praeteritis & Supinis Verborum.

Cap. 31. De Praeteritis Verborum Simplicium.

Regulae de Praeteritis Verborum Simplici­um. 1. In prima Conjugati­one as for­mat avi. 2. In Secun­da es for­mat ui. In Tertia, Bo fit bi. Co, ci, Do, di. Go, xi. Ho, xi. Lo, ui. Mo, ui. No, vi. Pso, psi. Quo, qui. Ro, vi. So, sivi. Sco, vi. To, ti. Ecto, exi. Vo, vi, Xo, xui. Cio, ci, Dio, di. Gio, gi. Pio, pi. Rio, ri. Tio, ssi. Uo, ui. In Quarta is format ivi.

I.
AS in praesenti perfectum format in avi;
Ʋt no nas navi, vocito vocitas vocitavi.
1. Deme lavo lavi, juvo juvi, nexóque nexui;
Et seco quod secui, neco quod necui, mico verbum
Quod micui, plico quod plicui, frico quod fricui dat:
Sic domo quod domui, tono quod tonui, sono verbum
Quod sonui, crepo quod crepui, veto quod vetui dat:
Atque cubo cubui: rarò haec formantur in avi,
2. Do das ritè dedi, sto stas formare steti vult.
II.
ES in praesenti perfectum format ui dans,
Ʋt nigreo nigres nigrui: 1. jubeo excipe jussi,
Sorbeo sorbui habet sorpsi quoque, mulceo mulsi;
Luceo vult luxi, sedeo sedi, videóque
Vult vidi; sed prandeo prandi, strideo stridi,
Suadeo suasi, rideo risi, habet ardeo & arsi.
2.
Quatuor his infrà geminatur syllaba prima;
Pendeo namque pependi, mordeo vúltque momordi,
[Page 131] Spondeo, habere spospondi; tondeo, vúltqúe totondi,
3.
L vel r ante geo si stet, geo vertitur in si.
Urgeo, ut ursi; mulgeo, mulsi, dat quoque mulxi;
Frigeo, frixi; lugeo, luxi; habet augeo, & auxi.
4.
Dat Fleo, flex, flevi; leo, les, levi; indéque natum
Deleo, delevi; pleo, ples, plevi. 5. Neo, nevi;
A maneo, mansi, formatur. 6. Torqueo, torsi.
7.
Haereo, vult haesi. 8. Veo fit vi, ut Ferveo, fervi.
Niveo, & indè satum poscit conniveo, nivi
Et nixi; cieo, civi; vieó que vievi.
TErtia Praeteritum formabit, ut hic manifestum.
Bo fit bi; ut, Lambo, lambi. 1. Scribo, excipe scripsi;
Et nubo, nupsi; antiquum cumbo, cubui, dat.
Co fit ci; ut, Vinco, vici; vult parco, peperci,
Et parsi; dico, dixi; duco quoque duxi.
Do fit di; ut, mando, mandi: sed scindo, scidi, dat;
Findo, fidi; fundo, fudi; tundo, tutudi que;
Pendo, pependi; tendo, tetendi; pedo, pepédi;
Iunge cado, cecĭdi; pro verbero caedo, cecidi;
Cedo pro discedere, sive locum dare cessi.
Vado, rado, laedo, ludo, divido, trudo,
Claudo, plaudo, rodo, ex do, semper faciunt si.
Go fit xi; ut, jungo, junxi; sed r aute go vult si;
Ʋt, spargo, sparsi; lego, legi; & ago facit egi:
[Page 133] Dat tango tetigi, pungo punxi pupugique;
Dat frango fregi, cùm signat pango pacisci
Vult pepigi, pro jungo pegi, pro cano panxi.

Ho fit xi, traho ceu traxi, docet & veho vexi.

Lo fit ui, colo ceu colui: psallo excipe cum p
Et sallo sine p, nam salli format utrunque;
Dat vello velli vulsi quoque, fallo fefelli;
Cello pro frango ceculi; pello pepulique.
Mo fit ui, vomo ceu vomui: sed emo facit emi,
Como petit compsi, promo prompsi, adjice demo
Quod format dempsi, sumo sumpsi, premo pressi.
No fit vi, sino ceu sivi, temno excipe tempsi,
Dat sterno stravi, sperno sprevi, lino levi,
Interdum lini & livi; cerno quoque crevi:
Gigno, pono, cano, genui, posui, cecini, dant.
Po fit psi, ut scalpo scalpsi, rumpo excipe rupi,
Et strepo quod format strepui, crepo quod crepui dat.
Quo fit qui, ut linquo liqui, coquo demito coxi.
Ro fit vi, sero ceu pro planto & semino sevi,
Quod serui meliùs dat mutans significatum.
Vult verro verri & versi, uro ussi, gero gessi,
Quaero quaesivi, tero trivi, curro cucurri.
So, velut accerso, arcesso, incesso, atque lacesso,
Formabit sivi: sed tolle capesso capessi,
Quódque capessivi facit, atque facesso facessi,
Sic viso visi, sed pinso pinsui habebit.
Sco fit vi, ut pasco pavi; vult posco poposci;
[Page 135] Vult didici disco, quexi formare quinisco.
To fit ti; ut, verto verti, sed sisto notetur
Pro facio stare Activum, nam jure stiti dat.
Dat mitto misi, peto vult formare petivi.
Sterto stertui habet, meto messui. Ab ecto fit exi;
Ʋt, flecto flexi; pecto dat pexui, habétque
Pexi; etiam necto dat nexui, habet quoque nexi.
Vo fit vi; ut, volvo volvi; vivo excipe vixi.
Nexo ut nexui habet, sic texo texui habebit.
Fit cio, ci; ut facio feci, jacio quoque jeci;
Antiquum lacio lexi, specio quoque spexi.

Fit dio, di; ut fodio fodi. Gio, ceu fugio gi.

Fit pio, pi; ut capio cepi, cupio excipe pivi;
Et rapio rapui, sapio sapui, atque sapivi.
Fit rio, ri; ut pario peperi. Tio ssi geminans s;
Ʋt quatio quassi, quod vix reperitur in usu.
Denique uo, fit ui; ut statuo statui; pluo pluvi
Format sive plui; struo sed struxi, fluo fluxi.
IV.
QƲarta dat is, ivi; ut monstrat scio scis tibi scivi;
Excipias venio dans veni, cambio campsi,
Raucio rausi, farcio farsi, sarcio sarsi.
Sepio sepsi, sentio sensi, fulcio fulsi;
Haurio item hausi, sancio sanxi, vincio vinxi.
Pro salto salio salui, & amicio amicui dat.
Parciùs utemur cambivi, haurivi, amicivi,
Sepivi, sanxivi, sarcivi, atque salivi.
Cap. 32. De Compositorum Verborum Praeteritis.

Simplex & Composi­tum idem habent Praeteri­tum. Excipe, 1. Gemi­nantia pri­mam sylla­bam. 2. Plico. 3. Oleo. 4. Pungo. 5. Do & Sto. 6. Mutantia primam vo­calem in e [...] 7. Pasco. 8. Mutantia primam vo­calem in i. 9. Placeo. 10. Pango. 11. Maneo. 12. Scalpo, calco, salto 13. Claudo, quatio, lavo: 14. Mutan­tia primam vocalem praesentis in i, sed non praeteriti. 15. Facio. 16. Lego.

PRaeteritum dat idem Simplex & Compositivum;
Ʋt docui edocui monstrat: 1. Sed syllaba semper
Quam simplex geminat, compôsto non geminatur;
Praeterquam tribus his, praecurro, excurro, repungo:
Atque à do, disco, sto, posco, ritè creatis.
2.
A plico compositum cum sub, vel nomine, ut ista,
Supplico, multiplico, gaudent formare plicavi;
Applico, complico, replico, & explico, ui vel in avi.
3.
Quamvis vult oleo simplex olui, tamen indè
Quodvis compositum meliùs formabit olevi:
Simplicis at formam redolet sequitur subolétque.
4.
Composita à pungo formabunt omnia punxi,
Vult unum pupugi, interdúmque repungo repunxi.
5.
Natum à do, quando est inflectio tertia, ut addo,
Credo, edo, dedo, reddo, perdo, abdo, vel obdo,
Condo, indo, trado, prodo, vendo, didi; at unum
Abscondo, abscondi. Natum à sto, stas, stiti, habebit.
6.
Verba haec simplicia praesentis praeteritique,
Si componantur vocalem primam in e mutant;
[Page 139] Damno, lacto, sacro, fallo, arceo, tracto, fatiscor,
Partio, carpo, patro, scando, spargo, parióque,
Cujus nata peri duo comperit & reperit dant;
Caetera sed perui, velut haec aperire, operire.
7.
A pasco, pavi tantùm compôsta notentur
Haec duo compesco, dispesco, pescui habere:
Caetera, ut epasco, servabunt simplicis usum.
8.
Haec habeo, lateo, salio, statuo, cado, laedo,
Pango dans pegi, cano, quaero, caedo, cecidi,
Tango, egeo, teneo, taceo, sapio, rapióque,
Si componantur, vocalem primam in i mutant;
Ʋt rapio rapui, eripio eripui: à Cano natum,
Praeteritum per ui, ceu concino, concinui dat.
9.
A placeo, sic displiceo; sed simplicis usum
Haec duo complaceo, cum perplaceo, bene servant.
10.
Composita à pango retinent a quatuor ista;
Depango, oppango, circumpango, atque repango.
11.
A maneo mansi, minui dant quatuor ista,
Praemineo, emineo, cum promineo, immineóque;
Simplicis at verbi servabunt caetera formam,
12.
Composita à scalpo, calco, salto, a per u mutant;
[Page 141] Id tibi demonstrant exsculpo, inculco, resulto.
13.
Composita à claudo, quatio, lavo, rejiciunt a;
Id docet à claudo, occludo, excludo; à quatióque
Percutio, excutio; à lavo, proluo, diluo, nata.
14.
Haec si co [...]ponas, ago, emo, sedeo, rego, frango,
Et capio, jacio, lacio, specio, premo, semper
Vocalem primam praesentis in i sibi mutant,
Praeteriti nunquam, ceu frango, refringo refregi,
A capio, incipio incepi. Sed pauca notentur,
Namque suum simplex perago sequitur, satagóque,
Atque ab ago dego dat degi, cogo coëgi;
A rego sic pergo perrexi, vult quoque surgo
Surrrexi, mediâ praesentis syllabâ ademptâ.
15.
Nîl variat facio nisi praeposito praeeunte;
Id docet olfacio, cum calfacio, inficióque.
16.
A lego nata, re, se, per, prae, sub, trans, praeeunte,
Praesent is servant vocalem, in i caetera mutant;
De quibus haec intelligo, diligo, negligo, tantùm
Praeteritum lexi faciunt; reliqua omnia legi.
Cap. 33. De Simplicium Verborum Supinis.

Supinum formatur ex Praeterito. Bi format tum. Ci, ctum. Di, sum. Syllaba non geminatur Supinis. Gi, ctum. Li, sum.

Mi,tum.
Ni,
Pi,
Qui

Ri, sum. Si, sum, Psi, tum. Ti, tum. Vi, tum. Ui, itum. Ʋtum. Sum. Xi, ctum.

NƲnc ex Praeterito discas formare Supinum.
Bi sibi tum format, sic namque bibi bibitum fit.
Ci fit tum, ut vici victum, testatur & ici
Dans ictum, feci factum, jeci quoque jactum.
Di fit sum, ut vidi visum: quaedam geminant ss,
Ʋt pandi passum, sedi sessum; adde scidi quod
Dat scissum, atque fidi fissum, fodi quoque fossum.
Hic etiam advert as, quòd syllaba prima Supinis,
Quam vult Praeteritum geminari, non geminatur:
Idque totondi dans tonsum docet, atque cecidi
Quod caesum, & cecĭdi quod dat casum, atque tetendi
Quod tensum & tentum, tutudi tunsum, atque pepédi
Quod format peditum, adde dedi quod jure datum vult.
Gi fit ctum, ut legi lectum, pegi pepigi que
Dat pactum, fregi fractum, tetigi quoque tactum,
Egi actum, pupugi punctum, fugi fugitum dat.
Li fit sum, ut salli stans pro sale condio salsum;
Dat pepuli pulsum, ceculi culsum, atque fefelli
Falsum; dat velli vulsum, tuli habet quoque latum.
Mi, ni, pi, qui, tum fiunt, velut hic mànifestum;
Emi emptum, veni ventum, cecini à cano, cantum;
A capio cepi dans captum, à coepio coeptum,
A rumpo rupi ruptum, liqui quoque lictum.
Ri fit sum, ut verri versum; peperi excipe partum.
Si fit sum, ut visi visum; tamen s geminato,
[Page 145] Misi formabit missum, fulsi excipe fultum;
Hausi haustum, sarsi sartum, farsi quoque fartum,
Ussi ustum, gessi gestum, torsi duo tortum
Et torsum, indulsi indultum indulsúmque requirit.
Psi fit tum, ut scripsi scriptum; campsi excipe cam­psum
Ti fit tum, à sto namque steti, à sistóque stiti fit,
Praeterito commune statum; verti excipe versum.
Vi fit tum, ut flavi flatum, pavi excipe pastum;
Dat lavi lotum, interdum lautum atque lavatum.
Potavi potum, interdum facit & potatum:
Sed favi fautum, cavi cautum, à sero sevi
Formes ritè satum; livi, linique litum dat:
Solvi à solvo solutum, volvi à volvo volútum:
Vult singultivi singultum, venio venis
Venivi venum, sepelivi ritè sepultum.
Quod dat ui dat itum, ut domui domitum, excipe quod­vis
Verbum in uo, quia semper ui formabit in utum,
Exui ut exutum, à ruo deme rui ruitum dans;
Vult secui sectum, necui nectum, fricuique
Frictum, miscui item mistum, ac amicui dat amictum:
Torrui habet tostum, docuique doctum, tenuique
Tentum, consului consultum, alui altum alitúmque,
Sic salui saltum, colui occului quoque cultum:
Pinsui habet pistum, rapui raptum, seruique
A sero vult sertum; sic texui habet quoque textum.
Haec sed ui mutant in sum; nam censeo censum,
Cellui habet celsum, meto messui habet quoque messum,
Nexui item nexum, sic pexui habet quoque pexum;
Dat patui passum, carui cassum caritúmque.
Xi fit ctum, ut vinxi vinctum, quinque abjiciunt n,
Nam finxi fictum, minxi mictum inque supino,
Dat pinxi pictum, strinxi, rinxi quoque rictum.
[Page 147] Xum flexi, plexi, fixi dant, & fluo fluxum.
Cap. 34. De Compositorum verborum Supinis, & De Praeteritis verborum in Or.

Composi­tum supi­num for­matur ut Simplex. Verba in [...] admitunt Praeteritum ex posterio­resupino,

I.
COmpositum ut Simplex formatur quodque Supinum,
Quamvis non eadem stet semper syllaba utrique.
Composita à tunsum, dempta n tusum, à ruitum fit
I media demptâ rutum, & à saltum quoque sultum,
A sero quando satum format, compôsta situm dant.
Haec captum, factum, jactum, raptum, a per e mutant,
Et cantum, partum, sparsum, carptum, quoque fartum.
Verbum edo compositum non estum, sed facit esum;
Ʋnum dunaxat comedo formabit utrunque.
A nosco tantùm duo cognitum & agnitum habentur
Caetera dant notum nullo est jam noscitum in usu.
II.
VErba in or admittunt ex posteriore Supino
Praeteritum, verso u per us, & sum consociato
Vel fui, ut à lectu lectus sum vel fui. At horum
Nunc est Deponens, nunc est Commune notandum,
Nam labor lapsus, patior dat passus & ejus
Nata ut compatior compassus, perpetiór que
[Page 149] Formans perpessus: fateor quod fassus & indè
Nata, ut confiteor confessus, diffiteór que
Formans diffessus:: gradior dat gressus, & indè
Nata, ut digredior digressus. Junge fatiscor
Feslus sum, mensus sum metior, utor & usus.
Pro texo orditus, pro incepto dat ordior orsus,
Nitor nisus vel nixus sum, ulciscor & ultus.
Irascor simul iratus, reor atque ratus sum,
Obliviscor vult oblitus sum; fruor optat
Fructus vel fruitus, misereri junge misertus.
Vult tuor & tueor non tutus sed tuitus sum,
Quamvis & tutum & tuitum sit utrique Supinum.
A loquor adde loquutus, & à sequor adde sequutus;
Experior facit expertus, formare paciscor
Gaudet pactus sum, nanciscor nactus, apiscor
Quod vetus est verbum aptus sum, undè adipiscor ade­ptus.
Junge queror questus, proficiscor junge profectus,
Expergiscor sum experrectus, & haec quoque commi—
Niscor commentus, nascor natus, moriór que
Mortuus, atque orior quod Praeteritum facit ortus.

Cap. 35. De verbis quibusdam Anomalis.

Verba Ano­mala sunt 1. Redun­dantia, Prae­teritum. Activae & Passivae vo­cis habenti­tia. 2. Variantia ut, 1. Neutro­pastiva. & 2. Praeteri­tum mutu­antia. 3. Defectiva 1. Praeteri­to. 2 Defectiva Supinis.

PRaeteritum Activae & Passivae vocis habent haec,
Coeno coenavi & coenatus sum tibi format,
Juro juravi & juratus, potóque potavi
Et potus, titubo titubavi vel titubatus.
[Page 151] Sic careo carui & cassus sum, prandeo prandi
Et pransus, pateo patui & passus, placeóque
Dat placui & placitus, suesco suevi atque suétus,
Veneo pro vendor, venivi venditus & sum,
Nubo nupsi nuptáque sum, mereor meritus sum
Vel merui. Adde libet libuit libitum, & licet adde
Quod licuit licitum, taedet quod taeduit & dat
Pertaesum; adde pudet faciens puduit puditúmque,
Atque piget, tibi quod format piguit pigitúmque.
NEutro-passivum sic praeteritum tibi format,
Gaudeo gavisus sum, fido fisus, & audeo
Ansus sum, fio factus, soleo solitus sum,
Moereo sum moestus; sed Phocae nomen habetur.
QƲaedam praeteritum verba accipiunt aliunde.
Incoeptivum in sco, stans pro primario, adoptat
Praeteritum ejusdem verbi; vult ergò tepesco
A tepeo tepui, fervesco à ferveo fervi,
A video cerno vult vidi, à concutio vult
Praeteritum quatio concussi, percutióque
Percussi ferio; à mingo vult meïo minxi,
A sedeo sido vult sedi, à suffero tollo
Sustuli, & à fuo sum fui, à tulo ritè fero tuli,
A sto sisto steti, tantùm pro stare; furóque
Insanivi, à verbo ejusdem significati.
[Page 153] Sic poscunt vescor, medeor, liquor, reminiscor,
Praeteritum à pascor, medicor, liquefio, recordor.
PRaeteritum fugiunt, vergo, ambigo, glisco, fatisco,
Polleo, nideo, ad haec Inceptiva, ut puerasco;
Et passiva quibus caruere activa supinis,
Ʋt metuor, timeor. Meditativa omnia praeter
Parturio, esurio, quae praeteritum duo servant.
HAec rarò, aut nunquam retinebunt verba Supinum,
Lambo, mico mucui, rudo, scabo, parco peperci,
Dispesco, posco, disco, compesco, quinisco,
Dego, ango, sugo, lingo, ningo, satagóque,
Psallo, volo, nolo, malo, tremo, strideo, strido,
Flaveo, liveo, avet, paveo, conniveo, fervet;
A nuo compositum, ut renuo, à cado ut incido, praeter
Occido quod facit occasum, recidóque recasum;
Respuo, linquo, luo, metuo, cluo, frigeo, calvo,
Et sterto, timeo, sic luceo, & arceo, cujus
Composita ercitum habent: Sic à gruo, ut ingruo natum.
[Page 155] Et quaecun sue in ui formantur neutra secundae,
Exceptis oleo, doleo, placeo, taceóque,
Pareo, item & careo, noceo, pateo, lateóque.
Et valeo, caleo; gaudent haec namque supino.

Cap. 33. De verbis quae deficiunt certis Modis & Temporibus.

3. Certis Modis & Tempori­bus, ut, Aîo. Ausim. Duim. Salve. Ave. Cedo. Faxo. Forem. Quaeso. Infit. Defit. Confieri. Inquam. Odi. Cepi. Memini. Dor. For. Sci. Eo, & queo, Orior, Morior. Volo. Nolo. Malo. Fero. Feror. Edo. Sum.

VErba (magis usitatè) Defectiva vocantur quae certis Modis & Temporibus deficiunt, viz.

Indicativus Praesens Aïo, aïs, aït. Plur. Aïunt.

Imperfect. Aïebam, habet omnes personas.

Imperativus, Aï.

Subjunctivus Praesens, Aïas, aïat. Plur. Aïamus, Aïant.

Participium praesens, Aïens.

Subjunctivus Praesens, Ausim, ausis, ausit. Plur. Ausint.

Sic Duim, duis, duit. Plur. Duint.

Veteres enim Subjunctiva per im efferebant, unde creduim pro credam legimus.

Indicat. Futur. Salvebis.

Imperat. Salve, salceto. Plur. Salvete, salvetote.

Infinitivus, Salvere.

Imperativus, Ave, aveto. Plur. Avete, avetote.

[Page 157] Infinitivus, Avere.

Imperativus, Cedo. Plur. Cedite, & apud Antiquos Cette.

Indicat. & Subjunct. Fut. Faxim vel faxo, faxis, faxit. Plur. Faxint.

Subjunct. Forem, fores, foret. Plur. forent.

Infinit. Futur. Fore.

Indicat. presens, Quaeso. Plur. Quaesumus.

Indicat. praesens, Infit. Plur. Infiunt. Et Defit, de­fiet, defiat, ut item defieri & confieri.

Indicat, praesens, Inquio vel inquam, inquis, inquit. Plur. Inquiunt.

Perfectum, Inquisti, inquit.

Futurum, Inquies, inquiet.

Imperat. Inque, inquito.
Subjunct. praesens, Inquiat.
Participium. Inquiens.

Odi, coepi, memini, habent ea solùm tempora quae à praeterito formantur; viz. in ram, rim, ssem, ro, & sse desinentia. Sed memini habet in imperativo sin­gulari, memento. Plur. mementote.

Dor, for, der, fer, simplicium non reperiuntur in pri­mâ personâ singulari praesentis, sed in caeteris (ferè) omnibus.

Dic, duc, fer fac, per Apocopen concisae sunt.

[Page 159] Sci à scio non reperitur, nec solebo à soleo, nec fuo antiquum.

Eo & queo habent imperfectum ibam & quibam, & futurum ibo & quibo.

Orior oreris habet Infinitum oriri, sic & morior mo­ri & moriri.

Volo, nolo, malo, fero, feror, edo Syncopen ferè ad­mittunt in plerisque temporibus; ut, Volo, vis, vult, Vultis. Nolo, non vis, nonvult, Nolumus. Malo, mavis, mavult, Malumus. Fero, fers, fert. Feror, ferris vel fer­re, fertur. Edo, edis vel es, edit vel est, &c. ex quibus volo & malo carent Imperativo. Nolo facit Imperativo Noli nolito. Plur. Nolite nolitote.

Sum cum compositis caret gerundiis, Supinis, & participo praesenti, nisi quod ab absum, praesum, veni­unt absens, praesens, nam futurus est à fui, quod praeteri­tum olim obsoleti verbi fuo. Possum caret Imperativo.

Cap. 38. De Impersonalibus & Defectivis.

Impersonalia conju­gantur in tertia sin­gulati. Sunt autem Activae vo­cis. Vel 2. Passivae vocis. Derivativa sunt 1. Inchoa­tiva. 2. Frequen­tativa. 3. Desidera­tiva. 4. Diminu­tiva. 5. Imitativa 6. Appara­tiva. Denomina­tiva.

IMpersonalia conjugantur in tertiâ personâ singu­lari per omnes modos & tempora.

Sunt autem duplicia,1. Activae vocis, quae in t desinunt, ut decet, dece­bat, decuit, decuerat, decebit. deceat, deceret, decue­rit, decuisset, decuerit, decere.
2. Passivae vocis quae in tur desinunt, ut Studetur, studebatur, studitum est vel fuit, studitum erat vel fuerat, studebitur. Studeatur, studeretur, studitum sit vel fuerit, studitum esset vel fuisset, studitum erit vel fuerit, studeri.

Impersonalia Gerundiis, & Supinis & Participiis plerunque carent.

Participia, per quae Praeterita circumloquimur Substantivè ponuntur in neutro genere.

Impersonalia Activae vocis sunt haec undecim, Conjugationis secundae, quae semper ferè manent Impersonalia, viz. Decet, libet, licet, liquet, (cujus non exstat praeteritum) lubet, miseret, oportet, poenitet, piget, pudet, taedet, quae interdum etiam inveniuntur in ter­tia plurali, ut decent, oportent, pudent.

His accensentur quaedam Impersonalia (quae abso­lutè inveniuntur in tertia persona absque nominatj­vo, sequente mox Infinitivo). Cujusmodi sunt,

In prima Conjugatione, delectat, juvat, praestat, re­stat, stat, constat, vacat.

[Page 165] In Secunda, Apparet, attinet, debet, patet, placet, solet.

In Tertia, Accidit, coepit, conducit, contingit, desinit, incipit, sufficit.

In Quarta, Convenit, evenit, expedit.

Inter anomala, est, interest, prodest, potest, fit, resert.

Ad Impersonalium etiam naturam quodammodo accedunt verba exemptae potestatis, viz. actionem si­gnificantia non humanae potestatis, ut Fulgurat, pluit, lucescit, &c.

2. Impersonalia Passivae vocis certum numerum non habent, quia fiunt ab omnibus verbis Activis, & qui­busdam neutris, ut Legitur, curritur.

Denique nullum ferè verbum est tam personale, ut non idem impersonalis formam possit induere, atque nonnulla Impersonalia remigrant aliquando in Personalia.

Verbum Impersonale, pro singulis personis utrius­que numeri indifferenter accipi potest, viz, ex vi ad­juncti obliqui, ut,

Oportetme,Oportetnos,
te,vos,
illum,illos.

Staturà me,Staturà nobis,
à te,à vobis,
ab illo.ab illis.

Derivativa saepissime pro ipsis primitivis usurpan­tur, ut Timesco pro timeo, hisco pro hio.

Derivatorum quinque sunt genera.

1. Inchoativa sive Augmentativa, quae inchoatio­nem [Page 167] aut augmentationem significant, & in sco desinunt; ut, Lucesco, ardesco.

2. Frequentativa, quae assiduitatem quandam vel conatum significant, & in to, so, xo, aut tor desinunt; ut, Visito, viso, nexo, sector.

3. Desiderativa sive Meditativa, quae appetentiam quandam, aut studium significant, & desinunt in urio; ut, Lecturio, coenaturio.

4. Diminutiva, quae diminutionem sui Primitivi significant, & desinunt in lo, vel sso, ut, Sorbillo, pitisso.

5. Imitativa, quae imitationem significant, & de­sinunt in isso & or; ut, Patrisso, vulpinor.

6. Huc pertinent & Apparativa, quae apparatum signi­ficant, & in co desinunt; ut, Vellico, fodico.

7. Item Denominativa, quae à nominibus veniunt, & propriam appellationem non habent; ut, lignor, rusticor.

Cap. 39. De Participio.

Participi­um partem capit à No­mine, & Verbo. Species Par­ticipiorum sunt qua­tuor. 1. Praesentis. 2. Praeteri­ti. 3. Futuri in rus. 4. Futuri in dus. De modo Participia formandi. Et à qui­bus verbis derivantur. Nomina Participia­lia. Participia Praesent is variantur sicur Felix, Reliquorum temporum sicut Bonus,

PARTICIPIUM est pars Orationis à Verbo derivata, tam à Nomine quàm à Verbo partem capiens; ut, Amans.

Participium habet genera, casus, & de­clinationem à nomine; tempora & significa­tionem à Verbo; numerum & figuram ab utroque.

Secundùm tempus species Participiorum sunt qua­tuor.

1. Participium Praesentis, habet significationem praesentis, & definit in ans, ens, & iens; ut, Amans, docens, legens, audiens.

[Page 197] Caeterùm iens ab eo rarò legitur in Nominativo, sed euntis, &c. in obliquis. Composita verò Nomi­nativum habent in iens, & Genitivum in untis, prae­ter Ambiens, ambientis.

2. Participium Praeteriti, significat tempus prae­teritum, & desinit in tus, sus, xus, ut, Amatus, visus, ne­xus, & unicum in uus, ut, mortuus.

3. Participium Futuri in Rus habet significationem praesentis Infiniti sui Activi; ut, Amaturus, doctu rus.

4. Participium Futuri in Dus, significationem ha­bet Infiniti sui Passivi; ut, Amandus.

Participium Praesens formatur ab imperfecto mu­tando ultimam syllabam in ns; ut ab Amabam amans.

Participium Praeteriti formatur à posteriori Su­pino addendo s; ut ab Amatu amatus.

Participium Futuri in rus formatur à posteriori Supino addendo rus; ut ab Amatu, amaturus.

Participium Futuri in Dus formatur à Genitivo participii praesentis mutando tis in dus; ut ab Aman­tis amandus.

Haec participia praeter Analogiam à verbis suis de­ducuntur; Pariturus, nasciturus, soniturus, arguiturus, moriturus, luiturus, nosciturus, osurus, futurus, ori­turus.

Tunicatus, togatus, personatus, larvatus: &c. similia participiis sunt, à nominibus verò deduucuntur.

[Page 171] Ab Activis & Neutris quae habent Supina, veniunt duo participia, unum Praesentis, alterum Futuri in rus; ut ab Amo, amans, amaturus, à Curro, currens, cur­surus.

A quibusdam verò neutris reperiuntur etiam par­ticipia in dus; ut Dubitandus, vigilandus, carendus, do­lendus. Et ab iis quae praeteritum faciunt more passi­vorum formatur etiam participium praeteriti; ut, Gaudeo gavisus, juro juratus: sic ab Impersonalibus in tur; ut ab Aratur, aratus.

A Passivis veniunt duo participia Praeteriti & Fu­turi in dus; ut ab Amor, amatus, amandus.

A Deponentibus veniunt tria participia, Praesen­tis, Praeteriti, & Futuri in rus; ut ab Auxilior, au­xilians, auxiliatus, auxiliaturus.

Multis accidit etiam participium in dus, praecipuè Accusativum regentibus; ut à Loquor, loquens, loquutu­rus, loquutus, loquendus.

A Communibus veniunt quatuor participia, ut à Largior, largiens, largiturus, largitus, largiendus.

Ab Impersonalibus nulla exstant participia praeter Poenitens, decens, libens, lubens, pertaesus, poenitendus, pu­dens, pudendus, pigendus.

Participia degenerant in nomina Participialia.

1. Cùm alium casum quàm suum verbum, regunt, ut Amans pecuniae.

2. Cùm componuntur cum dictionibus, cum qui­bus ipsorum verba componi non possunt, ut [Page 173] Infans, indoctus.

3. Cùm comparantur; ut, Amans, amantior, aman­tissimus.

4. Cùm tempus non significat; ut, Sapiens, sponsa.

Participia praesentis temporis non rarò fiunt Sub­stantiva, modò masculini generis; ut, Oriens: mo­dò foeminini; ut, Consonans: modò neutrius; ut, Accidens: modò communis; ut, Appetens.

Participia praesentis variantur tribus Articulis; ut, Hic, haec, & hoc Amans, sicut Felix.

Participia reliquorum temporum variantur tribus terminationibus; Amatus, ta, tum; Amaturus, ra, rum; Amandus, da, dum, sicut Bonus.

Cap. 40. De Adverbio.

V. Adverbium explanat Verbum. Species Ad­verbiorum sunt 33.

ADVERBIUM est pars Orationis adjecta aliis vocibus (sed praecipuè Verbis) ad sen­sum & significationem earum perficiendum & expla­nandum.

Significationes Adverbiorum sunt multae, quarum varietas ex Verborum circumstantiis colligenda est.

Secundùm eorum significationem quaedam dicuntur AdverbiaLoci eáqueIn Loco; ut, Hic, illic.
Ad Locum; ut, Huc, illuc.
A Loco; ut, Hinc, illinc.
Per Locum; ut, Hac, illac.
Temporis; ut, Nunc, tunc, hodie; usque Temporis & Loci est.
Numeri; ut, Semel, bis, ter, iterum.
Ordinis; ut, Indè, denique, demum.
Interrogandi; ut, Cur? quare? unde?
Vocandi; ut, Heus, ô, eho.
Affirmandi; ut, Certè, nae, profectò, scilicet.
Negandi; ut, Non, haud, minimé.
Jurandi; ut, Pol, aedipol, hercle.
Hortandi; ut, Agè, sodes, sûltis.
Concedendi; ut, licèt, estò, sit-sané.
Prohibendi; ut, Nè, non.
Adulandi; ut, Amabo.
Optandi; ut, Ʋtinam, ô si.
Congregandi; ut, Simul, unà, pariter.
Segregandi; ut, Seorsim, gregatim, bifariam.
Eligendi; ut, Potiùs, imò, satiús.
Excludendi; ut, Tantùm, modò, solúm.
Includendi, sive negatae solitudinis; ut, Non mo­dò, non solùm, nedum.
Diversitatis; ut, Aliter, secus.
Propinquitatis; ut, Obviàm, praestò.
Intendendi; ut, Valdè, nimis, funditùs, omnino.
Remittendi; ut, Vix, aegrè, paulatim, pedetentim.
Restringendi; ut, Quatenus quoad, in-quantùm.
Rei non peractae; ut, Penè, ferme.
Explanandi; ut, Putà, utpote, nimirum, i. e. (id est) viz. (videlicet) q. d. (quasi dicat).
Dubitandi; ut, Forsan, forsitan, fortassis.
Eventûs; ut, Fortè, fortuitò, fortè fortunâ.
Demonstrandi; ut, En, ecce, sic, itá.
Similitudinis; ut, Sic, sicut, ceu, tanquam, velut.
Quantitatis; ut, Parùm, minimè, satis, abunde.
Qualitatis; ut, Bene, malè, & quae in e desinunt ab Adjectivis trium terminationum; ut, Doctè, pulcrè: item in er ab Adjectivis trium Arti­culorum; ut, Graviter, feliciter.
Comparandi; ut, Tam, quàm, minks, aequè, ma­gis atque.

Adverbia ab Adjectivis derivata more Adjectivo­rum comparantur, sed solâ terminatione differunt; ut, Doctè, doctiùs, doctissimè; fortiter, fortiùs, fortissi­mé.

[Page 179] Similiter & Bene, meliùs, optimè; saepè, saepius, sae­pissimè; nuper, nuperrimè, cum paucis aliis.

Aliquando Neutra Adjectiva induunt formam Ad­verbiorum, ad Graecorum imitationem; ut, Recèns, pro recenter; Torvùm pro torvê.

Cap. 41. De Conjunctione.

VI. Conjunctio voces & sententias conjungit. Species ejus quoad signi­ficationem sunt 17. Quoad Or­dinem qua­tuor.

CONjUNCTIO est pars Orationis, quae vo­ces & sententias aptè connectit.

Quoad potestatem five significationem Conjunctionum aliae suntCopulativae, quae & sensum & verba copulant; ut, Et, que, nec.
Suspensivae, quae orationem suspendunt sive aliud exspectari faciunt; ut, Cùm, tum, &, vel, geminatae.
Disjunctivae, quae sensum disjungunt, verba ve­rò copulant; ut, Aut, sive, vel.
Causales, quae caussam reddunt superioris sen­tentiae; ut, Nam, enim, quia.
Discretivae, quae discretionem faciunt; ut, Sed, verò, at, ast.
Conditionales, quae conditionem implicant; ut, Si, sin, nisi, dum.
Exceptivae, quae aliquid excipiunt; ut, Ni, nisi, quin, alioquin.
Interrogativae, quae interrogant; ut, Nè, an, utrum.
Dubitativae, quae dubitant; ut, An, num, nun­quid.
Rationales, sive Illativae, quae ex ratione pro­posita [Page 181] conclusionem inferunt; ut, Ergò, ideo, itaque.
Continuativae, quae membra orationis ordine continuant; ut, Deinde, porrò, proinde, insuper.
Concessivae, sive Adversativae, quae aliquid con­cedunt cui posterior sententia adversetur; ut, Etsi, quanquam, licèt, tametsi, quamvis.
Redditivae earundem, quae ad Concessivas rela­tae diversam sententiam superiori reddunt; ut, Tamen, attamen, veruntamen.
Electivae, quae ostendunt praecedens membrum sententiae praeferri; ut, Quàm, ac, atque.
Diminutivae, quae diminuunt sensum; ut, Sal­tem, vel.
Expletivae, vel Completivae, quae ornatûs gratiâ sententiam complent; ut, Quidem, autem, scili­cet, enimvero.
Conjunctiones adverbiales, vel Adverbia con­junctiva, quae tenui discrimine ab adverbiis discernuntur; ut, Quando, proinde.

Quoad Ordinē suntPraepositivae, quae in sententiarum exordio po­nuntur; ut, Nam, quare, at.
Subjunctivae, sive Postpositivae, quae secundum, tertium, vel quartum locum in clausula occu­pant; ut, Quidem, quoque, verò, enim.
Communes, quae indifferenter & praeponi & postponi possunt; ut, Ergò, igitur, itaque, sed.
Encliticae sive Inclinativae, quae affixae praece­denti voci, accentum suum in ejus ultimam syllabam inclinant; ut, Que, nè, ve, dum, sis, nam.

Cap. 42. De Praepositione.

VII. Praepositio aliis voci­bus praepo­ponitur. Praepositio­nes sunt 54. Quarum alii sunt, 1. Separabi­les. 2. Aliae In­separabiles.

PRAEPOSITIO est pars Orationis quae aliis vocibus praeponitur,

vel inAppositione; ut, Ad Scholam.
Compositiont; ut, Advenio.

Praepositiones sunt vel1. Separebiles.
Sive
2. Inseparabiles.

1. Separabiles sunt, quae & in & extra Compositi­nem usurpantur; de quarum regimine dicemus, LIB. 3. CAP. 8.

Ex his enim triginta una Accusativum regunt, viz.

Ad.Erga.Praeter.
Apud.Extra.Prope,
Adversús.Infra.Propter.
Adversúm.Inter.Secundúm.
AnteIntra.Secus.
Cis.Juxta.Supra,
Citra.Ob.Trans.
Circum.Penés.Versús.
Circa.Per.Ʋltra.
Circiter.Poné. 
Contra.Post. 

Quas aliqui quatuor versibus complectuntur.

  • Ad, penès, adversùs, cis, citra, circiter, extra,
  • Erga, apud, ante, secus, trans, supra, versus, ob, infra,
  • [Page 185]Ʋltra, post, praeter, propter, propè, ponè, secundùm,
  • Per, circum, circa, contra, juxta, inter, & intrá.
  • Duodecim verò regunt Ablativum; A, ab, abs, abs­que, coram, cum, de, è, ex, prae, pro, sine.

Quinque serviunt utrisque casui; Clam, in, sub, subter, super; unicum tenus gaudet Ablativo singula­ri, & Genitivo plurali.

2. Inseparabiles sunt, quae nunquam extra Compo­sitionem inveniuntur.

Am,ut,Ambio.
Di,Diduco.
Dis,Disttrabo.
Re,ut,Recipio.
Se,Sepono.
Con,Convivo.
Ve,Vesanus.

Praepositionum significatio non tam regulis, quàm assiduo legendi ac scribendi usu discenda est.

Quaedam Praepositiones suis casibus postponi so­lent; viz. Cum, ut quibuscum; tenus, ut pube tenus; versùs, ut Londinum versús: quibus addi potest usque, ut ad Orientem usque.

Praepositiones cùm sine casu ponuntur fiunt Ad­verbia; ut, Coràm laudare, clàm vituperare.

Quaedam Adverbiorum, Conjunctionum, & Prae­positionum, pro variâ eorum significatione, modò Adverbia, modò Conjunctiones, modò Praepositio­nes censeri possunt.

Quaedam Praepositiones procreant Adjectiva Com­parativi & Superlat. gradûs, ut videre est, Cap. 17. l. 2.

Cap. 34. De Interjectione.

VIII. Interjectio caeteris par­tibus orati­onis interji­citur.

INterjectio est pars Orationis quae subitò prorum­pentem animi affectum demonstrat.

[Page 187] Tot igitur sunt Interjectiones, quot sunt animiperturbati motus, viz.

  • Exultantis; ut Evax, vah, io.
  • Dolentis; ut, Heu, hoi, hei, oh, ah.
  • Timentis; ut, Atat.
  • Admirantis; ut, Papae.
  • Indignantis; ut, Hem, vah.
  • Vitantis; ut, Apage, apagite.
  • Vocantis; ut, Eho, ho, io.
  • Laudantis; ut, Euge, eja.
  • Deridentis; ut, Huî.
  • Exclamantis; ut, Oh, proh.
  • Imprecantis; ut, Malùm, vae malúm.
  • Fastidientis; ut, Phy.
  • Minantis; ut, Vae,
  • Ridentis; ut, Ha, he, he.
  • Silentium orationi injungentis; ut, Au, 'st, pax.

Aliquando Nomina, Verba, & aliae voces interjici­untur more Interjectionum; ut, Infandùm, amabò, malùm, mirabile dictu, &c.

LIB. III. DE SYNTAXI.

Syntax is debitam partium Orationis Compositi­onem docet. Per Regu­las

SYNTAXIS, sive Constructio, est tertia pars Grammatices, quae debitam partium Orationis inter se Compositionem docet.

Ea verò est debita Compositio, quâ veterum pro­batissimi, tum in scribendo, tum in loquendo sunt usi.

Syntaxeos partes duae sunt,Concordantia. &CAP. 1.
Regimen.CAP. 2.

Cap. 1. De Concordantiâ.

1. Concor­dantiae.

COncordantia est dictionum constructio secundùm earum in accidentibus quibusdam convenien­tiam.

Sunt autem Con­cordantiae tres,Prima inter Nominativum & Verbum. s. I.
Secunda inter Substantivum & Adjectivum. §. II.
Terria inter Antecedens & Re­lativum. §. III.
Quibus adjun­gi possunt RegulaeDe casu Relativi. §. IV.
De Interrogativo & Redditi­vo. §. V.
§. I. Regula primae Concordantiae.

VErbum Personale cohaeret cum Nominativo Numero & personâ; ut,

  • Praeceptor legit, vos verò negligitis.
  • Dum felis dormit, saliunt mures.

1. Obs. Nominativus primae vel secundae personae ra­rissimè exprimitur; ut,

Absque Deo nihil possumus.

1. Exc. Nisi caussâ discretionis; viz. cùm diversa studia significamus.

Tu ludis, ego studeo.

2 Exc. Aut Emphasis gratiâ; viz. cùm plùs signifi­camus, quàm expressè dicimus; ut,

Tu es patronus, tu pater, si deseris tu, perimus.

2. Obs. Verbum Substantivum saepissime subauditur; ut, Nulla salus bello.

Qualis Dominus, talis Servus.

3. Obs. Saepe reticentur & alia verba; ut,

Cornici oculum. (* configere)

Sus ad lutum. († redibit)

§. II. Regula secundae Concordantiae.

ADjectivum cum Substantivo, genere, numero, & casu consentit; ut,

Rara avis in terris, nigróque simillima cygno Vera fides.

Canis festinans coecos parit catulos.

1. Obs. Adjectivum Substantivè positum supplet lo­cum Substantivi; ut,

  • Doctus pauper indocto divite praestantior est.
  • Omnia mala sunt fugienda.
  • Vir bonus est commune bonum.
§. III. Regula tertiae Concordantiae.

3. Tertiae.

RElativum (qui) cum Antecedente concordat genere, numero, & personâ; ut,

  • Vir sapit, qui pauca loquitur.
  • Prima, quae vitam dedit, hora carpsit.
  • Leve fit, quod bene fertur onus.

N. B. Antecedens (ferè) est dictio quae Relativum antecedit, & à Relativo refertur.

Nominativus, Substantivum, & Antecedens di­cuntur Supposita, quia Verbo, Adjectivo, & Relati­vo in Concordantia (quae etiam à quibusdam Appo­sita vocantur) quasi supponuntur atque ea susten­tant: hinc

1. Obs. In orationibus quae ad homines tantùm per­tinent Suppositum saepe subauditur; ut,

  • Sic vulgò dicunt.
  • Boni discunt seduli.
  • Bona bonis prognata.
  • Qui nimiùm properat, seriùs absolvit.
  • Quae nocent, docent.

2. Obs. Aliquando oratio, membrum orationis, ver­bum Infiniti modi, Adverbium cum Genitivo, aut dictio pro se posita, supplent locum Supposito­rum; ut,

  • Ingenuas-didicisse-fideliter-artes, emollit mores.
  • Diluculo-surgere saluberrimum est.
  • Partim signorum sunt combusta.
  • In-tempore-veni, quod omnium rerum est primum.
  • Saepe vale dicto, rursus sum multa loquutus.

[Page 185] 3. Obs. Suppositum quandoque cum Verbo, vel Adjectivo, vel Relativo sensu magis quàm voce con­venit. ut,

  • Turba ruunt. Vterque deluduntur.
  • Gens armati pugnant.
  • Ubi illic scelus est qui me perdidit?

4. Obs. Verbum, Adjectivum, aut Relativum inter duo supposita diversorum numerorum, aut generum collocatum, cum alterutro convenire potest; ut,

  • Amantium irae amoris redintegratio est.
  • Paupertas visum est magnum onus.
  • Animal plenum rationis, quem vocamus hominem.
  • Avis (qui vel) quae passer appellatur.

5. Obs. Plura Supposita singularia per Conjuncti­onem copulata saepe Verbum, vel Adjectivum, vel Relativum plurale exigunt, atque haec cum Sup­posito digniore quadrabunt; ut,

  • Ego & tu, qui studemus seduli, sumus in tuto.
  • Tu atque ille, qui sedetis tam supini, cavete ne vapu­letis.
N. B. Suppositi dignitas spectatur secundùm1. Genus. aut,
2. Personam.

1. Dignior enim est persona prima quàm secunda, aut tertia, & dignior secunda quàm tertia.

2. Dignius etiam est masculinum genus quàm foe­mininum, aut neutrum, & dignius foemininum quàm neutrum.

Exc. At in rebus inanimatis neutrum genus adhi­betur tanquam dignius; ut,

  • Arcus & calami sunt bona.
  • Virga tua & baculus tuus (ipsa) me consolata sunt.

6. Obs. Cùm Verbum vel Adjectivum pluri­bus Suppositis respondet, cum viciniore convenit expresse, cum reliquis per supplementum; ut,

  • Cubas ubi ego, coenas quando nos.
  • Maritus & uxor est irata.

Exc. Attamen quando est comparatio vel simili­tudo, Verbum vel Adjectivum convenit cum remo­tiore Supposito; ut,

  • Ego meliùs, quàm tu, scribo.
  • Divina lex, sicut mel, dulcis est.

7. Obs. Pronomen Primitivum includi vel subintel­ligi in Possessivo videtur, ideóque Relativum aut Adjectivum cum tali Primitivo saepe concordant; ut,

  • Nil meâ refert, qui sum natu maximus.
  • Scripta cùm mea nemo legat, vulgò recitare ti­mentis.
§. IV. Regula de casu Re­lativi.

Quibus ad­das, 4. De casu Relativi.

QUoties nullus Nominativus interseritur inter Relativum & Verbum, Relativum erit Verbo Nominativus; ut,

  • Qui antè non cavet, pòst dolebit.
  • Quod rarum charum.
  • Facilè inveniat baculum qui cupit caedere canem.

At si Nominativus Relativo & Verbo interpona­tur, Relativum regetur à Verbo, aut ab alia dicti­one in eadem oratione; ut,

  • Saepe vincas patientiâ quem non vincas impetu.
  • Si non potes quod vis, id velis quod possis.
  • Cujus umbram veneror.
  • Cui similem non vidi.

[Page 199] 1. Obs. Sicuti Relativum Verbo Nominativus, ità Adjectivo Substantivum fieri potest; ut,

  • Qui malis gaudet alienis bis miser est.
  • Felix quem faciunt aliena pericula cautum.

2. Obs. Nomina Interrogativa & Indefinita regu­lam Relativi sequuntur, quae semper praecedunt ver­bum sicuti Relativum; ut,

Qualis erat? Talis erat, qualem nunquam vidi.

§. V. Regula de Interrogativo, & ejus Redditivo.

5. De Inter­rogativo & Redditivo.

INterrogativum & ejus Redditivum ejusdem ca­sûs, & temporis erunt; i. e. quo casu vel tempore quaeritur, in eodem respondebitur; ut,

Quid agitis? Studemus.

Quis dives est? Qui nîl cupiat. Quis pauper? Ava­rus. Quid rerum nunc geritur in Anglia?

Consulitur de Religione.

1. Obs. Fallit haec regula, quoties diversa vocum natura diversos casus exigit; viz.

1. Quoties interrogatio fit per Cujus, ja, jum; ut,

Cujum pecus? Aegonis.

2. Aut per dictionem variae Syntaxeos; ut,

  • Furtine accusatur, an homicidii? Ʋtroque, vel de utroque.
  • Quanti constitit? Denario.

3. Quoties per Possessivum respondere licet; ut,

  • Cujus est hic codex? Meus.
  • Cujus est haec domus? Paterna.

Cap. 2. De Regimine Nominum.

2. Regimi­nis 1. Nomi­num

REgimen est constructio dictionum, secundùm quam praecedens quaeque dictio regit certum casum vel modum sequentis.

Est autem RegimenNominum, Cap. 2.
Pro nominum, Cap. 3.
Verborum, Cap. 4.
Participiorum, Cap. 5.
Adverbiorum, Cap. 6.
Conjunctionum, Cap. 7.
Praepositionum, Cap. 8.
Interjectionum, Cap. 9.

Omnes enim partes orationis regunt casus, exce­ptâ Conjunctione, quae tamen certos modos & tem­pora postulat.

Nomina regunt qua­tuor casus: viz.Genitivum, §. VI.
Dativum, §. VII.
Accusativum, §. VIII.
Ablativum, §. IX.
§. VI. Regula de Nominibus Genitivum regentibus.

6. Genitivo

GEnitivum regunt.

I. Substantiva: Quum enim duo Substantiva diversae significationis concurrant, posterius in Geni­tivo ponitur; ut,

  • Timor domini est initium sapientiae.
  • Verbum Dei manet in aeternum.

1. Obs. Sin duo vel plura Substantiva sint ejusdem rei, in eodem casu ponentur; ut,

  • Pater meus vir amat me puerum.
  • Marcus Tullius Cicero Princeps Oratorum.

2. Obs. Genitivus possessoris saepissimè in Adjecti­vum possessivum mutatur; ut,

  • Patris domus, vel Paterna domus.
  • Heri filius, vel herilis filius.

3. Prius Substantivum quandoque per Ellipsin sub­auditur; ut,

  • Ad *Templum. Stae Mariae.
  • †Servum. Hujus video Byrrhiam.
  • Tertio *Die. Kalendarum.

4. Adjectivum in neutro genere Substantivè posi­tum Genitivum postulat; ut,

  • Quantum quisque suâ nummorum servat in arcá, Tantum habet & fidei
  • Non videmus id manticae quod in tergo est.

Sic & alia Graecorum imitatione; ut,

  • Nigrae lanarum nullum bibunt colorem,
  • Canum degeneres caudam sub alvum reflectunt.

5. Nomina qualitatem denotantia ad laudem vel vituperium rei efferentur in Ablativo vel Genitivo post Nomen vel Verbum Substantivum; ut,

  • Ingenui vultûs puer, ingenuique pudoris.
  • Contemptissimus quisque solutissimâ est linguâ.

6. Opus & usus pro necesse, gaudent Ablativo; ut,

  • Quid verbis opus est.
  • Ʋsus est viginti minis.

Opus verò pro necessarius variè construitur; ut,

  • Dux nobis opus est.
  • Quae tibi opus sunt para.

II. Adjectiva quae desiderium, notitiam, memoriam, curam, timorem, aut ejusmodi animi affectionem significant; ut, Est natura hominum novitatis avida.

[Page 205] Mens est praesaga futuri.

Vive memor mortis. Timidus procellae,

Rudis literarum.

III. Verbalia in ax; ut,

Virtus est vitiorum fugax.

Tempus edax rerum.

IV. Partitiva; ut, Aliquis vestrûm.

Ʋtrum horum mavis accipe.

V. Partitivè posita; viz. quae per de, è, ex, de, aut inter exponuntur, cujusmodi sunt,

1. Interrogativa quaedam; ut Quis fratrum?

An quisquam hominum est aequè miser ut ego?

2. Certa Numeralia; viz. Cardinalia & Ordinalia; ut, Quatuor judicum.

Sapientum octavus quis fuerit nondum constat.

3. Comparativa & Superlativa; ut,

Manuum fortior est dextra.

Digitorum medius est longissimus.

1. Obs. Haec tamen in alio sensu Ablativum exigunt cum praepositione; ut,

Primus ab Hercule. Tertius ab Aenea:

2. In alio verò sensu Dativum; ut,

Nulli pietate secundus.

3. Usurpantur etiam cum Praepositionibus per quas Genitivus exponi solet; ut,

Est deus è vobis alter. Solus de plurimis.

Primus inter omnes.

VI. Ingens praetereà Adjectivorum turba, (viz. Com­pos, reus, exsors, particeps, &c.) crebrâ lectione meli­ùs addiscenda; ut,

Compos voti. Reus furti. Omnis culpae exsors.

Illius consilii particeps.

De quibus videsis LINACRUM & DISPAU­TERIUM.

§. VII. Regula de nominibus Dati­vum regentibus.

7. Dativo.

DAtivum regunt.

I. Adjectiva quibus significatur

1. Commodum aut Incommodum; ut,

  • Sis bonus ô felixque tuis.
  • Patriae idoneus, utilis agro.
  • Turba gravis paci, placidaeque inimica quieti.

2. Similitudo aut Dissimilitudo; ut,

  • Est finitimus Oratori Poëta. Aequalis Hectori.
  • Veritati dissentaneum.

3. Voluptas; ut, Jucundus omnibus.

4. Submissio; ut, Parenti supplex.

5. Relatio ad aliquid; ut,

  • Otium tibi molestum erit.
  • Invia virtuti nulla est via.

6, Huc referuntur ex Con Praepositione composi­ta; ut, Mihi cognatus.

1. Obs. Quaedam tamen ex his quae Similitudinem significant Genitivo gaudent; ut,

  • Domini similis es.
  • Par hujus erat. Affinis sceleris vel sceleri.

2. Obs. Communis, alienus, immunis, proprius, conscius, & superstes variis casibus serviunt; ut,

  • Commune animantium omnium.
  • Mors omnibus communis est.
  • Hoc mihi tecum commune est.
  • Alienum consilii. Alienus ambitioni.
  • Alienus à Scevolae studiis.
  • Immunis hujus mali. Omnibus immunis.
  • Immunes ab illis malis sumus.
  • Proprium est stultorum. Mihi proprium.
  • Mihi nullius culpae conscius sum.
  • [Page 209]Is conscius illi facinori fuit.
  • Superstes dignitati suae vixit.
  • Superstes omnium rerum.

3. Obs. Natus, commodus, incommodus, utilis, inutilis, vehemens, aptus, ineptus, par, aequalis, interdum etiam Accusativo cum Praepositione junguntur; ut,

  • Natus ad gloriam. Calcei ad pedes apti.
  • Homo ad nullam partem utilis.
  • Virtutes ipsae inter se aequales & pares. Cic.

II. Verbalia in bilis accepta passivè; ut,

  • Multis ille bonis flebilis occidit,
  • Nulli flebilior quàm tibi.
§. VIII. Regula de Nominibus Accusativum regentibus.

ADjectiva regunt Accusativum significantem magnitudinis mensuram; ut,

Altus pedem. Latus manum.

Crassus tres digitos. Septem pedes longus.

Sed interdum reguntGenitivum; ut, Areae lat [...] pedum denum.
Ablativum; ut, Fons latus pedibus tribus.
§. IX. Regula de Nominibus Abla­tivum regentibus.

A Blativum regunt.

1. Comparativa (Nomina, Verba, & Adver­bia) quum exponuntur per quàm, aut post se habent nomen significans mensuram excessûs; ut,

  • Vilius argentum est auro, virtutibus aurum.
  • Nullum theatrum veritati conscientiâ majus est.
  • Ʋno pede altior. Viribus praestare.

[Page 211] 1. Obs: Tantò, quantò, multò, paulò, nimiò, eò, quò, hòc, aetate, natu, utrique gradui apponuntur, ut,

  • Longè caeteris peritior est, sed non multò melior.
  • Quò quis indoctior, eò impudentior.
  • Maximus aetate. Minimus natu.

II. Dignus, indignus, praeditus, captus, contentus, extorris, fretus, ut,

  • Dignus es odio.
  • Indignum sapientis gravitate.
  • Omni virtute praeditus. Captus oculis.
  • Sorte tuâ contentus abi.
  • Extorris suâ domo. Fretus tuâ clementiâ.

Obs. Dignus & indignus interdum etiam Genitivum vindicant, ut, Militia operis digna tui.

Magnorum non indignus avorum.

III. Nomina diversitatis, Ablativum sibi cum Praepo­sitione subjiciunt, ut, Aliud ab hoc. Alter ab illo.

Et nonnunquam Dativum, ut huic diversum.

IV. Adjectiva & verba quae ad copiam egestatémve perti­nent, interdum Ablativo, interdum & genitivo gaudent, ut, Amor & melle & felle est foecundissimus.

  • Res est soliciti plena timoris amor.
  • A more abundans. Cares virtute.
  • Dives nivei pecoris. Dives agris.
  • Expers fraudis. Gratiâ beatus.
  • Macte sis virtute. Integer vitae.

1. Obs. Ex his quaedam junguntur Ablativo cum Praepositione, ut, Vacuus irae, irâ, ab irâ.

V. Quodvis Nomen aut Ʋerbum admittit Ablativum,

1. Instrumenti, ut, Ense validus. Melior remis. Daemona non armis, sed morte subegit IESUS.

[Page 213] 2. Causae: ut, Pallidus irâ.

  • Deteriores licentiâ.
  • Invidus alterius rebus macrescit opimis.

3. Circumstantiae, modi actionis aut rei; ut,

  • Nomine Grammaticus, re barbarus.
  • Troianus origine, Syrus natione.
  • Jam veniet tacito curva senecta pede.

1. Obs. Sed Ablativo caussae aut modi aliquando ad­ditur Praepositio; ut,

  • Imparatus à pecuniâ. Cic.
  • Summâ cum humanitate tractavit hominem.

VI. Adjectiva & Verba mercandi regunt Ablativum pretii; ut,

  • Vilis viginti minis. Asse carus.
  • Nec gemmis, nec purpurâ venale, nec auro.
  • Multo sanguine ac vulneribus ea victoria stetit.
  • Mercede docuit. Vili venit triticum.
  • Addicere denario. Locare solido.
  • Habitat decem minis.

1. Obs. Haec tamen sine Substantivis posita, Verbis subjiciuntur in Genitivo; viz. Tanti, quanti, pluris, minoris; as,

  • Non vendo pluris quàm alii, sed minoris.
  • Tanti valent res, quanti vendi possunt.

N. B. Ablativus absolutê ponitur expresso Parti­cipio vel subaudito; ut,

  • Rege veniente hostes fugerunt.
  • Me duce.

Et resolvitur per Dum, cùm, si, &c.

VII. Adjectiva, & Verba Passiva, & Neutralia, si­gnificantia aliquam proprietatem vel passionem, pos­sunt regere Accusativum, vel Ablativum, significan­tem partem in qua est proprietas aut passio; ut,

  • Aeger pedes, vel pedibus. Aegrotat animo magis quàm corpore.
  • Rubet capillos. Ruber crine.

1. Obs. Sed pars affecta interdum in Genitivo poni­tur; ut, O te felicem cerebri!

Angis te animi.

2. Obs. Graecae Phrases sunt:

  • Caetera laetus. Caetera similis.
  • Huic vocem colorem similis est.

Cap. 3. De Regimine Prono­minum.

2. Prono­minum.

MEî, tuî, suî, nostrî, vestrî ponuntur cùm passio; sed Meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, cùm actio vel possessio significatur; ut,

Pars tuî. Pars tua. Imago nostrî. Imago nostra.

Amor suî. Amor suus.

1. Obs. Possessiva verò interdum pro Primitivis usurpantur; ut, Meâ caussâ fecit, i. e. meî.

2. Obs. Nostrûm & vestrûm sequuntur Distributiva, Partitiva, & Comparativa, & Superlativa; ut, Aliquis vestrûm. Major vestrûm. Maximus natu nostrûm.

3. Obs. Meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, quosdam Ge­nitivos post se recipiunt; viz. ipsius, solius, unius, du­orum, trium, omnium, plurium, paucorum, & Genitivos Participiorum qui referuntur ad Primitivum in Possessivo inclusum; ut,

  • Ex tuî ipsius animo conjecturam feceris.
  • Nostros vidisti flentis ocellos.

II. Ipse & idem omnibus personis adjungi possunt; ut

  • Ego-ipse videbo. Idem perge facere.
  • Ipse Plato dixit. Hic idem fecit.

Idem regit aliquando Dativum; ut,

[Page 217] Invitum qui servat idem facit occidenti.

Sed frequentiùs Ablativum cum praepositione, ut, Idem cum illo.

III. Ille eminentiam rei denotat; Iste verò contemp­tum, ut, Alexander ille. Iste homuncio.

Hic ad posterius & propius antepositum; ille ad prius & remotius usitatissimè refertur; ut,

Agricolae contrarium est Pastoris propositum; ille sructum è terra sperat; hic è pecore.

Chap. 4. De Regimine Verborum.

VErba re­guntNominativūCasum,§. X.
Genitivum§. XI.
Dativum§. XII.
Accusativum§. XIII.
Ablativum§. XIv.

Quibus acci­dunt RegulaeDe variam constructionem haben­tibus. §. XV.
De Modo infinito, Gerundiis, & Supinis. §. XVI.
De tempore, Spatio, & loco. §. XvII.
De Impersonalibus. §. XVIII.
§. X. Regula De Verbis Nominativum Regentibus.

3. Verbo­rum. cum 1. Nomina­tivo.

Verba Substantiva, passiva quaedam, & Verba gestûs, utrinque nominativum expetunt, ut,

  • Deus est summum bonum.
  • Fides Religionis nostrae fundamentum habetur.
  • Malus Pastor dormit supinus.
  • Hic evadet vir doctus.

1. Obs: Omnia ferè Verba post se Nominativum habebunt Adjectivi nominis, quod cum supposito verbi, casu, genere, & numero concordat, ut,

  • Terra manet immobilis. Scribo rarissimé.
  • Boni discunt seduli. Loquor frequens.
§. XI. Regula De Verbis Genitivum Regentibus.

2. Genvo.

GEnitivum regunt.

I. Sum, quoties significat possessionem aut ad aliquid pertinere, ut,

  • Haec domus est patris.
  • Adolescentis est majores natu revereri.

Boni Pastoris est tondere pecus non deglubere.

1. Obs: At hi Nominativi meum, tuum, humanum, &c. usurpantur ubi officium aut munus subintelligi videtur per Ellipsin. ut,

Non est meum contra Autoritatem Senatûs dicere.

Humanum est irasci; Belluinum verò saevire.

Regium est benefacere.

II. Verba aestimandi.

  • Parvi penditur probitas.
  • Plurimi passim fit pecunia.
  • Non hujus te facio, qui me pili aestimas.
  • [Page 221]Aequi, boni consulo, vel facio.

1. Obs. Aestimo Ablativum etiam adsciscit; ut,

  • Magno virtus aestimanda est.
  • Tribus denariis aestimavit.

2. Obs. Valeo cum Genitivo, frequentiùs autem cum Accusativo, & Ablativo junctum reperitur; ut,

Tanti valet. Valet duos asses, vel duobus assibus.

3. Obs. Dicimus etiam, Pro nihilo puto, habeo, duco, &c.

III. Verba accusandi, damnandi, monendi, & absolvendi, Genitivum criminis, vel poenae postu­lant; ut, Qui alterum incusat probri eum ipsum se intueri oportet.

  • Socratem innocentissimum capitis condemnabunt.
  • Admonuit me errati.
  • Furti absolutus est.

1. Obs. Vertitur hic Genitivus aliquando in Abla­tivum vel cum Praepositione, vel sine Praepositione; ut, Condemnabo te eodem crimine.

  • Accusatur furti an stupri? Ʋtroque, vel de utroque.
  • Putavi eâ de re admonendum esse te.

IV. Satago, misereor, miseresco; ut

  • Is rerum suarum satagit, Miserere laborum.
  • Generis miseresce tui.

1. Obs. At misereor & miseresco rariùs cum Dativo le­guntur; ut,

Huic misereor. Miseresce malis.

V. Reminiscor, obliviscor, & memini; ut,

Datae fidei reminiscitur. Proprium est stultorum, aliorum vitia cernere, oblivisci suorum.

Faciam ut meî semper memineris.

1. Obs. Et haec Accusativum etiam desiderant; ut,

Reminiscor lectionem. Obliviscor carmen.

VI. Quaedam etiam more Graecorum Genitivum admittunt; ut,

  • Desine mollium querelarum. Hor.
  • [Page 223]Tempus desistere pugnae. Virg.
  • Dignus est omni malo qui erubescit fortunae. Curt.
§. XII. Regula de Verbis Dati­vum regentibus.

3. Dativo.

DAtivum regunt,

Omnia verba acquisitivè posita; ut,

  • Huic habeo non tibi.
  • Non omnibus dormio.
  • Mihi istic nec seritur, nec metitur.

Atque huic regulae appendent Verba,

1. Significantia Commodum aut Incommodum; ut,

  • Non potes mihi commodare nec incommodare.
  • Bonis nocet qui malis parcit.

2. Comparandi; ut,

  • Parvis componere magna.
  • Fratri se adaequavit.

1. Obs. His autem interdum additur Accusativus aut Ablativus cum Praepositione; ut,

  • Si ad eum comparatur nihil est.
  • Comparo Virgilium cum Homero.

3. Dandi & reddendi, ut, Fortuna multis nimiùm dedit,, nulli satis.

Ingratus est qui gratiam bene merenti non reponit.

4. Promittendi ac solvendi, ut, Haec tibi promitto.

Aes alienum mihi numeravit.

5. Imperandi aut nuntiandi, ut,

  • Imperat, aut servit collecta pecunia cuique.
  • Quid de quoque viro, aut cui dicas saepe caveto.

[Page 225] 6. Fidendi, ut, Mulieri nè credas, nè mortuae quidem. Hoc tuae mando fidei.

7. Obsequendi & repugnandi, ut,

  • Semper obtemperat pius filius patri.
  • Ignavis precibus fortuna repugnat.

8. Minandi & irascendi, ut.

  • Vtrique mortem minatus est.
  • Irascor tibi.

9. Sum, cum compositis, praeter possum, ut,

  • Ʋrbi pater est, Vrbique maritus.
  • Multa petentibus desunt multa.

Obs. Item Sum & suppetit pro habeo, ut,

  • Velle suum cuique est.
  • Sunt nobis mitia poma.
  • Pauper non est cui rerum suppetit usus.

2. Obs. Sum cum multis aliis geminum adsciscit Dativum; ut,

  • Exitio est avidis mare nautis.
  • Rex pius est Reipublicae ornamento.
  • Speras tibi laudi fore, quod mihi vitio vertis.

10. Composita cum Adverbiis Satis, bene, malè, & Praepositionibus, prae, ad, con, sub, ante, post, ob, in, inter, ut,

  • Benefecit multis, malefecit nulli.
  • Neminem tibi antepono.
  • Auditis aliquid novus adjicit Autor.

1. Obs. Pauca ex his mutant Dativum aliquoties in alium casum; ut

  • Praestat ingenio alius alium.
  • Interdico tibi aquâ & igni.

2. Obs. Sed Praeeo, praecedo, praecurro, & quaedam alla Composita cum prae Accusativo potiùs junguntur, ut,

Praeibis me.

[Page 227] 3. Obs. Saepe fit Pleonasmus sive redundantia Da­tivorum Mihi, tibi, sibi, ut,

Suo sibi hunc jugulo gladio.

4. Obs. Aliquando Dativus figuratè ponitur pro Accusativo cum Praepositione, & à nonnullis dicitur octavus casus, ut,

  • It clamor caelo pro ad caelum.
  • Solstitium pecori defendite, pro à pecore.
§. XIII. Regula de Verbis Accusativum Regentibus.

4. Accusati­vo.

Verba Transitiva exigunt Accusativum, ut,

  • Deum time. Regem honora.
  • Filii est, revereri parentes.
  • Torva Leaena lupum sequitur, lupus ipse capellam.

1. Obs. Verba absoluta Accusativum admittunt cognatae significationis & aliquando Ablativum, ut,

  • Ʋivo vitam vitâ diu vivere.
  • Endymionis somnum dormis
  • Gaudebant gaudium valdè magnum..
  • Longam ire viam. Ire rectâ viâ.
  • Morte obiit repentinâ.

2. Obs. Quaedam etiam figuratè Accusativum habent, ut,

  • Olet hircum. Sonat hominem.
  • Eadem peccat. Curios simulant & Bacchanalia vivunt.

3. Verba Rogandi, docendi, vestiendi, duplicem regunt Accusativum, unum personae, alterum rei, ut,

  • Tu modò posce Deum veniam.
  • Multa hominem fames docet.
  • Induit se calceos, quos priùs exuerat.

[Page 229] 4. Sed interdum mutant alterum Accusativum in Dativum vel Ablativum, cum, vel sine Praepositio­ne; ut,

Induo te tunicâ, vel tibi tunicam. Senatum edocet de itinere. Veniam oremus ab ipso.

§. XIV. Regula de Verbis Ablativum regentibus.

5. Ablativo.

ABlativum regunt.De quibus in Regimine No­minum supra dictum est, p. 211.
I. Quodvis Verbum, modò iste Ablativus sit
1. Instrumenti.
2. Caussae.
3. Modi Actionis.
II. Verba Pretii.
III. Verba proprietatem vel passio­nem significantia.
IV. Verba Abundandi, & Implendi.

V. Certa quaedam Deponentia & Neutra, viz.

Fungor,utQui adipisci veram gloriam volunt Justitiae fungantur officiis.
Fruor,Optimum est alienâ i nsaniâ frui.
Ʋtor,In re malâ, animo si bono utare, juvat.
Vescor,Vescor carnibus. i
Nitor,Nitor meis viribus. Virtute decet non sanguine n ti.
DignorHaud equidem tali me dignor hono­re.
Prosequor,Prosequor te amore.
Muto,Mutat quadrata rotundis.
Munero,Regni eum societate muneravit.
Supersedeo,Exemplorum multitudine super­sedendum est.
Communico,Communicabo te semper mensâ meâ.
Afficio.Afficio te gaudio, cum paucis aliis.

VI. Verba quae vim comparationis obtinent, ut,

  • Praefero hunc multis gradibus.
  • Paulo intervallo illum superat.
  • Deforme est ab iis virtutibus superari, quos digni­tate praestas.

VII. Verba accipiendi, distandi & auferendi Abla­tivum cum Praepositione optant, ut,

  • Audivi ex multis. Longè distat à nobis.
  • Eripui te à malis.

1. Obs. Vertitur hic Ablativus aliquando in Dati­vum. Eripuit illi vitam.

VIII. Mereor Ablativo adhaeret cum Praepositione De, ut, De me nunquam bene meritus es.

Catilina pessimè de Republica meruit.

IX. Verba passiva admittunt Ablativum cum Prae­positione, & interdum Dativum, ut,

  • Virgilius legitur à me.
  • A cane non magno saepe tenetur aper.
  • Honesta bonis viris, non occulta, petuntur.

1s Obs. Caeteri casus manent in passivis qui fuerunt activorum, ut,

  • Accusaris à me furti.
  • Habeberis ludibrio.

2. Obs. Vapulo, veneo, liceo, exsulo, fio, Passivorum constructionem habent; i. e. Ablativum admittunt cum Praepositione, vel Dativum, ut,

  • A Praeceptore vapulabis.
  • Malo à cive spoliari, quàm ab hoste venire.
  • Quid fiet ab illo? virtus parvo pretio licet omnibus.
  • Cur à conviviis exsulat Philosophia?
§. XV. De Verbis variam constructionem habentibus.

Cum diver­sa significa­tione.

EIdem verbo diversi casus diversae rationis appo­ni possunt, ut,

Dedit mihi vestem pignori, te presente, propriâ ma­nu.

II. Haec variam habent constructionem,

  • 1. In eâdem significatione, viz.
    • 1.
      Adulotibi.
      Adulorte.
    • 2. Aspersit
      • mihi labem.
      • me labe.
    • 3. Attendo
      • tibi,
      • te.
    • 4. Consentio
      • tibi,
      • te cum.
    • 5.
      Dissentiotibi, à te
      Dissideotecum.
    • 6 Dono
      • tibi librum,
      • te libro.
    • 7. Illudo
      • tibi,
      • te.
    • 8 Impertio
      • tibi fortunas meas,
      • te fortunis meis.
    • 9. Induo
      • tibi tunicam,
      • te tunicâ.
    • 10. Instravit
      • equo penulam.
      • equum penulâ.
    • 11. Interdico tibi hanc rem, vel te hâc re.
    • 12. Medicor
      • gnato tuo,
      • istum morbum.
    • 13. Moderor
      • affectui,
      • affectum.
    • 14. Obtrecto
      • laudem,
      • laudi.
    • 15. Praestolor
      • tibi,
      • te.
    • 16. Prohibeo
      • te domo.
      • tibi domum.
    • 17. Subeo
      • tectum,
      • tecto.
    • 2. In diversâ significatione.
      • 1. Accedo
        • tibi, i. e. Assentior.
        • te, i. e. Adeo.
      • 2. Aemulor
        • tibi, i. e. Invideo.
        • te, i. e. imitor.
      • 3. Ausculto
        • tibi, i. e. Obedio.
        • te, i. e. Audio.
      • [Page 235]4.
        Caveotibi, i. e. periculum à te averto.
        te,i. e. declino.
        à te,
        de te, i. e. do aliquid ad cautionem.
      • 5. Cedo
        • tibi.
        • urbe.
        • librum.
      • 6. Consulo
        • tibi, i. e. consilium do, vel prospicio.
        • te, i. e. consilium à te peto.
        • in te, i. e. statuo.
      • 7. Contingit
        • mihi, i. e. accidit.
        • me, i. e. tangit:
      • 8. Cupio,
        • tibi, i. e. faveo.
        • te, i. e. expete.
      • 9. Deficit
        • mihi, i. e. deest.
        • me, i. e. destituit.
        • à me, i. e. in alteram partem transit.
      • 10.
        Do,tibi literas, i. e. ut ad aliquem feras.
        Mitto,ad te literas, i. e. ut legas.
      • 11.
        Foenero,tibi, i. e. do ad usuram.
        Foeneror,abs te, i. e. accipio ad usuram.
      • 12. Laboro
        • febri.
        • de salute publicâ.
      • 13.
        Metuo, Timeo,te, vel à te. i. e. nè mihi noce [...]s.
        Formidotibi, vel de te, i. e. sollicitus sum.
      • 14. Memini tuî, te. de te.
      • 15. Potior urbis. Potior voto.
      • 16. Recipio
        • tibi, i. e. promitto.
        • te, i. e. accipio,
        • domum, i. e. confero.
      • 17. Refero
        • tibi, i. e. narro.
        • ad te, i. e. propono.
      • 18. Renuntio
        • muneri, i. e. recuso.
        • consulem, i. e. declaro.
      • 19. Solvo
        • tibi, i. e. satisfacio.
        • te, i. e. libero.
      • [Page 237]20. Studeo.
        • huic, i. e. operam do.
        • hoc, i. e. cupio.
      • 21. Vaco
        • nugis, i. e. operam do.
        • ad nugas, i. e. otium habeo.
        • culpâ, i. e. careo.

Vacat locus.

Caetera docebit usus.

§. XV. Regula de Infinitivo Modo.

De Infini­to modo.

I. VErba Infinita quibusdam tum Verbis tum Adjectivis subjiciuntur; ut,

  • Vis fieri dives Pontice? nîl cupias.
  • Et erat tum dignus amari.
  • Audax omnia perpeti. Patiens vocari.

1. Obs. Pro Nominativo Accusativum ante se sta­tuunt; ut, Jubeo te abire.

Gaudeo te bene valere.

Atque resolvuntur per quòd & ut; ut, Jubeo ut tu abeas. Gaudeo quòd tu bene valeas.

2. Obs: Utrinque eosdem casus habet; ut, Hypocrita cupit videri justus, vel se videri justum. Natura beatis omnibus esse dedit si quis cognove­rit uti.

3. Obs. Ponuntur interdum absolutè per Elli­psin; ut,

Haeccine fieri flagitia? i. e. decet.

Agnus trepidare. i. e. coepit.

§. XVII. Regula de Gerundiis.

De Gerun­diis. Di. Do. Dum.

GErundia & Supina regunt casus suorum Ver­borum; ut,

[Page 239] Ʋtendum est aetate. Auditum concionem.

Et se habent ut nomina utriusque numeri.

InDitanquamGenitiviCasûs
DumAccusativi
DoAblativi

ut,Occasio studendi.
Aptus ad studendum.
Fessus studendo.

Huic est quòd,

1. Gerundia in Di pendent à quibusdam tum Sub­stantivis tum Adjectivis; ut,

  • Non est narrandi locus.
  • Amor sceleratus habendi. Certus eundi.
  • Peritus jaculandi. Illorum videndi gratiâ.
  • Licentia deripiendi pomorum.

1. Obs. Infinitivus aliquando loco hujus Gerundii ponitur; ut, Peritus medicari.

2. Gerundia in Do pendent ab his Praepositionibus A, ab, abs, de, è, ex, cum, in, pro; ut,

  • Ignavi à discendo citò deterrentur.
  • Rectè scribendi ratio cum loquendo, conjuncta est.

1. Obs. Ponuntur & absque Praepositione; ut, Docendo discimus.

3. Gerundia in Dum pendent ab his Praepositioni­bus, inter, ante, ad, ob, propter; ut,

Inter coenandum hilares este.

Christus moriebatur propter nos redimendum.

1. Obs. Cùm significatur necessitas ponuntur citra Praepositionem, addito Verbo est cum Dativo ex­presso vel subintellecto, ut,

Abeundum est mihi. Orandum est ut sit mens sana in corpore sano.

N. B. Saepe vertuntur Gerundia in Participalia in Dus, quae suis Substantivis conveniunt; ut,

  • Legendis veteribus proficies.
  • [Page 241]Ad Accusandos homines duci praemio proximum latrocinio est.
§. XVIII. Regula de Supinis.

De Supinis. Ʋm. U.

I. PRius Supinum sequitur Verbum aut Partici­pium significans motum ad locum; ut,

Spectatum veniunt.

Cur te is perditum?

1. Obs. Illa verò Do venum, do filiam nuptum, laten­tem habent motum.

2. Poëticè dicunt, Eo visere. Vado videre.

II. Posterius sequitur nomina Adjectiva; ut, Facile factu. Turpe dictu.

§. XIX. Regula de Tempore.

De Tempo­re.

FRequentiùs usurpantur

1. In Ablativo, quae significant partem tem­poris, i. e. quando; ut,

  • Nemo mortalium omnibus horis sapit.
  • Nocte vigilas, luce dormis.

2. In Accusativo, quae durationem temporis deno­tant, i. e. quamdiu; ut,

  • Hyemem totam stertis:
  • Noctes atque dies patet atri janua Ditis.

1. Obs. Interdum additur Praepositio; ut,

Ante tres menses. Per tres annos. In paucis di­cbus. Circa id aetatis. Id tempus. per vel sub.

§. XX. Regula De spatio Loci.

De Spatio.

SPatium loci in Accusativo effertur, interdum & in Ablativo; ut,

  • A rectâ conscientiâ transversum pedem nè discedas.
  • Nec multis inter se passibus absunt.
§. XXI. Regula de Loco.

De Loco.

NOmina loci, cùm apponuntur Verbis signifi­cantibus actionem aut motum,

1. In loco, ad locum, à loco, aut per locum; si sint nomina Appellativa vel nomina majorum locorum viz. Regionum &c. adduntur ferè cum Praepositi­one; ut, In foro versatur.

  • Vivo in anglia. Ad templum abiit.
  • Venit per Galliam In Italiam.
  • Profectus est ex oppido.

1. Obs. Sed omittitur aliquando Praepositio; ut Italiam petiit.

2. In loco aut ad locum (si sint propria nomina Ur­bium aut oppidorum) primae vel secundae Declina­tionis & Singularis numeri, Genitivum; sin tertiae declinationis & pluralis duntaxat numeri, Ablati­vum admittunt; ut,

  • Quid Romae faciam? Londini vixit.
  • Athenis natus est. Romae Tibur amo ventosus, Tibure Romam.

3. Ad locum (si sint propria) ponuntur in Accu­sativo, ut,

  • Eo Londinum ad merces emendas.
  • [Page 245]Concessi Cantabrigiam.

IV. A loco aut per locum, (si sint propria) ponun­tur in Ablativo; ut

Profectus est Londino (vel per Londinum) Cantabri­giam. Discessit Londino.

Obs. Humus, militia, bellum, Domus, & Rus proprio­rum sequuntur formam; ut,

  • Domi bellique simul viximus.
  • Rure educatus est.
  • Ego rus ibo. Ite domum.
  • Rure reversus est.
  • Nuper domo exiit.
§. XXII. De Regimine Impersonalium.

De Imper­sonalibus. 1. Activis. 2. Passives.

1. IMpersonalia activae vocis regunt.

I. Genitivum, viz. Interest, refert, & est pro inte­rest, ut, Interest omnium rectè agere.

Refert multùm Christianae Reipublicae Episcopos doctos & pios esse.

1. Obs. Praeter Ablativos meâ, tuâ, suâ, nostrâ, vestrâ, & cujâ, as,

  • Tuâ refert teipsum nôsse.
  • Ʋestrâ parvi interest.

II. Dativum, viz. Accidit, certum est, contingit, constat, confert, &c. quae acquisitivè ponuntur; ut,

Peccare nemini licet. Emori per virtutem mihi praestat, quàm per dedecus vivere.

Stat mihi casus renovare omnes.

III. Accusativum 1. solum, viz. Juvat, decet, delectat, oportet, ut, Dedecet viros muliebriter rixari.

2. Cum Praepositione Ad, viz. attinet, pertinet, spectas.

Ad te attinet. Spectat ab omnes bene vivere.

3. Cum Genitivo, viz. Poenitet, taedet, miseret, mise­rescit, pudet, piget, ut,

  • Suae quemcunque fortunae poenitet.
  • Taedet me vitae.

II. Impersonalia passivae vocis similes cum Perso­nalibus passivis casus obtinent; ut,

  • Mihi istic nec seritur, nec metitur.
  • Itur Athenas. Dormitur totam noctem.
  • Ab hostibus constanter pugnatur.

I. Obs. Sed & horum casus interdum non expri­muntur; ut, Quid agitur in ludo literario? Studetur.

Cap. 5. De Regimine Participiorum.

5. Partici­piorum.

PArticipia regunt casus suorum Verborum; ut, Fruiturus amicis.

Consulens tibi. Septem vocati sapientes.

1. Obs. Sed cùm fiunt nomina Genitivum postu­lant; ut, Alieni appetens. Cupientissimus tuî.

2. Obs. Quae in Dus verò Dativum; as,

Mihi exorandus est.

3. Obs. Exosus, & perosus, activè significantia regunt Accusativum; ut

Exosus saevitiam.

Passivè verò Dativum; ut,

Exosus Deo & sanctis.

4. Obs. Pertaesus nunc Genitivum, nunc Accusati­vum regit; ut Pertaesus thalami. Ignaviam suam.

5. Obs. Natus, prognatus, satus, cretus, creätus, ortus, editus, in Ablativum feruntur; ut,

  • Nate Deâ.
  • Bona bonis prognata parentibus.
  • Quo sanguine cretus?

Cap. 6. De Regimine Adverbiorum.

6. Adverbi­orum. 1. Cum Casu.

§. I. De Adverbiis quae casus regunt.

ADverbia regunt,

Nominativum, viz. En & ecce, demonstrandi; ut, En Priamus. Ecce duo altaria.

1. Obs. Exprobrantis verò Accusativo jungun­tur; ut, En habitum. Ecce alterum.

2. Genitivum, viz. Adverbia loci temporis & quantitatis; ut, Ʋbi gentium. Quò terrarum. Tunc temporis. Abunde fabularum. Satis verborum. Partim virorum.

1. Obs. Sic & ergô pro caussâ, ut, Illius ergô.

2. Obs. Pridie & postridie Genitivum aut Accusati­vum regunt; ut, Pridie ejus diei.

Postridie Kalendas, sive Kalendarum.

3. Obs. Minimè gentium peculiaris phrasis est.

3. Dativum, viz. quae derivantur à Nominibus Dativum regentibus; ut, Venit obviàm illi.

Canit similiter huic. Sibi inutiliter vivit.

1. Obs. Sunt & hi Dativi Adverbiales Tempori, luci, vesperi; ut, Tempori surgendum. Vesperi cubandum. Luci laborandum.

4. Accusativum Praepositionis unde sunt pro­fecta; ut, Propiùs urbem. Proximè Hispaniam.

N. B. Plùs, minùs, ampliùs, Nominativo, Genitivo, Ac­cusativo & Ablativo, junguntur; ut,

  • Plus trecenta vehicula. Plùs quinquaginta hominum.
  • Plus quinginta passus. Plus eo.
§. II. De Adverbiis quae Modos regunt.

Cum Mo­do.

UBi, postquam, & cùm, Indicativum regunt; ut, Cùm faciam vitulâ pro frugibus, ipse venito.

Et Subjunctivum; ut,

Cùm canerem Reges, & praelia, Cynthius aurem vellit.

Donec pro quousque regit Indicativum; ut, Cogere donec oves stabulis numerúmque referre jussit.

Aut Subjunctivum; ut,

Donec ea aqua, quam adjeceris, decocta sit.

Donec pro quamdiu regit Indicativum; ut,

Donec eram sospes.

Dum de re imperfectâ, regit Indicativum; ut,

Dum apparatur virgo.

Dum quod te dignum est facis.

Dum pro quamdiu, dummodo, & donec, regit Subjun­ctivum; ut, Dum prosim tibi.

Tertia dum Latio regnantem viderit aestas.

Quoad pro quamdiu, Indicativum regit; ut,

Quoad exspectes contubernalem.

Aut Subjunctivum; ut, Quoad possem & liceret.

Quoad pro donec regit Subjunctivum; ut,

Omnia integra servabo, quoad exercitus huc mit­tatur.

Simulac, Simulatque Indicativum regunt; ut,

Simulac belli patiens erat.

Vel Subjunctivum; ut, Simulatque adoleverit aetas.

Quemadmodum, ut, utcunque, sicut, regunt Indicativum; ut, Ʋt salutabis, ità & resalutaberis.

Aut Subjunctivum; ut, Ʋt sementem feceris, ità & metes.

Ʋt pro postquam Indicativum regit; ut.

Ʋt ventum est in Urbem.

[Page 253] Quasi, ceu, tanquam, perinde acsi, haud secus acsi, regunt Subjunctivum; ut,

Quasi non nôrimus nos inter nos.

Atque haec copulant similes casus; ut,

  • Novi hominem tanquam te.
  • Arridet mihi quasi amico.

Nè Prohibendi Imperativum regit; ut,

Nè saevi tantopere.

Aut Subjunctivum; ut, Hic nebulo magnus est, nè metuas.

Cap. 7. De Regimine Conjunctionum.

7. De Con­junctioni­bus quae co­pulant.

§. I. De Conjunctionibus quae Copulant.

COnjunctiones Copulativae & Disjunctivae, cum his quatuor, quàm, nisi, praeterquam, an, similes omnino casus, & aliquoties similes modos & tem­pora conglutinant; ut, Nox, & amor, vinúmque nihil moderabile suadent.

  • Est minor natu quàm tu.
  • Nemini nisi sibi placet.
  • Petrus & Joannes precabantur & docebant in templo.

1. Obs. Saepe verò dictionum aliqua privata ratio diversos casus, modos, & tempora postulant; ut,

  • Emi librum centussi & pluris.
  • Vixi Romae & Venetiis
  • Tibi gratias egi, atque agam dum vivo.

2. Obs. Cùm & tum, item tum geminatum similes casus copulant;

Amplectitur cùm eruditos omnes, tum in primis Marcellum. Odit tum literas, tum virtutem.

§. I. De Conjunctionibus quae Modos regunt.

Regunt Modos.

ETsi, tametsi, etiamsi, quanquam, in principio Orati­onis regunt Indicativum; ut,

Etsi nihil novi afferebatur.

Sed in medio Orationis, Subjunctivum; ut,

Me culpas; etiamsi ipse feceris.

Quamvis, & licèt frequentiùs Subjunctivum regunt; ut,

Ipse licèt venias.

Ni, nisi, si, siquidem, quòd, quia, quàm, postquam, po­steaquam, vbi pro postquam, nunquam, priusquam,

reguntIndicativum, aut,ut,Quòd tu rediisti,
Subjunctivum,(vel redieris incolu­mis, gaudeo.

Si regitIndicativum; ut, Si vales, bene est. &
Subjunctivum; ut, Si negaveris, vapulabis.

Si pro quamvis, Subjunctivum; ut,

Non; si me obsecret.

Quando, quandoquidem, & quoniam regunt Indicati­vum; ut,

Dicite, quandoquidem in molli consedimus herbâ.

Quippe regit Indicativum; ut, Quippe aegrotat.

Quippe qui, Indicativum & Subjunctivum; ut, Quippe qui bis pejeravit, sive pejeraverit.

Qui, cùm Quippe subintelligitur: habens vim Causa­lem, Subjunctivum; ut,

Stultus es qui huic credas.

[Page 257] Cùm pro quamvis, quandoquidem, & quoniam, regit Subjunctivum; ut,

Cùm sis aptus.

Nè, an, num Interrogandi, regunt indicativum; ut, Superátne?

Dubitandi, Subjunctivum; ut,

Vise num redierit.

Ʋt, caussalis, & pro nè, non, pro quanquam, & utpote Subjunctivum regit; ut,

  • Ʋt unà esset tecum.
  • Metuo ut substet.
  • Ʋt omnia contingant, quae volo.
  • Ʋt qui toties fèfelleris.

Ʋt pro postquam, quemadmodum, sicut, & Interroga­tivum regit Indicativum; ut,

  • Ʋt ab urbe discessi.
  • Perge facere, ut facis.
  • Ʋt est dementia. Ʋt valct?

Cap. 8. De Regimine Praepositionum.

8. Praeposi­tionum.

TRiginta Praepositiones Accusativum regunt; viz.
  • 1. Ad Ecclesiam.
  • 2. Apud forum.
  • 3. Ante obitum.
  • 4. Adversos duos.
  • 5. Adversùm te.
  • 6. Cis Tamesin.
  • 7. Citra fluvium.
  • 8. Circa oppidum.
  • 9. Circùm montem.
  • 10. Circiter duo millia.
  • 11. Contra stimulum.
  • 12. Erga populum.
  • 13. Extra aedes.
  • 14. Inter calicom & la­brum.
  • 15. Intra domum.
  • 16. Infra omnes.
  • 17. Juxta fontem.
  • 18. Ob praemium.
  • 19. Penès illum.
  • 20. Per campos.
  • 21. Ponè tergum.
  • [Page 259]22 Post mortem.
  • 23 Praeter casam.
  • 24 Propter vicinum.
  • 25 Secundùm Aristotelem.
  • 26 Secus decursus aquarum.
  • 27 Supra captum.
  • 28 Trans Alpes.
  • 29 Londinum versús.
  • 30 Ʋltra Indos.

Duodecim verò regunt Ablativum, viz.

  • 1 A Deo.
  • 2 Ab inimico.
  • 3 Abs quovis.
  • 4 Absque pecuniâ.
  • 5. Coram praeceptore.
  • 6 Cum damno.
  • 7 De nugis.
  • 8 E fonte.
  • 9 Ex altâ rupe.
  • 10 Prae omnibus.
  • 11 Sine pane.
  • 12 Pro pauperibus.
  • III. Quinque regunt Accusativum & Ablativum.
    • 1
      Clampatrem,
      patre.
    • 2
      Intectum.
      tecto.
    • 3
      Subnoctem,
      nocte.
    • 4
      Superlapidem,
      lapide.
    • 5
      Subterterram,
      terra.

Quibus addas Tenùs; ut,

Pube tenús. Pectoribus tenús.

Aurium tenús.

1 Obs. Praepositio saepe subauditur; ut,

Exspecto hodie, aut *Ad. summum cras.

Apparuit †Sub. humanâ specie.

2 Obs. Saepe verò redundat; ut, Abstine à vitiis.

Amicos ad vocabo ad hanc rem.

3 Obs. Praepositio in Compositione eundem non­nunquam casum regit quem & extra compositio­nem regebat; ut,

Praetereo te insalutatum. Decedo magistratu.

[Page 261] 4 Obs. Limen exire. Cursu praevertere ventos, &c. videntur singularia.

Cap. 9. De Regimine Interjectionum.

9. Interje­ctionum.

QUaedam Interjectionum regunt casus; viz.

1. O Exclamantis Nominativum, Accusati­vum, & Vocativum; ut,

O festus dies! O fortunatos agricolas! O formose puer! Vocantis verò Vocativum tantùm; ut,

Huc ades ô Galataea!

2. Heus & ohe vocativum; ut,

Heus Syre! Ohe libelle!

3. Pro & proh, ah & vah, Accusativum & Vocati­vum; ut, Proh Deûm atque hominum fidem!

Proh sancte Jupiter! Ah me miserum! Vah incon­stantiam! Ah virgo infelix! Vah scelus!

4. Heu Nominativum, Dativum, & Accusativum, ut,

Heu Pietas.

Heu stirpem invisam. Heu misero mihi.

5. Hem & apage Accusativum; ut, Hem astutias.

Hem Davum tibi. Apage istiusmodi salutem.

6. Hei & vae Dativum; ut, Hei mihi.

Vae tibi.

1 Obs. Interjectiones non rarò absolutè & sine casu ponuntur; ut,

Hei vereor. Quae (malùm) dementia?

2 Obs. Saepe etiam subintelliguntur; ut, Me miserum. Facinus indignum. Credo vos mirari, judices.

Cap. 10. De Figuris dictionis.

De Figuris, 1. Dictionis.

FIgura est novatâ arte aliquâ dicendi forma, sive mutatio formae dictionis aut orationis à commu­ni Ioquendi consuetudine, idque bonorum scripto­rum autoritate.

Est autem Figura duplex,1. Dictionis:quaeEtymologiaeaccidit.
2. Constructionis.Syntaxi

Figura dictionis, (sive Etymologica) est quae dictio­nis formam aliquo modo mutat; ejus hae sunt prae­cipuae species.

1. Prosthesis, (sive adjectio) est appositio literae vel syllabae ad principium dictionis; ut, Gnatus pro na­tus, tetuli pro tuli.

2. Aphaeresis, (sive detractio) est ablatio literae vel syllabae à principio dictionis; ut, Ruit pro eruit, te­mnere pro contemnere.

3. Epenthesis, (sive insertio) est interpositio literae vel syllabae in medio dictionis; ut, relligio pro religio, Induperator pro Imperator.

4. Syncope, (sive concisio) est ablatio literae vel syllabae à medio dictionis; ut, Abiît pro abivit, dîxti pro dixisti.

5. Paragoge, (sive productio) est appositio literae vel syllabae ad finem dictionis; ut, Dicier pro dici, emo­rier pro emori.

6. Apocope, (sive abscissio) est ablatio literae vel syl­labae à fine dictionis; ut, Ingenî pro ingenii.

7. Diaeresis, (sive divisio) est divisio unius syllabae in duas; ut, Auläi pro Aulae, evolüisse pro evolvisse.

8. Synaeresis, (sive complexio) est contractio duarum vocalium (quae ad diversas syllabas pertinent) in unā syllabam; ut, Thesei pro Thesei, vêmens pro vehemens.

[Page 265] 9. Metathesis, (sive trajectio) est transpositio literae vel syllabae; ut, Pistris pro pristis.

10. Antithesis, sive Antistoechon, (sive oppositio) est po­sitio litèrae pro litera; ut, Olli pro illi.

11. Tmesis, est dissectio vocis compositae, cujus par­tibus alia interponitur; ut, Quae mihi cunque pla­cent.

12. Enallage, (sive Antimeria) partes Orationis, ea­rúmque Accidentia alia pro aliis ponit; ut, Populum latè regem, i. e. regnantem. Agnus trepidare, pro tre­pidabat.

13. Archaïsinus, est vetus & jam obsoletus loquen­di mos; ut, Valdè tonit, pro tonuit. Tam nulli consili. pro nullius consilii. Operam abuti.

14. Metaplasmus, (sive transformatio) est quaevis mu­tatio vocis; ut, Agreste pro agresti.

Cap. 11. De Figuris Constructionis.

2. Constructions.

FIgura Syntaxeos, sive Constructionis, est quae oratio­nis structuram aliquo modo mutat. Ejus Spe­cies sunt,

1. Appositio, est duorum vel plurium Substantivo­rum ejusdem casûs conjunctio; ut, Flumen Rhenus. Ʋrbs Athenae. M. T. C.

Fit autem caussâ,1. Restringendae generalitatis; ut, Animal equus.
2. Tollendae aequivocationis; ut, Canis, astrum.
3. Ad proprietatem attribuendam; ut, Erasmus vir exactissimo judicio.

[Page 267] 2. Syllepsis, est comprehensio indignioris generis vel personae sub digniore; ut,

  • Ego & frater sumus candidi.
  • Mars & Venus, impliciti laqueis, nudus uterque jacet.

3. Prolepsis, est pronuntiatio quaedam rerum sum­maria; ut, Duae aquilae volaverunt, haee ab Oriente, illa ab Occidente. Populus vivit, alii in penuriâ, alii in deliciis. Alter alterius onera portate. Curemus aequam uterque partem.

4. Zeugma, est Verbi vel Adjectivi, ad diversa Sup­posita reductio, ad unum quidem expressè, ad alte­rum verò per supplementum; ut,

  • Joannes fuit piscator & Petrus.
  • Maritus & uxor est irata.

5. Synthesis, est Oratio congrua sensu non voce; ut, Gens armati ruunt. Ʋterque laesi sumus. Anser foeta. Duo millia caesi.

6. Antiptôsis, est positio casûs pro casu; ut, Omne ge­nus elegantiá, i. e. omnis generis. Idne estis autores, i. e. ejus.

7. Synecdoche est, eùm id quod partis est, attribui­tur toti; ut, Aethiops albus dentes. Saucius frontem, vel fronte. Flores, inscripti nomina regum.

8. Elleipsis, est defectio vocis in Oratione; ut,

Memini * videre, i. e. * me.

Ego continuò * mecum, i. e. * cogitabam.

9. Pleonasmus, est abundantia vocis in Oratione su­pra necessitatem; ut,

  • Vidi his oculis.
  • Suo sibi hunc jugulo gladio.

10. Asyndeton, est Conjunctionum in Oratione defe­ctus; ut, Velis, nolis, fiet.

Ede, bibe, lude.

11. Polysyndeton est Conjunctionum in Oratione re­dundantia; ut,

[Page 269] Somnus, & vinum, & epulae, & scorta, & bal­neae corpora atque animos enervant.

12. Anastrophe, est cùm Praepositio suo casui post­ponitur; ut,

Te penès imperium.

13. Synchysis, est ordo Verborum confusus; ut,

Namque1 pilâ7 lippis3 inimicum2 &4 ludere6 crudis5.

14. Hypallage, est mutua casuum permutatio; ut,

Dare classibus Austros.

15. Hellenismus, sive Graecismus est recessus à Lati­nâ consuetudine in imitationem Graecorum; ut,

Noli pugnare duobus, i. e. contra duos.

Caeterae quae ad ornatum magis Orationis, quâm structuram ejus spectant, à Rhetoricis inquiren­dae sunt.

LIB. IV. DE PROSODIA.

IV. Prosodia. agit de

PROSODIA est quarta pars Grammatices quae rectam vocum pronuntiationem tradit.

Recta pronuntiatio est, quae observat in unaquāque voce Spiritum, Tonum, & Tempus Syllabarum.

Dicendum ergò in Prosodiâ de1. Spiritibus, &Cap. 1.
2. Tono, sive Accentibus.
3. Tempore, sive Quantitate Syllaba­rum, Cap. 2. 3.

Cap. 1. De Spiritibus & Tonis, sive Accentibus.

1. Spiriti­bus. 2. Tonīs.

1. SPiritus est ratio proferendi syllabam cum spiri­tu, estque,

VelAsper, quo asperè profertur syllaba; ut, Ha­mus, homo.
Lenis, quo syllaba leniter profertur; ut, Amo, omnis.

2. Tonus, sive Accentus est ratio pronuntiandi syl­labam, eandem elevando vel deprimendo; ut, Pro­bitátem, vituperáre.

Est autem Accentus triplex,1. Acutus, qui syllabam acuit, sive at­tollit, & notatur virgulâ obliquâ in dextram asscendente (').
2. Gravis, qui syllabam gravat sive de­primit, & notatur virgulâ obliquâ in dextram descendente (`).
3. Circumflexus, qui syllabam longiori morâ effert, pariter attollens cum acuto, & deprimens cum gravi, & si­gnatur notâ ex acuto & gravi confla­tâ ().

Tonorum regulae sunt tres.

1. Monosyllaba dictio, brevis, aut Positione longa, acuitur; ut, Mél, párs; at Naturâ longa Circumfle­ctitur; ut, Spês, flôs.

2. In Dissyllabâ dictione, si prior longa fuerit na­turâ, & posterior brevis, prior Circumflectitur; ut, Lûna, mûsa; in caeteris verò acuitur; ut, Bónus, Dé­us, sólers.

3. Dictio Polysyllaba, si penultimam longam ha­bet, sequente longâ, penultimam acuit; ut, Libértas; sequente verò brevi, circumflectit penultimam; ut, Amâre. Românus.

Sin brevem habet penultimam, acuit antepenul­timam; ut, Dominus, Póntifex.

Caeterae omnes syllabae in Polysyllabis gravantur, etsi non notentur; ut, Celeberrimus.

1 Obs. Composita à Fácio penultimam acuunt; ut, Benefácis, malefácis.

2 Obs. Composita à Fis, fit, ultimam acuunt; ut, Calefit, malefit.

3. Obs. Grammatici circumflexum cum acuto saepe confundunt, quòd ab eo vix prolatione discerni­tur.

Quinque sunt quae Tonorum regulas perturbant, five Tonos mutant.

[Page 275] I. Differentia, cujus caussâ

1. Quaedam dictiones Circumflectuntur in ulti­ma; ut, Ablativus primae Declinationis Musâ, quo differat à Nominativo & Vocativo Musa,. Sic ergô pro caussâ differt ab ergò Conjunctione.

2. Quaedam acuuntur, ut Adverbia plurima, nè videantur esse aliae partes Orationis; viz. Ʋnà, ali­quò, putà, penè, &c. quae in fine sententiarum acuun­tur, in consequentia verò gravantur.

3. Quaedam Antepenultimam suspendunt; ut, Déinde, déorsum, quinimo, intereáloci, nihilóminus, quâ­tenus, &c. cùm non sunt orationes diversae; ut sunt, Intérea lóci, nihilo minus, púbe ténus, &c.

N. B. Accentûs nota nusquam ferè jam apponitur, nisi differentiae caussâ, tunc enim signatur non tan­tùm in ultima, sed etiam in penultima, & antepenul­timâ; ut, óccido, occido.

II. Transpositio, Praepositiones enim postpositae suis casibus gravantur; ut, Transtra pèr & remos. Te pe­nès imperium.

III. Attractio, cùm scil. ultima syllaba praecedentis dictionis attrahit sibi Accentum Encliticae Conjun­ctionis; ut, Lumináque laurúsque Dei.

1 Obs. ubi verò manifesta est Compositio, non va­riatur tonus; ut, itaque, úndique, hiccine.

IV. Concisio, cùm dictiones per Syncopen aut Apoco­pen castrantur, tunc enim tonum retinent integraedictionis; ut, Virgili pro Virgilii, Arpinâs pro Arpi­nâtis. Sic hûc, illûc, pro hûcce, illûcce; & Composi­ta à Dic, duc, fac; ut, Benedic, reduc, benefac.

[Page 277] V. Idioma, sive linguae proprietas. Dictiones enim Graecae si integrae ad Latinos veniant, (i. e. si iisdem planè literis proferantur) servant tonum suum; ut, Metamórphosis, Orthographia.

Sin prorsus Latinae fiunt, Latinum quoque tonum servant; ut, Geórgica, Philosóphia, idólum.

N. B. 1. Si ignoretur proprius peregrinae vocis to­nus, tutissimum fuerit juxta Latinum accentum illam enuntiare.

2. Syllabae communes (i. e. ubi muta cum liquida sequitur vocalem brevem) in prosa oratione corripi­untur; Célebris, Cáthedra; in aliis verò dictionibus producuntur; ut, Ʋnius, illius, ubique.

3. Interrogatio etiam tonum transfert; ut, Sic­cine aïs Parmenó?

Cap. 2. De Tempore, sive Quantitate Primarum & Mediarum Syllabarum.

3. De tem­pore sive quantitate. Primarum. Medinum.

TEmpus sive Quantitas est syllabae pronuntiandae mensura, sive spatium modulandae vocalis, quo scil. moram ejus in pronuntiando metimur.

Secundùm tempus, sive quantitatem Syllaba dici­turBrevis, quae unum habet tempus, si­ve quae celeriter pronuntiatur; ut, Lĕgĕrë, cujus tempus breve sic no­tatur (˘).
Longa, quae duo tempora habet, sive quae spatium duarum brevium exi­git; ut, Aūdīre, cujus tempus lon­gum sic notatur (¯).

[Page 279]

Secundùm or­dinem suum quem habent in dictionibꝰ sylae dicūturPrimae,quaeprimumlocum in dictione quâvis occu­pant.
Mediae,medium
Ʋltimae,ultimum

Primarum syllaba­rum quantitas o­cto modis cogno­scuntur, viz.I. Positione.
II. Vocali ante vocalem.
III. Diphthongo.
IV. Derivatione.
V. Compositione.
VI. Praepositione.
VII. Regulâ.
VIII. Exemplo seu Autoritate.

Mediarum verò peculiaris est cognoscendi mo­dus quem videre licet IX.

I. Juxta Positionem.

1. Vocalis ante duas consonantes, aut duplicem in eadem dictione longa est; ut, Vēntus, āxis, patrī ­zo. Sed Composita à jugum corripiunt; ut, Bĭju­gum.

2. Quòd si consonans priorem dictionem claudat, sequente item à consonante inchoante, vocalis praecedens longa erit; ut,

Majōr sum quām cui possīt fōrtuna nocere.

3. Vocalis brevis in fine dictionis, sequente à du­abus consonantibus inchoante, interdum, sed rariùs producitur; ut,

Occultā spolia, & plures de pace triumphos.

4. Vocalis brevis ante mutam sequente liquidâ, communis redditur; ut,

Et primò volŭcri similis, mox vera volūcris.

Longa verò vocalis non mutatur; ut, Arātrum, simulācrum.

II. Vocalis ante alteram in eadem dictione brevis est; ut, Dĕus, nĭhil.

[Page 281] Sed 1. Genitivi in ius, penultimam habent com­munem; ut, Ʋnius, illius, licèt i in alterĭus semper sit brevis, in alīus semper longa.

2. In quinta declinatione e inter geminum i lon­ga fit; ut, Faciēi.

3. Fi in Fio ubique longa est, nisi sequatur e & r simul; ut,

Omnia jam fīent, fĭeri quae posse negabas.

4. Ohe primam syllabam ancipitem habet; ēheu semper longam.

5. Vocalis ante alteram in Graecis dictionibus subinde longa fit; ut, Dicite Pierides; & in Possessi­vis; ut, Aenēia nutrix.

Sed Graecarum quantitas à Graecis rectiùs addi­scenda est.

6. In peregrinis quantitas est ambigua; ut, Mi­chaël, Abraham.

III. Omnis Diphthongus longa est; ut, Aūrum, Musâ. Syllabae item Contractae; ut, Cōgo, nīl.

Sed prae ante vocalem saepius corripitur; ut, Ver praeit aestatem; rariùs producitur; ut, Domino praeiret Arion. ae in Maeotis est anceps.

IV. Derivata eandem cum Primitivis quantitatem sortiuntur; ut, ămator primâ brevi ab ămo. Excipi­untur tamen quaedam,

1. Deducta à brevibus, quae producuntur, viz.
Vox, vōcis,àVŏco.
Lex, lēgis,Lĕgo.
Rex, rēgis,Rĕgo.
Sēdes,Sĕdeo.
Jūnior,Jŭvenis.
Hūmanus,Hŏmo.
Jūcundus,Jŭvo.
Vōmer,Vŏmo.
Lāterna,Lăteo.
Tēgula,Tēgo.
Mācero,Măcer.
Pēnuria,Pĕnus.

[Page 283]

2. Deducta à longis quae corripiuntur, viz.
Dux, dūcis,àDūco.
Dĭcax,Dīco.
Fĭdes,Fīo.
ărena, ărista,āreo.
Pŏsui,Pōno.
Genui,Gīgno.
Frăgor,àFrāngo.
Frăgilis,
Nŏto, as,Nōtu.
Năto, as,Nātu.
Dĭsertus,Dīssero.
Sŏpor,Sŏpio.

Atque alia nonnulla utriusque generis.

V. Composita simplicium quantitatem sequuntur; ut, Pŏtens, impŏtens. Sōlor, consōlor.

1. Exci­piuntur tamenInnŭba,à Nūbo.Cognĭtum.à Nōtum.
Pronŭba,Agnĭtum.
Dejĕro,à Jūro.Perstĭturusà Stātu­rus.
Pejĕro,Restĭturus.

2. Item Composita à Dīco in dicus; ut, Ma'e­dĭcus.

3. Ambĭtus Nomen corripitur, ambītus Participium producitur.

4. Idem Masculinum producit i, Neutrum verò corripit.

5. In Compositis.

1. Cum Verbis, prior pars vocis in e desinens corripitur; ut, Valĕdico.

2. Cum particulis, bi, tri, tre, du, eaedem corripi­untur; ut, Bĭceps, trĭceps, trĕcenti, dŭcenti.

3. Cum Nominibus, prior pars exiens in i, y, u, corripitur; ut, Tardĭgradus, Polydorus, cornŭpeta, excipe quīvis & pauca alia.

6. Hae voces ultimam syllabam simplicium, quae communis est, producunt, viz. Ʋbīque, ubīlibet, ibī ­dem, quandōque, quandōcunque, sed do in quandŏquidem corripitur.

VI. Ex Praepositinibus.

1. A, de, è, se, prae, & quae in a desinunt, ubique producuntur, nisi vocali sequente; ut, Ʋnda dĕhiscens.

2. Pro Latina longa est, praeterquam in istis, [Page 285] Prŏcella, prŏfugus, prŏtervus, prŏnepos, prŏneptis, prŏfa­nus, prŏfiteor, prōfundus, prŏficiscor, prŏfari, prŏparo, prŏ­fugio, profectò, prŏpello, prŏpulso. Sed

1.Propago, gas, &pro habent ancipitem.
Propago, gĭnis,

2. Pro Graeca corripitur; ut, Prŏpheta, prŏlogus, Prŏmetheus, &c. Sed in propino anceps est.

3. Di producitur, nisi in dĭrimo, & dĭsertus.

4. Reliquae Praepositiones, si positio sinat, corripi­untur; nam re in refert pro utile est, à nomine res est, ideóque producitur.

VII. Regula est duplex1. De Praeteritis & Supinis dissyl­labis.
2. De primam Praeteriti geminan­tibus.

1. Omne Praeteritum & Supinum dissyllabum pri­orem habet longam; ut, Lēgi, ēmi, mōtum, lātum. Excipiuntur tamen,

1. Sex Praeterita, Fĭdi, bĭbi, dĕdi, scĭdi, tŭli, steti.

2. Novem supina, Dătum, sătum, cĭtum (à cieo) ĭtum, lĭtum, quĭtum, sĭtum, rătum, rŭtum.

2. Primam Praeteriti geminantia, primam itidem brevem habent; ut, Pĕpendi, mŏmordi, spŏspondi.

VIII. Quarum syllabarum quantitas sub praedictas rationes non cadit, à Poētarum usu Exemplo atque Autoritate petenda est; atque haec ratio est omnium certissima & generalissima,

1. Quia regula omnis autoritate veterum ni­titur.

2. Quia multarum syllabarum modulus non nisi exemplo cognoscitur.

1. Haec primam syllabam habent communem; [Page 287] viz. Britannus, Bithynus, Cacus, Cosyra, Crathys, Creti­cus, Curetes, Fidene, Gradivus, Hinulus, Hymen, Italus, liquor, liquidus, Lycas, Orion, Pachinus, palatium, Pelion, Pyrene, rudo, Sychaeus, Sycanius, cum quibusdam aliis.

3. Haec verò mediam; Batavus, connubium, Ficedu­la, malea, Pharsalia, Sidonius, &c.

IX. Mediae syllabae partim eâdem ratione quâ primae, partim etiam 1. ex incrementis Genitivi, atque 2. Conju­gationis Analogiâ cognofci possunt.

1. Incrementum Genitivi est quando Nomen plures habet syllabas in Genitivo singulari, quàm in Nomi­nativo; juxta hoc, penultima Nominum crescenti­um

1. Acutè, longa est.

2. Graviter, brevis est.

2. Analogia Conjugationis est quando verba se­quuntur communem regulam conjugandi; & juxta hanc,

aindexPrimaeConjugationislongaest.
eSecundaelonga
eTertiaebrevis
iQuartaelonga

Sed in Do & ejus Compositis, quando primae suut Conjugationis, a brevis est; ut, Dămus, circundă­mus, dăbis circundăbis, dăre circundăre.

Syllaba rimus & ritis in Praeterito modi Subjuncti­vi sunt breves; ut, Amaverĭmus, amaverĭtis; in Futu­ro verò longae; ut, Amaverīmus, amaverītis.

Adjectiva in inus Latina penultimam producunt; ut, Clandestīnus, mediastīnus, &c. Praeter haec sequen­tia, diutĭnus, crastĭnus, pristĭnus, perendĭnus, hórnotĭnus, serotĭnus, oleagĭnus, fagĭnus, cedrĭnus, carbasĭnus, & re­liqua materialia, sive à metallorum nominibus for­mata in inus; ut, Chrystallĭnus myrrhĭnus, &c. à Grae­cis deducta.

Cap. 3. De Ultimarum Syllabarum quantitate.

Et ultima­rum sylla­barum.

ULtimae syllabae numerantur juxta ordinem li­terarum finalium, sic,

Finita inAproducuntur; ut, amā, contrā, ergā.
 Excipe,
 1. Pută, ită, quiă, ejă.
 2. Item omnes casus in a, praeter vocati­vos in a, à Graecis in as, ut, ô Aeneā, & Abla­tivum primae declinationis; ut, Musā.
 3. Numeralia in ginta, quae a habent com­munem; ut, Triginta, quadraginta.
Bbrevia sunt, ut, ăb.
 Excipe,
 1. Hebraea; ut, Jacōb.
Cproducuntur; ut, āc, sīc, & hīc Adverbium.
 Excipe,
 1. Lāc, nĕc, donĕc, quae contrahuntur.
 2. Fac, & Pronomen hic sunt communia, item & ejus Neutrum hoc modò non sit Ab­lativi casûs.
Dbrevia sunt; ut, ăd.
 1. Excipe Hebraea; ut, Davīd.
Ebrevia sunt; ut, Marĕ, penĕ, legĕ, scribĕ.
 Excipe,
 1. Voces Quintae Inflectionis in e; ut, Fidē, diē, rē, cum Adverbiis indè enatis; ut, Ho­diē, quarē.
 2. Fame, quae nunc Tertiae Inflectionis bre­vis, olim quintae longa fuit.
 3. Secundae personae singulares Imperati­vorum Activorum secundae Conjugationis; ut, Docē, movē, manē.
 Sed e in Cave, vide, salve, & vale quando­que etiam corripitur.
 4. Monosyllaba in e; ut, mē, tē, cē, praeter quĕ, nĕ, vĕ, Enclyticas Conjunctiones.
 5. Adverbia in e, ab Adjectivis deducta; ut, doctē, valdē, item fermē, & ferē. Benĕ ta­men & malĕ corripiuntur.
 6. Quae à Graecis per n scribuntur; ut, An­chisē, cetē, tempē.
Ilonga sunt; ut, Dominī, amarī.
 Excipe
 1. Mihi, tibi, sibi, ubi, ibi, uti pro ut, & cui dissyllabum, quae sunt communia.
 2. Nisĭ, & quasĭ quae corripiuntur, ut & Da­tivi & Vocativi Graecorum quorum Geniti­vus in os breve exit; ut, Palladĭ, Daphnĭ.
Lcorripiuntur; ut, Animăl, mĕl.
 Excipe
 1. Sāl, & Sōl.
 2. Hebraea, quae Graecè scribuntur per vo­calem longam; ut, Michaēl.
Nproducuntur; ut Paeān, Hymēn, nōn.
 Excipe
 1. Forsăn, forsităn, ăn, tamĕn, attamĕn, verun­tamĕn.
 2. Voces per Apocopen castratas; ut, Mén', vidén'.
 3. In cum Compositis; ut, Exĭn, subĭn, &c.
 4. Nomina in en, quorum Genitivus ĭnis correptum habet; ut, Carmĕn, pectĕn, tibicĕn.
 5. Graeca in on per o parvum; ut, Iliŏu, Peliŏn, Caucasŏn.
 6. Graeca in in, yn, & an, quorum Nomina­tivus est brevis; ut, Alexĭn, Ityn, Maiăn.
OCommunia sunt; ut, Amo, virgo, porrò, docendo.
 Excipe,
 1. Obliquos in o, qui semper producun­tur; ut, Dominō, servō.
 2. Adverbia ab Adjectivis deducta; ut, Tan­tō, falsō, &c. Sed sedulō, crebrō, mutuō, sunt communia, tutiùs producenda.
 3. Monosyllaba in o produ cuntur; ut, dō, stō, item ergō pro caussâ.
 4. Ambo, duo, ego, homo, cito, modò cum com­positis vix leguntur producta.
 5. Graeca per [...] producuntur; ut, Sapphō, nisi descendant à Nominativis in [...] quibus v adimitur; ut, Leo, Plato, quae plerunque corripiuntur.
RCorripiuntur; ut, Caesăr, torcúlăr, pĕr, diciĕr.
 Excipe,
 1. Fār, lār, năr, vĕr, fur, cūr, & pār, cum compositis. Cor semel apud Ovidium produ­citur.
 2. Graeca in n [...] er; ut, Aēr, cratēr, except patĕr & matĕr.
Spares cum numero vocalium terminationes ha­bent.
asproducuntur; ut, Amās, musās.
 Except,
 1. Graeca quorum Genitivus singularis in dos exit; ut, Archăs, Pallăs.
 2. Accusativos plurales nominum crescen­tium; ut, Heroăs, Phyllidăs.
esLonga sunt; ut, Anchisēs, sedēs, docēs.
 Excipe
 1. Nomina in es tertiae Decliationis gravi­ter crescentia; ut, milĕs, divĕs. Sed ex his, Cerēs, abiēs, ariēs, pariēs, & pēs cum Composi­tis longa sunt.
 2. Es quoque à sum unà cum Compositis, potĕs, adĕs, prodĕs, obĕs, & penĕs Praepositio cor­ripiuntur.
 3. Item Neutra singularia: & Nominativi plurales Graecorum in es breve non eis desi­nentia; ut, Cacoethĕs, Cyclopĭs.
isbrevia sunt; ut, Parĭs, panĭs, tristĭs.
 Excipe
 1. Obliquos Plurales in is, ut, Musïs, do minīs, & queīs pro quibus.
 2. Producentia penultimam Genitivi cre­scentis; ut, Samnīs, nitis.
 3. Quae fiunt in is ab eis Diphthongo; ut, Omnīs, Simoīs.
 4. Monosyllaba omnia; ut, Vīs, lis, praeter ĭs, bĭs, & quĭs.
 5. Velīs, cum Compositis, malīs, nolīs, item ausīs, faxīs.
 6. Secundas personas singulares Indicati­vi praesentis quartae Conjugationis; ut, Au­dīs, dormīs.
 7. Secundas personas Futuri Subjunctivi, quae sunt communes; ut, dederis, amaveris.
osproducuntur; ut, Herōs, honōs, dominōs.
 Excipe
 1. Compŏs, impŏs, & ŏs ossis.
 2. Graeca per o parvum; ut, Delŏs, Palladŏs.
uscorripiuntur; ut, famulŭs, tempŭs.
 Excipe,
 1. Nominativos acutè crescentium; ut, Vir­tūs, salūs.
 2. Genitivos singulares, Nominativos, Vo­cativos, & Accusativos plurales Quartae De­clinationis; ut, hujus manūs, hae manūs, has manūs, ô manūs.
 3. Monosyllaba in us, ut, pūs, crūs.
 4. Quae à Graecis scribuntur per [...]; ut, Panthūs, cliūs.
 Atque piis cunctis venerandum nomen Iësūs.
uproducuntur; ut, Manū, genū.
y& ys corripiuntur; ut, Moly, Tiphys.
 Ultima cujusque versûs syllaba habetur communis.

Appendix Grammatices.

Appendix Grammati­ces, agit De Ordine

HActenus de vocum Elementis, Accidentibus, Constru­ctione & Pronuntiatione, quae quidem, quatuor, quas j am diximus, Partes Grammaticae, tanquam propria & partialia singularum subjecta, constituunt, & ipsam orationem jux'a Regulas Grammatices componen­dam, (tanquam subjectum hujus Artis, ut Logici dicunt, adaqua­tum, totale & principale) conspiciunt.

Nunc verò de Croine vocum pauca subjiciemus. Nam & hoc etiam ad finem Grammatici aliquo modo conducit, ut quo or­dine voces sint collocandae, ad orationem meliùs eloquendam, aut scribendam intelligat.

Cap. 1. De Ordine vocum Grammatico.

Dictionum sive vocum, 1. Gram­matico. 2. Oratorio.

ORdo dictionum est earundem inter se collocatio, ità ut alia necessariò praecedat, alia sequatur.

Est autem Ordo tri­plex,1. Gramma­ticus,quem obser­vantGramma­ticiin Oratione cōponendâ.
2. Oratorius,Oratores
3. Poëticus,Poëtoe

1. Ordo Grammaticus sive naturalis est quando vo­ces in oratione juxta naturam suam collocantur, nullo observato sonorum numero.

Atque hic ordo è sermone vernaculo praecipuè cognoscitur.

Secundùm hunc ordinem composita oratio Trans­latio dicitur.

[Page 299] In Translatione verò sic collocentur voces.

1. Vocativus, vocandi particulae, & quae ab illis pendent.

2. Nominativus, & quae ab eo pendent.

3. Verbum principale, & quae ab eo pendent, viz.

1. Infinitum. 2. Casus Verbi, & quae ab illis pendent. Hic tamen obser vandum,

1. Adverbium Verbo subjungitur.

2. Substantivum & Adjectivum,

Item Praepositio & suns casus conjungi debent.

3. Interrogativa, Relativa, Indefinita, & Partitiva, Adverbi a quaedam, & Conjunctiones praecedunt ali­as voces.

4. Impersonale quandoque incipit orationem.

5. Accusativus ante verbum Impersonale exponi debet per quod vel ut.

6. Si quid defuerit suppleri debet.

Exemplum Ordinis Grammatici.

Scipio & Laeli, artes exercitationésque virtutum sunt omnino arma aptissima senectutis; quae cultae afferunt fructus mirificos in aetate omni, cùm vixeris multùm diúque non solùm quia deserunt nunquam, nè quidem in tempore extremo aetatis, quanquam id est maximum; verùm etiam quia conscientia vitae actae bene, recordatióque benefactorum multorum est jucundistima.

Cap. 2. De Ordine vocum Oratorio.

ORdo Oratorius est quando voces in oratione juxta Artem Oratoriam collocantur, observatis qui­dem certis, sed omninò dissimilibus sonorum nume­ris.

Juxta hunc ordinem compositae voces prosam sive solutam orationem (quam & [...] Orationem dicimus) constituunt.

[Page 300] In oratione componendâ.

1. Obliquus in principio, Nominativus in medio, & Verbum in in fine collocetur.

2. Adjectivum praecedere, Substantivum vero se­qui debet.

3. Inter Adjectivum & Substantivum aliae voces interseruntur.

4. Adverbia, Praepositionésque cum suo casu ve­nustiùs ante Verbum vel Participium suum collo­cantur.

5. In prosâ versum fugito: citare tamen potes.

6. Principium vel exitum carminis nec principi­um nec exitum prosae facito.

7. Principii cura sit major, medii penè nulla, clau­sulae verò maxima.

1. Clausula varianda est maximé.

9. Artificium numeri nunquam longiùs senis à fine syllabis observetur

10. Ex longis omnibus clausula rarior est, rarissi­ma ex omnibus brevibus, at ex temperatione longa­rum & brevium frequentior.

11. Vocalium in diversis vocibus concursus sit quàm rarissimus.

Exemplum Ordinis Oratorii.

Aptissima omnino sunt, Scipio & Laeli, arma senectu­tis artes exercitation esque virtutum; quae in omni aetate cultae, cùm multum diúque vixeris, mirificos afferunt fructus; non solùm quia nunquam dese­runt, nè in extremo quidem tempore aetatis quan­quam id maximum est; verùm etiam quia conscien­tia bene actae vitae, multorúmque bene factorum re­cordatio, jucundissima est.

N. B. Neque tamen haec praecepta sunt ita mordi­cus tenenda, quin ut puer ex doctissimorum obser­vatione potiora iis apprehendat & in compon enda Oratione proprias aures & pulmones consulat.

Cap. 3. De Ordine vocum Poëtico.

3: Poētico. Juxta quem Carmen constitui­tur. In quo dig­noscendisunt.

ORdo Poëticus est quando voces in oratione juxta Artem Poëticam collocantur, observatis qui­dem & certis & similibus sonorum numeris.

Juxta hunc ordinem constricta Oratio Carmen sive Poëma dicitur.

Carmen1. Pro Diversitate1. Versûs (qui Grae­cis Colon sive mem­brum di­citur), usitatè dividitur in1. Monocólon, quod con­stat unius generis me­tro.
 2. Dicólon, ubi duo sunt genera versuum.
 3. Tricólon, ubi triplex est metrum.
 4. Polycólon, in quo plura metri genera concur­runt.
2. Strophae, sive reditio­nis ad idē versuū genꝰufitatè dividitur in1. Distro­phon,cùm postseeun­dumversum ad primi ge­neris versū redimus.
2. Tristro­phon,terti­um
3. Tetra­strophon,quar­tum
4. Penta­strophon,quin­tum
2. Pro RationeNumeri versu­um,usitatè diciturHemisti­chonquod continetdimidium versûs.
Distichon,duos ver­sus.
Tetrasti­chon,quatuor versus.
Hexasti­chon,sex ver­sus.
Eteosti­chon,annorum numerū.
Hemerosti­chon,dierum numerū.
Acrostichis, cujus initiales, finales, aut mediae literae collectae certum sensum praebent.
MateriaeComoedia, Tragoedia, Bu­colica, Elegia, Ode, Hy­mnus, Georgica, Satyra, Epigramma, Epitaphium, Epithalamium, Genethli­acum, &c.

In Carmine verò ritè constituendo summa cura ad­hibenda est ad dignoscendos pedes, & diversa versu­um genera. Ex pedibus enim conjunctis fiunt Versus, & ex Versibus Carmen.

Cap. 4. De Pede, & ejus generibus.

[...]: Pes. 1, Simpli­ces. 2. Compo­siti.

PES est duarum syllabarum pluriúmve consti­tutio, ex certâ temporum sive quantitatum ob­servatione.

Pes est1. Simplex, atque is1. Dissyllabus, qui constat ex duabus syllabis.
aut2. Trissyllabus, qui constat ex tribus syllabis.
2. Compositus, qui constat ex simplicibus pedibus conjunctis.
Dissyllabi pedes sunt quatuorSpondaeus,qui constat exduabus longis. a
Pyrrbychius,duabus brevibus. b
Trochaeus,priore longâ, & po­steriore brevi. c
Iambus,priore brevi, & po­steriore longâ. d

ut, a Virtūs. b Dĕŭs. c ānnŭs. d ămāns

Trissyllabi sunt octo,Molossus,qui constat extribus longis. e
Tribrachus,tribus brevibus. f
Dactylus,primâ longâ, reliquis dua­bus brevibus. g
Anapastus,primis duabus brevibus, po­stremâ longâ. h
Bacchius,primâ brevi, rel iquis dua­bus longis. i
Antibacchius,primis duabus longis, po­stremâ brevi. k
Amphimacer,primâ longâ, mediâ brevi, ultimâ longâ. l
Amphibrachus,primâ brevi, mediâ longâ, ultimâ brevi. m

ut, e Māgnātēs. f Dŏmĭnŭs. g Scrībĕrĕ. h pĭĕtās. i Hŏnēstās. k Aūdirĕ. l Chārïtās. m Vĕnirë.

Pedes compositi, potiùs pedum conjunctiones quàm pedes à quibusdam vocantur, atque ab aliis omittun­tur, tanquam non multùm ad institutum Gramma­tici pertineant. Hos tamen tetrasyllabos nihilomi­nus adjecimus, propter aliquem eorum usum in Car­minibus illis quae ab his nomen acceperunt, viz. Cho­riambicum, Ionicum, &c.

Pedes igitur compositi praecipui sunt 18.Proceleusinaticus,qui constat exduobus Pyrrhichiis. a
Dispondaeus,duobus Spondaeis. b
Choriambus,trochaeo & Iambo. c
Antispastus,Iambo & Trochaeo. d
Diambus,duobus Iambis. e
Dichoraeus,duobus Trochaeis. f
Ionicus à majore,Spondaeo & Pyrrhichio. g
Ionicus à minore,Pyrrhichio & Spondaeo. h
Epitritus primus,Iambo & Spondaeo. i
Epitritus secundus,Trochaeo & Spondaeo. k
Epitritus tertius,Spondaeo & Iambo. l
Epitritus quartus,Spondaeo & Trochaeo. m
Paeon primus,Trochaeo & Pyrrhichio. n
Paeon secundus,Iambo & Pyrrhichio. o
Paeon tertius,Pyrrhichio & Trochaeo. p
Paeon quartus,Pyrrhichio & Iambo. q

ut, a Hŏmĭnĭbŭs. b Cōnclūdēntēs. c Hīstŏrĭae. d A­lēxāndĕr. e Sĕvērĭtās. f Cōmprŏbārĕ. g Cāntābĭmŭs. h Vĕnĕrāntēs. i Sălūtāntēs. k Cōnoĭtātī. l Cōmmū ­nĭcānt. m īncāntārĕ. n cōnfĭcĕrĕ. o Rĕsōlvĕrĕ. p Sŏ­cĭārĕ. q Cĕlĕrĭtās.

Ex pedibus au tem Iambus, & Trochaeus, Spondaeus & Dactylus, Anapaestus, & Tribrachus usitatissimi sunt.

Cap. 5. De Versuum variis generibus.

2 Versus, & eorun­dem 1. Scansio. Cui acci­dunt, 1. Caesura. 2 Synalae­pha. 3. Ecthlip­fis. 4 Synaeresis 5. Diaeresis. 5. Systole. 7. Diastole. 2. Deposi­tio. Secundùm quam dici­tur, 1. Acatale­cticus:. 2. Catale­cticus. 3. Brachy­catalecticus. 4. Hyper­catalecticus. 3. Metrum. Secundùm quod est, 1. Adoni­cus. 2. Archilo­chius dacty­licus. 3. Alcma­nius: 4. Glyconi­cus. 5. Pherecra­tius. 6. Aesclepi­adaeus. 7. Sapphi­cus. 8. Phaleuci­us. 9. Elegia­cus. 10. Heroi­cus. 11. Iambi­cus. Archilochi­us Hepta­meter.

VErsus est oratio justo atque legitimo pedum nu­mero constricta.

Versum composituro discendum est, pedibus ipsum ritè metiri, (sive in suos pedes distinguere) quam Scansionem sive Dimensionem vocant; ut,

Pārvĕ nĕc | īnvĭdĕ|ō sĭnĕ | mē lĭbĕr|ībĭs ĭn|ūrbēm.

Hēi mĭhĭ | quōd dŏmĭ|nō | nōn lĭcĕt | īrĕ tŭ|o.|

[Page 305] Scansioni accidunt hae Figurae.

1. Caesura, quum ità secatur vox ut posterior ejus pars initium sit pedis sequentis; ut;

Sīc canĭ|būs catŭ|lōs sĭmĭ|lēs sīc | mātrĭbŭs | hoedōs.

Species ejus sunt quatuor,

1. Triemimeris,cùm postprimumpedem relin­quitur syl­laba; ut,
2. Penthemimeris,secundum
3. Hepthemimeristertium
4. Eneemimeris,quartum

Illĕ lă|tūs1 nĭvĕ|ūm2 mōl|lī 3 fūl|tūs4 hyă|cīnthō.

Ob Caesuram, syllaba brevis in fine dictionis ali­quando extenditur

Post1umpedem, utPēctŏrĭ|lŭs ĭnhĭ|āns spī|rāntĭā cōnsŭlĭt | ēxtā,
2umOmnĭă | vīncīt ă|mōr & | nōs cēdāmŭs ă|mōrĭ.
3umOstēn|tāns ār|tēm părĭ | tēr ār|cūmquĕ sŏ|nāntĕ.
4umIllĕ lā|tūs nĭuĕ|ūm mŏl|lī fūl|tūs hyăcĭntho.

N. B. Invenustus est versus qui Caesurâ caret; ut,

Aūrĕă | cārmĭna I|ūlī | scrībīs | māxĭmĕ | vātūm.

Ʋrbĕm | fōrtēm | nūpēr|cepit | fōrtĭŏr | hōstĭs.|

2. Synalaepha est elisio quaedam vocalis ante alteram in diversis dictionibus; ut,

Sēră nĭ|mīs vī|t' est | crāstĭnă | viv' hŏdĭlē.

At heu, ô, & io nunquam intercipiuntur; ut,

At bĭs ĭ|ŏ Arĕ|thūsā, ī|ō Arĕ|thūsā vŏcāvīt. Interdum etiam Synalaepha negligitur; ut,

Et sūc|cūs pĕcŏ|rī ēt | lāc sūb|dūcĭtŭr | āgnīs.

Tēr sūnt cōnā|tī īm|pōnĕrē | Pē ĭŏ | ossām.

Aliquando fit in fine versûs; ut,

Omn [...]ăă | Mērcūrĭ|ō sĭmĭlīs vō|cēmqŭe cŏlŏrēn | suē Et crīnēs flāvōs.

3. Ecthlipsis est quoties m cum suâ vocali peri­mitur proximâ dictione à vocali exorsâ; ut,

Mōnstr', hōr|rēnd', īn|fōrm', īn|gēns cūī | lūmĕn ā|dēmt' Olim elidebatur S; ut,

Arbŏrĭ|būs vĕtĕ|rēs dē|cīdĕrĕ | fālcĭbŭs | rāmōs.

[Page 306] 4. Synaeresis est duarum syllabarum in unam con­tractio; ut,

Sēu lēn|tō fŭĕ|rīnt * āl|vārĭă | vīmĭnĕ | tēxtă.

* pro alvearia.

Fit autem frequentiùs in his dictionibus, Dii, Diis, iidem, iisdem, deinde, deinceps, semianimis, semihomo, se­miustus, deest, deero, deerit, anteambulo, anteit, cui, & Genitivis nominum in eus; ut, Ʋlisseus, Ʋlissei, cum multis aliis.

5. Diaeresis, est ubi ex unâ syllabâ dissectâ fiunt duae; ut,

Dēbŭĕrānt fūsōs ēvŏlüīssĕsŭōs. pro evolvisse.

6. Systole est quae longam syllabam corripit; ut, Mātrī lōngă dĕcēm tŭlĕrūnt fāstīdĭă mēnsēs.

7, Diastole est quae brevem syllabam producit; ut, In quēm rēcĭdĭmūs quīcquīd mōrtālē crĕāmur.

Atque haec si reperitur in ultima dictionis syllabâ Caesura frequentiùs dicitur; ut,

Omnĭă | vīncĭt ă|mōr ēt | nōs cē|dāmŭs ă|mōrī.

Versuum genera sunt varia pro ratione1. Depositionis, &
2. Metri.

1. Depositio est terminatio scansionis, ex quâ ver­sûs abundantiam, plenitudinem, aut defectum cogno­scimus.

Secundùm hanc versus dicitur,

1. Acatalecticus, sive perfectus, cui nihil aut super­est aut deest; ut,

Mūsae | Jŏvīs | sūnt fī|lĭae.

2. Catalecticus, sive semimutilus, cui in fine deest syllaba; ut,

Mūsae | Jŏvēm | cănē|bānt.

3. Brachycatalecticus, sive mutilus, cui in fine pes deest; ut,

Mūsae | Jŏvīs|gnatae|—.

[Page 307] 4. Hypercatalecticus, sive exuberans, In quo una, aut duae syllabae supersunt, ut;

Mūsae | sŏrō|rēs sūnt Mĭnēr vae.

Mūsae | sŏrō|rēs Pāl|lădīs lugent.

2. Metrum est legitimus pedum numerus, quo ver­sum metimur.

Quoad Metrum versus dicitur.

1. Dimeter,qui constat pedibusduobus éstque1, Adonius, sive Adonicus, qui constat ex dactylo & spondaeo; ut,
Gāudĭă | pēllē.
Pēlle tĭ|mōrēm.
2. Archilochius dactylicus qui constat ex duobus dactylis, & syllabâ; ut,
Dīscĭtĕ | jūstĭtĭ|am.
2. Trimeter,tribus, éstque3. Alcmanius, qui constat ex tribus da­ctylis & syllabâ; ut,
Dīscĭtĕ | jūstïtĭ|ām mŏnĭ|tī.
4. Glyconicus, qui constat è spondaeo & duobus dactylis; ut,
Tāndēm | rēgĭă | nōbĭlĭs.
5. Pherecratius, qui constat è spondaeo, dactylo & spondaeo; ut,
Nīgrīs | aequŏră | vēntīs.
Hic versus aliquando pro priori spondaeo habet trochaeum; ut,
Prōdĕ|ās nŏvă | nūpta.
Aliquando Anapaestum; ut,
Sĭmĭlī | sūrgĭt ăb | ŏrtū.
3. Tetrameterquatuor, éstque6. Aesclepiadaeus, qui constat ex spondaeo, dactylo, & syllabâ lon­gâ, & duobus deinde dactylis; ut,
Maecē|nās ătă | vīs | edïtĕ | rëgĭbŭs.
4. Pentameter,quinque, èstque7. Sapphicus, qui constat ex trochaeo, spondaeo, & duobus demum trochaeis, ut, Jām să|tīs tēr|rīs nĭvĭs | ātquĕ|dīrae. [Page 308] Post tres versus Sapphicos, Adoni­cus addi solet.
8. Phaleucius, qui constat ex Spondaeo, dactylo, & tribus tandem trochaeis; ut, Quōquō | diffŭgĭ|ās pă|vēns Mă|bili. Nostrum | non pote|ris la|tere | nasum.
9. Elegiacus, qui constat dactylo vel spondaeo, cum syllabâ longâ; & du­obus tandem omnino dactylis, cum syllabâ item longâ; ut, (amor. Rēs ēst | sōllĭcĭ | tīplēnă tĭ | mōris Hēimĭhĭ | quōd dŏmĭ | nŏ | nōn lĭcĕt | īrĕtūo
5. Hexameter.sex, èstque10. Heroïcus, qui constat quatuor pri­mis locis è spondaeo veldactylo, quin­to dactylo, & sexto spondaeo; ut, Tytïrĕ | tū pātŭ|lae rĕcŭ|bāns sūb | tēgmĭ­nĕ fāgī Sylvē strēm tĕnŭ|ī Mū|sām mĕdĭtārĭs ă|vēnā. Reperitur etiam spondaeus aliquando in quinto loco; ut, Chāră Dĕ|ūm sŏbŏ|lēs mā gnī Jŏvĭs | īncrē|mēntūm. Est & Heroïcus Tetrameter qui con­stat ex quatuor postremis Hexame­tri pedibus; ut, Aūt Ephĕ|sūm bĭmă|rīs vĕ Cŏ|rīnthī.
11. Iambicus, qui constat è pedibus Iambicis; ut, Sŭīs | ĕt īp|să Rō|mă vī|rĭbūs | rŭīt.
Est autem hic versus1. Purus, sive Legitimus, qui con­stat è solis Iambis; ut, Phăsē|lŭs īl|lĕ, quēm | vĭdē|tĭs hōs­pĭtēs;
2. Impurus, qui aliquot in locis re­cipit pedem diversum Iambo; ut, Jūs ēst | ĭn ār|mīs, ōp|prĭmīt | lēgēs tĭmŏr.
3. Scazon, sive Choliambus, i. e. claudicans Iambus, qui in sexto lo­co Spondaeum, & in quinto Iam­bum retinet; ut, Nēc fōn|tĕ lā|bră prō|lŭi | Cäbāl|līnō.
N. B. Recipit Iambicus interdum (ob maiorem gravitatem exprimendam) in locis imparibus (i. e. primo, tertio, & quinto) pro Iambo tribrachum, spondaeum, dactylum, anapaestum; atque in locis paribus (i. e. secundo & quarto) quandoque tribrachum, spondaeum rariùs, ultimum verò lo­cum rarò mutat; & saltem binos pedes Iambos perpetuò sibi servat.
Hic versus etiam diducitur in duo genera usitatiora1. Dimetrum, sive tetrametrum, qui constat ex quatuor pedi­bus quémque metimur
 velPer dipodiam, i. e. geminū pedem more Graeco; ut, O cār|mĭnūm | dūlcēs | nōtae.
Per monopodiam, i. e. sin­gulos pedes more Lati­no; ut, O cār|mĭnūm | dūlcēs | nōtae.
2. Trimetrum sive senarium, qui senis constat pedibus, quém­que metimur,
VelPer dipodiam; ut, Qūi nōs dāmnānt | sūnt hīstrĭ­ōnēs māxĭmī.
Per monopodiam; ut, Qūi nōs | dāmnānt | sūnt hī|strĭ­ō|nēs māxĭmī.
6. Heptameter,septem, est (que)12. Archilochius Heptameter, qui con­stat quatuor primis pedibus Heroïcis & tribus tandem trochaeis; ut, Sōlvĭtŭr | ācrĭs hy|ēms grā|tā vĭcĕ | vē ­rĭs|ēt Făvōnĭ:

Plura qui quaerit, Autores qui de Arte Poëtica fu­siùs scripserunt, otiosior consulat.

Et discas oportet, & quod didicisti agendo confirmes, Sen. Epist.

Doctissimorum enim virorum usus pluris faciendus, quàm omnes omnium Grammaticorum Canones. Danesius.

Artifices, solus, qui facit, usus erit. Ovid.

A Synopsis or short view of the Latine GRAMMAR.

The Latine Grammar teacheth the Art or Skill ro write or speak Latine aright: It is divided into four parts:
  • I. Orthographie, which teacheth how to spell words, Lib. 1. It treateth—
    • 1. Of Letters. Chap. 1.
    • 2. Of Syllables. Chap. 2.
    • 3. Of Right Utterance. Chap. 3.
    • 4. Of Points in Sentences. Chap. 4.
  • II. Etymologie, which treateth of the Eight parts of speech, & their Accidents, Li. 11.
    • 1. In general, Chap. 1.
    • 2. In particular,
      • 1. Of a Noun, and
        • 1. its proper Accidents, Chap. 2. which are
          • 1. Case, Chap. 3.
          • 2. Gender, Chap. 4. the Rules to know which are—
            • 1. General,
              • 1. Of Sub­stan­tives
                • 1. Proper, Chap. 5.
                • 2. Commō, Chap. 6.
              • 2. Of Adjectives, Chap. 10.
            • 2. Special, Of Nouns
              • not increa­sing, Ch. 7.
              • increasing
                • Long, Ch. 8.
                • Short, Ch. 9.
          • 3. Declension
            • the first, Chap. 11.
            • the second, Chap. 12.
            • the third, Chap. 13.
            • the fourth, Chap. 14.
            • the fifth, Chap. 15.
            • To which belong the manner of de­clining Adjectives, Chap. 16.
          • 4. Comparison, Chap. 17. To these be­long the Rules of Heteroclits, which are
            • Variant, Chap. 18.
            • Deficient in—
              • Case, Chap. 19.
              • Number Chap. 20.
            • Redundant, Chap. 21.
        • 2. its Kindes, Chap. 22.
      • 2. Of a Pronoun, Chap. 23.
      • 3. Of a Verb, and its
        • Accidents, Chap. 24.
        • Form of the Conjugation
          • first, Chap. 27.
          • second. Chap. 28.
          • third. Chap. 29.
          • fourth. Chap. 30.
      • [Page]Hitherto belong 1. The Rules to know
        • 1. The Pre­terperfect Tenses Of Verbs in O
          • 1. Regular
            • Simple, chap. 31.
            • Compound, c. 32.
            • Simple, chap. 33.
            • Compound, and the Preterperfect Tens of Verbs in or, ch. 34.
        • 2. The Su­pines of Verbs in O
          • 1. Regular
            • Simple, chap. 31.
            • Compound, c. 32.
            • Simple, chap. 33.
            • Compound, and the Preterperfect Tens of Verbs in or, ch. 34.
          • 2. Irregular, Chap. 35.
          • 3. Defective, Chap. 36.
        • 2. The Forming the Verb Sum, Chap. 37.
        • 3. Impersonals and Derivatives, Chap. 38.
      • 4. Of a Participle, Chap. 39.
      • 5. Of an Adverb, Chap. 40.
      • 6. Of a Conjunction, Chap. 41.
      • 7. Of a Preposition, Chap. 42.
      • 8. Of an Interjection, Chap. 43.
  • III. Syntaxe, which teach­eth the due joyning words toge­ther, Lib. III. by way of
    • 1. Concordance, Cha. 1. contei­ning the Rule of the
      • first Concord. §. 1.
      • second Concord §. 2.
      • third Concord §. 3.
      • Case of the Relative, §. 4.
      • Question and Answer, §. 5.
    • 2. Of Government
      • 1. Of Nouns, Chap. 2. with a
        • Gen. Case. 6.
        • Dat. Case. 7.
        • Acc. Case. 8.
        • Abl. Case. 9.
      • 2. Of Pronouns, Chap. 3.
      • 3. Of Verbs, Chap. 4. with a
        • Nom. Case. 10.
        • Gen. Case. 11.
        • Dat. Case. 12.
        • Acc. Case. 13.
        • Abl. Case. 14.
      • To which al­so belong the Rules of
        • Verbs having divers Con­structions. § 15.
        • the Infinitive Mood §. 16.
        • the Gerunds. §. 17.
        • Supines. §. 18.
        • Time. §. 19.
        • Space. §. 20.
        • Place. §. 21.
        • Impersonals. §. 22.
    • [Page]4. Of Participles. Chap. 5.
    • 5. Of Adverbs, Chap. 6. with
      • Cases. §. 1.
      • Moods. §. 2.
    • 6. Of Conjunctions, Chap. 7. which
      • Couple Words. §. 1.
      • Govern Moods. §. 2.
    • 7. Of Prepositions. Chap. 8.
    • 8. Of Interjections. Chap. 9.
  • To Etymologie belong Figures
    • Of a Word. Chap. 10.
    • Of Construction. Chap. 11.
  • To Syntaxis belong Figures
    • Of a Word. Chap. 10.
    • Of Construction. Chap. 11.
  • IIII. Prosodie, which teacheth the right Pronuntiation of Words, Lib. IIII. by observing their
    • Spirits and Tones. Chap. 1.
    • Quantitie of Syllables
      • First & Middle, Chap. 2:
      • Last. Chap. 3.

To Grammar after a man­ner perteineth that which is said concerning the Order of Words, which is1. Grammatical, Cap. 1. 
2. Rhetorical, Cap. 2. 
3. Poëtical, Cap. 3. touch­ing which wee con­sider the sorts ofFeet. Cap. 4.
Verses. Cap. 5.

Pro Puerorum in Studi is pio progressu, Precatio quotidiana.

DOmine Pater, Coeli ac Terrae effector, qui liberaliter tribuis sapientiam omnibus eam à te cum fiducia petentibus: Exorna (quaesumus) ingeni­orum nostrorum bonitatem, quam cum caeteris na­turae viribus nobis insudisti, lumire divinae gratiae tuae; ut non modò quae ad cognoscendum te & Salvatorem nostrum Dum num Jesum valeant, intelligamus; sed etiam totâ mente, & voluntate persequamur, & in­dies benignitate tuâ, tum doctrinâ, tum pietate pro­ficiamus; ut qui efficis omnia in omnibus, in nobis resplendescere dona tua facias, ad gloriam sempiter­nam Majesta is tuae.

Amen.

PAter noster, qui es in coelis, Sanctificetur Nomen tuum: Adveniat regnum tuum. Fiat Voluntas tua, sicut in coelo, sic & in terra. Panem nostrum quotidianum da nobis quotidie. Et dimitte nobisdebi­ta nostra, sicut & nos dimittimus debitoribus nostris: Et nè nos inducas in tentationem; Sed libera nos à malo. Quia tuum est Regnum, Potentia, & Gloria, in secula seculotum.

Amen.

…

Dr Saunderson's Approbation of this GRAMMAR.

I Have perused this present work, which the Autor, to his great Commendation, hath contrived with so much care and judgment, that I cannot but very well approve of it, as being the shortest, orderliest and plainest for the ease both of Master and Scholar, and with the least variation from the COMMON-GRAMMAR, of any Book that I have seen pub­lished in this kinde.

Robert Saunderson.
Ità testor Edvardus Silvester.

Imprimatur

Dec. 18. 1648.

JO. LAN [...]LEY.

[Page] THE LATINE GRAMMAR FITTED FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS.

Wherein the words of Lilie's GRAMMAR are (as much as might bee) reteined; many errors thereof amended; many needless things left out: many necessaries, that were wanting, supplied; and all things ordered in a Method more agreeable to Children's Capacitie.

By Charls Hoole, Mr of Arts, of Lincoln-Col­legde in Oxford, somtimes Schoolmaster of Rotherham in York-shire; and now Teacher of a Private Grammar-School in Gold-smith's Alley, not far from Alders­gate and Cripple-gate, LONDON.

And (that nothing might bee wanting to the purpose) the English Translation is set down on the contrarie page for the benefit of Yong-learners.

FRANC. PATRI.

Grammar is the Foundation of all Disciplines.

LONDON, Printed by William Du-Gard; and are to bee sold by John Clark jun. at the lower end of Cheap-side entring into Mercers Chapel. An. Dom. 1651.

To the Lovers and Professors of Grammar-learning.
More especially To his most honored good friends, the Schoolmasters of his ac­quaintance either in Citie or Countrie.

Gentlemen!

I Have lately published som Helps towards Grounding little ones in the Latine-tongue: and finding them (by my own and other's Practice) to becom succesful; I more willingly go on to prose­cute my begun design; viz. to contrive (at vacant times) such necessarie Subsidiaries for everie Classis in a Grammar-School, as may much facilitate The good (though with som tedious) old waie of Teaching by Grammar, Autors, and Exercises.

[Page] And becaus our greatest cumber hither­to hath been Grammar, I have first begun with it, and endevored to bring the Rules of that Art to the reach of Children's ap­prehensions; that in daily reading, writing, and speaking Latine, they may clearly see, and at once understand the Reason of what they do.

What I have don herein I most humbly submit to your candid judgments, and if, in your Opinions, I but seem to effect anie thing, which may make our School-labor less troublesom, I have what I desire; and therefore rest,

Your truly devoted friend, and humble servant
From my School in Gold-smith's Alley, March, 26. 1651.
Charls Hoole.

THE LATINE GRAMMAR.
Of Grammar, and its Parts.

The Latine Grammar con­teineth Rules of right spea­king Latine. It hath four Parts.

GRammar is the Art of Writing and Speak­ing aright.

With the Latines in Latine.

There bee four Parts of Gram­mar.1Orthographie.Lib. I.
2Etymologie:Lib. II.
3Syntaxis.Lib. III.
4Prosodia.Lib. IV.

Grammar hath its name from letters, which the Greeks call gramma [...]d, and implie's as much as literature; as if you should call it the Letter-Art, or Skill in letters: for this Art begin's with letters, of which syllables are made; and of syllables, words; and of words, a speech; which is either Prose or Vers.

Orthographie is spent about Letters; Prosodia about Syllables; Etymologie about Words; and Syntaxis about a Speech. The natural order therefore require's, that Prosodia should bee ranked in the second place; But wee, following the method of the Com­mon-Grammar (becaus indeed the quantitie of Syllables can­not so well bee perceived before Words bee understood) thought good to set Prosodia in the last place.

Lib. I. Of Orthographie.

1. Orthogra­phie treateth

ORthographie is the first part of Grammar, which teacheth with what letters anie word is to bee spelled; as, lectio not lexio.

Orthographie treatethOf Letters.Chap. 1.
Of Syllables.Chap. 2.
Of Right Ʋtterance.Chap. 3.
Of Points of Sentences.Chap. 4.

Chap. 1. Of Letters.

2. of Letters, which are Vowells, and Consonants. Smal and Great. which stand for A Word, Or A Number.

A Letter is the least part of a Word.

There bee 23 Latine letters. A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P Q R S T V X Y Z.

Three things belong to e­verie Letter.1. The Name whereby it is called.
2. The Figure or Character where­by it is known, or noted.
3. The Force or power whereby it is pronounced or uttered.

Letters are distinguished according to their sound intoVowels, &
Consonants.

A Vowel is a letter which soundeth by its self; and and they bee five, a e i o u, and y the Greek one: of which, beeing diversly placed, are made as manie Dipthongs, ae au ei eu oe, and v.

A Consonant is a letter which soundeth not except it bee joined with a Vowel, as, B C D &c. Like­wise J and V becom consonants, when they are [...] before themselvs, or other vowels in the same sylla­ble; as, Juno, Jovis; voluntas, vultus.

of Conso­ants som are1. Mutes, which have no sound, of themselvs, and they are nine, b c d f g k p q t, in which the sound of the vowel follow's after.
For f answereth to φ fi the Greek letter, and q to make it sound take's u to it.
2. Semivowels, which have som sound of themselves, and they are seven, l m n r s x z; in which the sound of the vowel goeth before.

[Page 6]

Semivowels are som of themLiquids, which do melt, or lose their force after a Mute in the same syl­lable; as, l m n r.
Double Consonants, which have the force of two letters, as x z and j between two vowels. For in the word jejunium, the first j seem's to bee a single consonant, the second a double consonant, and the third a vowel.

S is neither a Liquid nor a Mute, but a letter of its own power or pronunciation; which som there­fore call Monadicon, or a letter, of whose sort there is but that one.

H is not properly a letter, but a note of asspira­tion; as in pulcher, homo, hiatus; which before ie is seldom pronounced, for wee saie Hjeremias, Hjeroso­lyma, as though they begun with J consonant; but Hierarchia, as if it begun with I vowel.

Letters according to their shape areSmal or [...] wch are written withSmal characters, as a b c.
GreatGreat characters, as A B C.

Great letters are written in the begining of

1. Sentences; as, Deum time, Fear God. Regem hono­ra, Honor the King.

2. Proper names; as, Carolus Charls. Londinum Lon­don. Thamisis the Thames.

3. The more eminent words in a sentence; as,

Religionis Christianae fundamentum est Fides.
Faith is the foundation of the Christian Religion.

4. Everie vers in a Poëme; as,

Ʋtendum est aetate: cito pede praeterit aetas.
Nec bona tam sequitur, quàm bona prima fuit.
Improve the time; time passeth quickly on;
Nor doth so good succeed as that that's gon.

[Page 8] Smal letters are commonly written in all other places, whereof those are chiefly to bee minded which have a double character, as i u and s; for i and u bee vowels, but j and v bee consonants, which som call ja and va. Likewise long s is al­waies written in the beginning or middle of a word, but short s in the end of it; as scripsimus.

When great letters bee set alone, or but a few together, they do signifie or stand for

somtimes(Whole words; as, M. T. C. Mark Tullie Cicero. S. P. D. Salutem plurimam dicit, sendeth much greeting. A. M. Anno mundi, In the year of the World. A. D. Anno Domini, in the year of our Lord. R. P. Respublica, the Common-wealth. P. C. Patres Conscripti, the Senators. HS. or LLS. Duae librae & semis, two pound and a half. N. B. nota bene, mark well.
A number; as, I one, V five, X ten, L fiftie, C an hundred, ∽ or CC two hundred. D or D five hundred. ∞ or M or M a thousand. ↁ five thousand. CCIↃↃ ten thousand. ↇ fiftie thou­sand. ↈ an hundred thousand. (roman 500000) five hundred thousand. (roman 1000000) ten hundred thousand.

The lesser number set before, take's away so much as it self is from the greater; but beeing set after, it add's to it; as, IV make's four, but VI six: IX nine, but XI eleven.

A cross line made over a numeral letter implieth it to signifie so manie thousands, as otherwise it would contein lesser sums; as III three thousand. X ten thousand, and so of the rest.

Chap. 2. Of Syllables.

2. Of Sylla­bles. and Of parting and putting them together.

A Syllable, is a taking letters together, and ut­tering them with one breath; as, vir-tus.

And it isImproper, which consisteth of one onely vowel or dipthong; as, Ae-a-cus.
Proper, which consisteth of one or more consonants taken together with a vowel or dipthong; as, coelestis.

Hee that would write rightly must learn, as hee write's, to part syllables, and put them together.

Note therefore that

1. A Syllable in Latine doth not exceed the num­ber of six letters; as, Stirps, Scrobs.

2. In words of manie syllables a consonant set be­tween two vowels belong's to the later; as Do­mi-nus.

3. If a consonant bee doubled, the first belong's to the foregoing, and the latter to the following syllable; as, An-nus.

4. Consonants, which cannot bee joined in the be­ginning of a word, must bee parted in the middle of it; as, Sul-cus: and on the contrarie; as, No­ster.

5. In simple words these letters alway belong to the following vowel, viz.

bdasHe-bdomas.becaus wee saieBdellium.
cnTe-chna.Cneus.
ctDo-ctus.Ctesipho.
gnA-gnus.Gnatus.
mnA-mnis.Mnemosyne.
phthNa-phtha.Phthisis.
psScri-psi.Psittacus.
ptA-ptus.Ptolomaeus.
sbLe-sbia.Sbesis.
scPi-scis.Scamnum.
smCo-smus.Smaragdus.
spA-sper.Spero.
sqTe-squa.Squalor.
stPa-stor.Sterto.
tlA-tlas.Tleptolemus.
tmLa-tmius.Tmolus.
tnAe-tna.Thnesko.

6. In words compounded everie part must bee se­parated from another; às, Abs-con-do.

7. In words compounded with a preposition, wee must respect the ear and good sound; as, Aufero, not Absfero; and Abstuli, not Autuli: and there­fore it is that consonants are oftentimes put in; as, Redamo, for Reamo; and Ambigo for Amigo.

8. S Is rightly written after X in compound words, whose simples begin with s; as, Exscribo, of ex and scribo, exsul of x and solum: but not in others; as, Exoro of Ex and oro; Exigo of ex and ago.

Chap. 3. Of Right Utterance.

Of right Ut­tering and a­mending the faults in Pro­nouncing.

ORthoëpie, or Right Utterance, is the manner of right speaking out; as, Homo, not omo.

Boies must neither over-hasten their speech, nor paus between everie word, but must bee made to avoid the usual faults in pronouncing; such as are

1. Traulism, when one stutteth or stammereth; as, Cacacanit for canit. Which fault may bee amended by quickly pattering over som ribble rabble made hard to pronounce on purpose; as,

Arx, tridens, rostris, sphinx, praester, torrida, seps, strix.

[Page 10] Plateasm, when one speaketh too broadly; as, Ar­gò for Ergô. Mountes for Montes. Taibai for tibi.

Ischnotes, when one speaketh too mincingly; as, Nync for nunc. Eliquis for Aliquis. Or too lispingly; as, Aputh for Apud. Amath for Amat.

Chap. 4. Of Points in Sentences.

4: Of Point in Sentences, which are 1. Comma , 2. Colon : 3. Semi­colon ; 4. Period , 5. Parenthe­sis () 6. Interroga­tion? 7. Exclama­tion! Hyphen -

A Point or Paus is a note of distinction, signify­ing the space of breathing, or how long one may staie his breath. There bee eight of these espe­cially to bee noted.

1. A comma is an half circle, which staieth a sen­tence a little by distinguishing its shorter parts; as,

Grammaticus, rhetor, geometres, pictor, aliptes,
Graeculus esuriens, in coelum, jusseris, ibit.

2. A Colon is two pricks, which suspend a sen­tence somwhat long, by dividing it in the midst; as,

Ʋtendum est aetate: cito pede praeterit aetas.

3. A Semicolon is a prick with a Comma under it, staying a sentence longer then a Comma, and not so long as a Colon; as, Tu, quid divitiae possint, consideras; quid virtus, non item.

4. A Period is a full prick after a perfect sen­tence; as, Deum time. Regem honora.

5. A Parenthesis is two half Moons including a sentence, which though it bee taken away, the speech nevertheless will bee whole; as,

—Princeps (quia bella minantur
Hostes) militibus urbes praemunit, & armis.

6. An Interrogation mark's a question with two pricks, whereof the higher hath a tail upward; as, Quomodo vales?

7. An Exclamation is marked with two pricks, where­of the upper is a line coming down upon a point; as, O tempora! O mores!

[Page 16] 8. Hyphen is a little stroke interposed in a word divided at the end of a line; as, Humanis­sime: or, in words that are united, but not compound­ed; as Res-publica, a Common-wealth.

LIB. II. Of Etymologie.

Etymologie treateth

ETYMOLOGIE is the second part of Grammar, which teacheth how to know the difference of words, du­ly considering the properties or things belonging to everie one of them.

Now, a word is a part or piece of a Speech, which it self doth signifie somthing, but cannot bee divi­ded into parts that signifie; as, Pietas Godliness.

Chap. 1. Of the eight Parts of Speech, and their ge­neral Accidents.

Of the eight Parts of Speech. which are Declined or Undeclined. To which be­long, Two Num­bers, Singular, and Plural. Three Persons The First. The Second. The Third.

THere bee eight sorts of Words.

  • 1. A Noun. Chap. 2.
  • 2. A Pronoun. Chap. 23.
  • 3. A Verb. Chap. 24.
  • 4. A Participle. Chap. 39.
  • [Page 18]5. An Adverb. Chap. 40.
  • 6. A Conjunction. Chap. 41.
  • 7. A Preposition. Chap. 42.
  • 8. An Interjection. Chap. 43.

And these bee commonly called Parts of Speech, becaus of them eve­rie speech is made.

The fourfirstof these areDeclined, which chan­ge's their endings.
laterƲndeclined, wch chan­ge's not their endings.

There belong to everie Part of Speech

1. Speci­es, or Kinde,according to which a word isPrimitive, which is not derived of anie other word; as, Arbor, Amo.
Derivative, which is derived from another word; as, Arbustum, Ami­cus.
2. Figure, or Form,Simple, or single; as, Amicus, Amo.
Compound, or mixt; as, Inimicus, Redamo.

There belong to words Declined

1. Analogie, when a word agree's with a Common Rule; as, Musa, Amo.

2. Anomalie, when a word swerv's from the Com­mon Rule; as, Filia, Fero.

3. Two Num­bers, whereofThe Singular speaketh but of one; as, Lapis a Stone.
The Plural of more then one; as, Lapides Stones.

[Page 20]

4. Three Persons.The first speaketh of himself; as, Ego nugans puer ludo. I trifling boie do plaie.
The second is spoken to; as, Tu nugans puer ludis. Thou trifling boie plaiest.
The third is spoken of; as, Ille nugans puer ludit. Hee trifling boie plaieth.

Ego and Nos bee alwaies of the First Person.

Tu and vos, and everie Vocative case of the Se­cond.

All other Nouns, Pronouns, and Participles bee of the Third, unless these bee exprest or understood.

Chap. 2. Of a Noun, and its proper Accidents.

A Noun na­meth a thing, and is Substantive Or Adjective. Proper Or Common. It hath,

A Noun is a Part of Speech which nameth a thing, without anie difference of Time or Person; as, Manus a Hand, Domus a Hous.

And it is either

Substantive, which may stand by it self in a Speech, and requireth nothing to bee added to declare its signification; as, Homo a Man.

Adjective, which stand's in need of a Substantive to declare its signification; as, Bonus good.

A substantive sheweth what a thing is; as, Equus a hors.

An Adjective sheweth what alike the thing is; as, Albus White.

Both which are

Proper, which is spoken of som one thing one­ly; as, Carolus Charls, Londinum London. Thamisis Thames. Anglus English. Scotus Scotch.

Common, which signifieth a thing common to [Page 22] manie; as, Homo a Man, Ʋrbs a Citie, Fli [...]vius a River, Regio a Countrie, Magnus Great.

There belong to a Noun, Pronoun, and a ParticipleCase.Chap. 3.
Gender.Chap. 4.
Declension.Chap. 11.
Comparison.Chap. 17.

Chap. 3. Of Case.

Six Cases. The Nomina­tive. Genitive. Dative. Accusative. Vocative. Ablative.

A Case is the special ending of a Noun, Pronoun, or Participle.

There bee Six cases in both numbers.

1. The Nominative case is the first word whereby wee name anie thing; and it goeth before the Verb, and answereth to the question Who, or What? as, Magi­ster docet, The Master teacheth.

2. The Genitive case signifie's whose a thing is; and answereth to this question Whose, or Whereof? as, Doctrina Magistri, The learning of the Master, or The Master's learning.

3. The Dative attribute's, or give's somthing to one; and answereth to the question to whom, or to what; as, Do librum Magistro, I give a book to the Master.

4. The Accusative case follow's the Verb, and signi­fie's whereunto the action of the Verb referreth; and answereth to the question Whom, or What? as, Amo Magistrum, I love the Master.

5. The Vocative case is used in calling or speaking to; as, O Magister, O Master.

6. The Ablative case is commonly joined with a Preposition that serveth thereunto; and answereth to the question from whom, or from what? and the like; as, Accepi librum à Magistro, I received a book from the Master.

The Nominative case is somtimes called the right, or streight case, and the rest oblique, or thwart cases, becaus their endings swerv from the Nominative.

Chap. 4. Of Gender.

even genders Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Common of two. Common of three. Doubtful. Epicoeoe.

GEnder is the differencing of Sex in respect of Speech. For it make's a difference betwixt Nouns that are used as Hees or Shees, thereby to know the agreement of the Substantive or Adje­ctive.

Genders of Nouns bee seven; whereof the three first may not unfitly bee termed Simple, and the four last Compound Genders.

They are known by their Articles (or notes) which are borrowed of the Pronoun and bee thus decli­ned.

Singulariter Masc.Foem.Neut.PluraliterMasc.Foem.Neut.
Nom.HicHaecHocHiHaeHaec
Gen.HujusHujusHujusHorumHarumHorum
Dat.HuicHuicHui [...]cHisHisHis
Acc.HuncHancHocHosHasHaet
Voc.      
Abl.HôcHacHôcHisHisHis

1. The Masculine gender is of Nouns which are given to Hees; and is declined with Hic; as, Hic vir a Man.

2. The Feminine gender is of Nouns which are gi­ven to Shees; and is declined with Haec; as, Haec mu­lier, a Woman.

3. The Neuter is of Nouns which are given to things that are accounted neither Hees nor Shees; and is declined with Hoc; as, Hoc saxum, a Stone.

[Page 26] 4. The Common of two is made of the Masculine and the Feminine joined together; and is declined with Hic and Haec; as Hic & haec Parens a Parent.

5. The Common of three is made of all three simple Genders joined together; and is declined with Hic, Haec, and Hoc; as, Hic, Haec & Hoc Felix Happie.

6. The Doubtful may bee either the Masculine or the Feminine; and is declined with Hic vel Haec; as, Hic vel Haec Dies a Daie.

7. The Epicene comprehendeth both Sexes under one Article; as, Hic Passer a Sparrow. And in this Gender, to avoid ambiguirie, wee use to express the Sex by Hee, or Shee; as, Passer mas a Hee, or Cock-sparrow: Passer foemina a Shee, or Hen-sparrow.

Propria quae Maribus. OR WILLIAM LILIE'S Rules OF THE GENDERS of NOUNS.

Chap. 5. Of the General Rules of Proper Names.

Rules of the genders of Nouns are 1. General. 1. Of Substan­tives proper. 1. Proper names. 1. Of Gods. 2. Of Men. 3. Of Rivers. 4. Of Months. 5. Of Winds, are of the Mas­culines. Good. 2. Proper Names. 1. Of Goddes­ses. 2. Of Women. 3. Of Cities. 4. Of Regions. 5. Of Islands. are Feminines.

1. PRoper Names which are given to Males, or Hees, are Masculine: As 1. of Gods, as Bac­chus, chi. Mars, tis. Apollo, līnis. 2. Of Men, as Ca­to, tōnis. Virgilius, lii. 3. Of Rivers, as Tybris, bris. Orontes, tis. 4. Of Months, as October, bris. 5. Of Windes, as Lybs, ybis. Notus, ti. Auster, stri, the South­winde.

[Page 28] II. PRoper Names shewing the female kinde are Fe­minines; as, 1. Of Goddesses, as Juno, nonis. Ve­nus, nĕris. 2. Of Women, as Anna, nae. Philótis, lotĭ­dis. 3. Of Cities, as Elis, lĭdis. Opus, puntis. 4. Of Regions, as Graecia, ae. Persis, ĭdis. 5. Of Islands, as Creta, tae. Británnia, niae. Cyprus, pri.

But som names of Cities are excepted, as 1. These Masculines, Sulmo, mónis. Agragas, gantis. 2. Som Neuters, as Argos, Tibur, bŭris. Praeneste, stis, and 3. Anxur, xŭris, which is both of the Masculine and Neuter gender.

Chap. 6. Of the General Rules of Common Names.

II. General of Common Names. 1. Common names of Trees are Feminines. 2. Common names of Birds Beasts, & Fish bee Epicenes. 3. All that end in u [...], and that change not their ending, are Neuters. 2. Special rules of common names are three.

1. COmmon names of Trees are of the Feminine gender, as Alnus, ni, an Alder. Cupressus, si, [...] Cypress. Cedrus, dri, a Cedar. But Pinus, ni, a Pine. Oloaster, stri, a wilde Olive, are Masculines. Siler, lĕris, an Oster. Suber, bĕris, a Cork tree. Thus, uris, the Frankintens tree. Robur, ŏris, an Oak, and Acer, cĕris, a Maple, are Neuters.

II. THe names of Birds, as Passer, ĕris a Sparrow. Hirundo, dĭnis, a Swallow. Of Beasts, as Ti­gris, grĭdis, a Tiger. Vulpes, pis, a Fox. And of Fishes, as Ostrea, ae, an Oister. Cetus, ti, a whale, are of the Epicene gender.

III. But here is to bee noted, that of all the Nouns afore-mentioned, everie Noun (except pro­per names of Men, and Women) in um is of the Neuter gender. And so are Nouns that change not their ending.

[Page 30] But now will I speak in order touching all other Common Names, or which are as Common-names; for in these the Gen­der is alwaies known by the Genitive case: as the Three Speci­al Rules following will shew.

Chap. 7. Of the First Special Rule.

1. A Noun not encreasing, is Feminine. Except Mascu­lines. Neuters. Doubtfuls. Commons of two.

A Noun not encreasing in the Genitive case singular, is of the Feminine Gender; as, Caro, Carnis, Flesh. Capra, Caprae, a shee Goat. Nubes, Nubis, a Cloud.

1. MAnie Names belonging to Men, ending in a, are of the Masculine gender; as, Scriba, bae, a Scribe: Assecla, clae, a Page. Scúrra, rae, a Scof­fer. Rabula, lae, A Brawler. Lixa, xae, a Scullion. Lanista, stae, a Fencer. 2. Such as com from the first Greek Declension and end in as; as Satrapas, pae, a Peer. Or in es; as Athletes, tae, a wrestler. And such as are made of them in a; as Satrapa, pae, Athle­ta, tae. 3. Likewise verres, ris, a boar-pig. Natalis, lis, a birth-date. aqualis, lis, an ewer. 4. Words that are compounded of as (and signifie more then as) a pound weight; as centussis, sis, an hundred pound weight. 5. Add to these, Lienis, nis, the milt. orbis, bis, a roundle. callis, lis, a path. caulis, lis, a stalk. follis, lis, a path of bellows. collis, lis, a little hill. mensis, sis, a month. ensis, sis, a sword. fustis, stis a club. funis, nis, a rope. panis, nis, bread. penis, nis, a man's yard. cri­nis, nis, hair. ignis, nis, fire. cassis, sis, a net. fascis, scis, a faggot. torris, ris, a firebrand. sentis, tis, a thorn piscis, scis, a fish. unguis, guis, a nail, or hoof, vermis, mis, a worm. vectis, ctis, a door-bar. postis, stis, a [Page 31] post, and axis, xis, an axle trce. 6. Nouns ending

iner,as,Venter, tris, a bellie;are of the Masculine gender.
os,Logos, gi, a word;
us,Annus, ni, a year;

YEt these are Feminines. 1. Mater, tris, a mo­ther. 2. Humus, mi, the ground: domus, mi, mùs, an hous, or home: Alvus, vi, a panch: colus, li, lûs, a distaff: ficus, ci, cûs, a fig: acus, cûs, a needle: porticus cûs, a gallerte: tribus, bûs, a tribe: socrus, cri, a mo­ther in law: nurus, rûs, a daughter in law: manus, nûs a hand: idus iduum, the Ides of the month: anus, nûs an old woman: vannus ni, a van. 3. To these you may add Greek words which turn os into us, as pa­pyrus, ri, paper: antidotus, ti, an antidote: costus, sti, the hearb Marie: diphthongus, gi, a diphthong: bys­sus, si, fine fl [...]x: abyssus, si, an abyss: crystallus, li, crystal: Synodus, di, a Synod: sapphirus, ri, a Sa­phire: eremus, mi, a wilderness: arctus, cti, Charls­wain: with manie more, which would bee long to set down.

II. NOuns ending in e, whose Genitive make's is, are of the Neuter gender; as, Mare, ris, the sea: rete, tis, a net. And 2. Nouns that end in on; as barbiton, ti, a Lute: or in um; as ovum, vi, an egg. 3. Hippomanes, nis, Mare-poison: cacoëthes, this, an evil custom: virus, poison: pelagus, gi, the sea. But 4. Vulgus, gi, the common people, is somtime Mascu­line, somtime Neuter.

III. THese Nouns are of the Doubtful gender; Talpa, pae, a mole: dama, mae, a fallow-deer: canalis, lis, a channel: Balanus, ni, mast: finis, nis, an end: clunis, nis, a buttock: restis, stis, a rope: penus, ni, nûs, victuals: amnis, nis, a rivet. [Page 34] Pampinus, ni, a vine-leaf; corbis, bis, a basket; linter, tris, a cock-boat; torquis, quis, a gold-chain; specus, cûs, a den; anguis, guis, a snake; ficus, ci, a pile; phase­lus, li, a barge; Lecythus, thi, an oil-glass; pha­rus, ri, a watch-tower; and Paradisus, si, Paradise.

IIII NOuns derived of Verbs, and ending in a are of the Common-of-two-Gender; as, Grajú­gena, nae, a Grecian-born, of gigno to beget; Agricola, lae, an husband-man, of colo to till; ádvena, nae, a stran­ger, of venio to com. 2. To these add Senex, nis, an old man; auriga, gae, a waggoner; verna, nae, a bondslave; so­dalis, lis, a companion: vates, tis, a Prophet; extorris, ris, a banished man; Patruélis, lis, an Uncle's son; Perdu­ellis, lis, an enemie in war; Affinis, nis, a kinsman; ju­venis, nis, a youth; testis, stis, a witness; civis, vis, a ci­tizen; canis, nis, a dog; hostis, stis, a foe, or enemie.

Chap. 3. Of the second Special Rule, and its Exceptions.

II. Anoun encrea­sing long is Feminine: Except Mascu­lines, Neuters. Doubtfuls. Commons.

IF the last syllable but one of the genitive case singu­lar encreasing, sound long, a noun is of the fe­minine gender; as, Pietas, pietátis, godliness; virtus, virtútis, virtue.

I. CErtain nouns of one syllable are Masculine; as, Sal, salis, salt; sol, solis, the Sun; ren, renis, the kid­nie; splen, splenis, the spleen; Car, Caris, a man of Caria; Ser, Seris, a man of Seres; vir, viri, a man; vas, vadis, a suretie; as, assis, a pound weight; mas, maris, a male; Bes, bessis, eight ounces; praes, praedis, a suretie; pes, pedis; a foot; glis, gliris, a dormous; mos, moris, a manner; flos, floris, a flower; ros, roris, dew; Tros, Trois, a Trojane; mus, muris, a mous; dens, dentis, a tooth; mons, montis, a moun­tain; pons, pontis, a bridg; fons, fontis, a spring.

[Page 36] Seps, sepis, a serpent; gryps, gryphis, a gryffon; Thrax, Thracis, a Thracian; Rex, Regis, a King; grex, gregis, a flock; and Phryx, Phrygis, a Phrygian. 2. Nouns of manie syllables in n; as, Acarnan, nánis, one of Acar­nania; lichen, chénis, liverwort; delphin, phinis, a dol­phin. 3. Nouns that end in o, and signifie a bodie; as, Leo, ónis, a lion; curculio, ónis, a weezil; so also se­nio, ónis, size; ternio, ónis, trey; sermo, mónis, speech.

4. Nouns that end iner,ascrater, téris, a goblet,bee mas­culin.
or,conditor, tóris, a builder,
os,Heros, róïs, a Nobleman,

5. So are also torrens, rentis, a brook; nesrens, entis, a pig; Oriens, entis, the East; with manie in dens; as, bidens dentis, a two grained fork. 6. Add to these, gigas, gan­tis, a giant; Elephas, phantis, an Elephant; adamas, mantis, an adamant; Garamas, mantis, one of Garamatia; tapes, pétis, tapestrie; lebes, bétis, a cauldron; Cures, rétis, one of Cures; Magnes, nétis, a loadstone; meridies, diêi, noon. 7. Nouns compounded of as, and signifie part of as; as, dodrans, antis, nine ounces; semis, issis, half a pound. 8. To these add, Samnis, nitis, a Samnite; hy­drops, drôpis, the dropsie; nycticorax, rácis, a night-ra­ven; vervex, vécis, a wether; phoenix, nicis, a Phenix; bombyx, bycis, a silk-worm. Yet of these, Syren, rénis, a meremaid; and also soror, óris, a sister; and uxor, óris, a wife, are feminines.

II, THese nouns of one fyllable, bee of the neuter gender, mel, mellis, honie; fel, fellis, gall; lac, la­ctis, milk; far, farris, bread-corn; ver, veris, the spring; cor, cordis, a heart; vas, vasis, a vessel; os, ossis, a bone; and os, oris, a month; rus, ruris, the countrie; thus, thu­ris, frankincens; jus, juris, right; crus, cruris, the leg, pus, puris, corrupt matter. 2. Nouns in al as, capital, [Page 38] talis, a quoif. And in ar, as, laquear, aris, a vault, 3. Halec, lecis, an herring, is of the feminine and neu­ter gender.

III. THese nouns bee of the Doubtful gender, Py­thon, ónis, a spirit of Prophesie; scrobs, bis, a ditch; serpens, pentis, a serpent; bubo, bónis, an owl; rudens, dentis, a cable; grus, gruis, a crane; Perdix, dicīs, a partridg; lynx, cis, a spotted beast; limax, ácis, a s [...]all; stirps, pis, a stock; calx, cis, an heel; dies, dieï, a daie, is onely masculine in the plural number.

IV. THese nouns bee of the Common-of-two-gen­der; Parens, rentis, a parent; autor, tóris, an Autor; infans, fantis, a babe; adolescens, scentis, a youth; dux, ducis, a leader; illex, légis, a lawless person; haeres, rédis, an heir; exlex, légis, an outlaw. Words compounded of frons, tis. a forehead; as, bifrons, tis, one having two foreheads; custos, stódis, a keeper; bos, bovis, a neat; fur, furis, a thief; sus, suis, a swine; sa­cerdos, dotis, a Priest.

Chap. 9. Of the third Special Rule, and its Exceptions.

III. A noun encrea­sing short is of the mascu­line gender. Except Femi­nines. Neuter. Doubtfuls. Commons.

A Noun is of the masculine gender, if the last syllable but one of the genitive case singular increasing, sound short; as, sanguis, sánguinis, blood.

I. A Noun of more then two syllables, ending in do, which make's dinis; as, dulcédo, dinis, sweet­ness; and in go which make's ginis; as, compâgo, ginis, a joint, are of the feminine gender. 2. Add Virgo, gi­nis, a maid; grando, dinis, hast; fides, dei, faith; compes, pedis, fetters; teges, getis, a mat; seges, getis, standing corn; arbor, boris, a tree; hyems, emis, winter; bacchar, [Page 40] charis, the hearb Ladie's-globe; sindon, dŏnis, fine linnen; Gorgon, gŏnis, the monster Gorgon; icon, cŏnis, animage; Amazon, zŏnis, an Amazon. 3. Greek nouns ending in as as, lampas, pădis, a lamp. Or in is, as Iaspis, spĭdis, jasper; cassis, sĭdis, an helmet; cuspis, spĭdis, a spear-point. 4. One word in us, as pecus, cŭdis, smal cattle. 5. To these add, forfex, ficis, a pair of shears; pellex, licis an harlot; carex, ricis, sedg; supellex, lectilis, houshold-stuff; appendix, dicis, an appentice; Histrix, stricis, an hedghog; coxendix, dicis, an hip; filix, licis, fein. 6. Halcyon, onis, a King's fisher; and mulier, liĭris, a woman, may bee put in this rank, or rule.

II. A Noun, signifying a thing without life, is of the neuter gender, if it end in a; as, probléma, matis, a probleme; In en; as, omen, mĭnis, luek; In ar; as, iubar, băris, the sun-beam; In ur; as, jecur, cŏris, the liber; In us; as, onus, nĕris, a burden; In put; as, occiput, cipitis, the hinder part of the head. 2. Yet of these, pecten, ctinis, a comb; furfur, furis, bran; are masculines. 3. These are neuters, Cadaver, veris, a car­cass; verber, beris, a stripe; iter, tineris, a journie; suber beris, cork; tuber, beris, a toad-stool; uber, beris, a dug; gingiber, beris, guiger; laser, seris, the herb Benjamin; cicer, ceris, a vetch; piper, peris, pepper; papáver, veris, poppie; siser, seris, a parsnip; siler, leris, an oster. 4. Ae­quor, oris, the sea; marmor, oris, a marble; and ador, doris, wheat, are neuters. 5. And so is pecus, cattle when it make's pecoris.

III. THese nouns are of the Doubtful gender, car­do, dinis, the hinge of a door; margo, ginis, a margent; cinis, neris, ashes; obex, bicis, a bolt; [Page 42] pulvis, veris, dust; adeps, dipis, fat; forceps, cipis. a pair of tongs; pumex, micis, a pumice-stone; ramex, micis, burstness; anas, natis a duck; imbrex, bricis, a gutter-tile; culex, licis, a gnat; natrix, tricis, a water­snake; onyx, nycis, the nail of one's hand, with its compounds, and silex, licis, a flint; though these bee rather used as masculines.

IV. THese nouns bee of the Common-two-gender, vigil, gilis, a watchman; pugil, gilis, a champi­on; exsul, sulis, a banished man; praesul, sulis, a superintendent; Homo, minis, a man; nemo, want's the genitive case, and in the dative make's nemini, no bodie; martyr, tyris, a martyr; Ligur, guris, one of Liguria; augur, guris, a foothsaier; Arcas, cadis, an Ar­cadian; Antistes, stitis, a President; miles, litis, a soul­dier; pedes, ditis, a footman; interpres, pretis, an inter­preter; comes, mitis, a companion; hospes, spitis, an host, or ghest; ales, litis, a bird of wing; Praeses, sidis, a President; Princeps, cipis, a Prince; auceps, cupis, a fowler; eques, quitis, an horsman; obses, sidis, an ho­stage. 2. And manie other nouns derived of verbs, as conjux, jugis, an husband or a wife; judex, dicis, a judg; vindex, dicis, a revenger; opifex, ficis, a workman; and aruspex, spicis, a foothsaier.

Chap. 10. Of the genders of Ad­jectives.

General Rules of Adjectives. 1. Of one ter­mination. 2. Of two ter­minations. 3. Of three terminations. 1. Exception of Adjectives like Substan­tives. 2. Of Adje­ctives that are declined. by is and er.

I. ADjectives of one termination are of all three genders; as, hic, haec, & hoc felix, licis, happie; hic, haec, & hoc, audax, dacis, bold.

II. Adjectives, if they have two terminations, the first is of the Common-of-two-gender; the second, is of the Neuter; as, hic & haec, omnis, & hoc, omne, all.

[Page 44] III. But if Adjectives do varie three terminations; as, Sacer, sacra, sacrum, holie: the first termination is Masculine, the second is Feminine, and the third is Neuter.

But som are, by declining, almost Substantives, yet by nature and use, rather Adjectives: such are Pauper, peris, poor; puber, beris, of ripe age; degener, generis, one that goe's out of kinde; uber, beris, plentiful; dives, vitis, rich; locuples, plétis, weal­thie; sospes, spitis, safe; comes, mitis, a companion; superstes, stitis, a surviver, and som others, which due reading will teach.

2. These Nouns have a certain manner of decli­nig proper to themselvs; Campester, of the plain field; volucer, swift in flight; celeber, famous; celer, swift; saluber, wholsom: To which add Pe­dester, of a footman; equester, of an horsman; acer, sharp; paluster, of a fen; alacer, cheerful; sylvester, of a wood: And these you shall decline thus: Hic celer, haec celeris, hoc celere, swift; or, Hic & haec ce­leris, & hoc celere, swift. &c.

Chap. 11. Of the first Declension.

There bee five Declensions. Nouns of the first bee decli­ned like musa;

DEclension is the variation of a word by Cases.

There bee five declensions of nouns.

A Noun is known of what Declension it is by the ending of the Genitive case singular; for the Geni­tive case

of the1st2d3d4th5th
end's inaeiisûseï

The Genitive case is formed of the Nominative, (which is the first word) by changing the termina­tion; and other cases are formed of the Genitive.

The Vocative, in the singular number, is, for the most part, like the Nominative; and in the plural al­waies.

Nouns of the neuter gender have the nominative, the accusative, and vocative cases alike in both num­bers; which three cases end in a in the pluràl.

The Dative and Ablative plural are alwaies alike.

The Genitive plural, in manie words admit's a Syncope, i. e. the loss of a middle letter or syl­lable.

The first Declension is, of Latine nouns (for the most part Feminines) not encreasing, ending in a; which are declined like Musa, a song.

The terminations of the first Declension areSingularly in theNominativecaseaThe example, or type thereof isMusa
GenitiveaeMusae
DativeaeMusae
AccusativeamMusam
VocativeaMusa
AblativeâMusâ
Plurally in theNominativecaseaeMusae
GenitivearumMusarum
DativeisMusis
AccusaiveasMusas
VocativeaeMusae
AblativeisMusis

As is found in tht Genitive case singular in imitation of the Greeks; as, Pater-familias, the good man of the hous.

The antients dissolved ae into āi, as aulāi for aulae.

Filia, nata, dea, equa, with som few others, make their Dative and Ablative plural in abus, to distinguish them from their Ma­sculines, Filius, natus, Deus, equus, which follow the form of the second Declension.

This Declension is also of Greek Nouns, viz. Masculines in as, and es, and Feminines in a and e.

Nouns in as and as, make their Accusative in am and an; as,

NomGenDat.Acc.Voc.Ablat
AeneasAeneaeAeneaeAeneam, anAeneaAeneâ
MaiaMaiaeMaiaeMaiam, anMaiaMaiâ

Greek words in the plural number are declined like Latine.

Es make's in the Accusatixe case en, in the Vocative and Ablative e, or a.

Nom.Gen.Dat.Acc.Voc. or Ablat.
AnchisesAnchisaeAnchisaeAnchisenAnchise vel Anchisa

E make's the Genitive in es, the Dative in e, the Accusa­tive in en, the Vocative and Ablative in e; as,

NomGen.Dat.Acc.Voc. & Abl.
PenelopePenelopesPenelopePenelopenPenelope

Som add hereunto Hebrew words in am; as, Adam, Adae, which are better reduced to the second Declension by putting to us; as, Adamus, Adami, Adam.

Chap. 12. Of the second Declension.

Of the Second like Magister, Dominus, or Regnum.

THe second Declension is (for the most part) of Masculines

inerasMagister, a Master.Or of Neuters in um; as, Regnum, a Kingdom.
usDominus, a Lord.

The terminations of this Declen­sion areSingularlyNom.r, us, um.The Examples or Types of it areMagisterDominusRegnum
Gen.i.MagistriDominiRegni
Dat.o.MagistroDominoRegno
Acc.um.MagistrumDominumRegnum
Voc.r, e, um.MagisterDomineRegnum
Abl.o.MagistroDominoRegno
PlurallyNom.i, a.MagistriDominiRegna
Gen.orum.MagistrorumDominorumRegnorum
Dat.is.MagistrisDominisRegnis
Acc.os, a.MagistrosDominosRegna
Voc.i, a.MagistriDominiRegna
Abl.is.MagistrisDominisRegnis

When the Nominative endeth in us the vocative endeth in e; but Deus God, maketh ô Deus, and Filius a son maketh ô fili.

Proper names of Men in ius make their Vocative in i; as, Nom. Georgius George, voc. Georgi.

Agnus, a lamb; lucus, a grove; chorus, a quire; fluvius, a river, do make their Vocative case in e and in us.

Wee read in the plural numberDiiDeorumDiis, Deos, Dii, Diis, gods.
DeiDeûm

Greek nouns of this Declension have three terminations: eus of the Masculine, os of the Masculine and Feminine, and on of the neuter gender.

Eus make's the genitive case 'n er̄, or eo!, the dative in eī, the Accusative in ëa, the Vocative in eu, the Ablative in eo.

Nom.Gen.Dat.Acc.Voc.Abl.
Orphenapheï, pheosOrpheïOrpheapheupheo

Ös make's the Accusative case in on, as, Nom. Delos, Gen. Deli, Dat. Delo, Acc. Delon, Voc. Dele, Ablat. Delo:

But Attick nouns in os make the Genitive in o; as, Andro­geos, Androgeo, &c. And nouns contracted in us make their Vo­cative in u; as, Oedipus, Oedipu.

On is declined like other Neuters; as, Nom. Ilion, Gen. Ilii, Dat. Ilio, Acc. Ilion, Voc. Ilion, Abl. Ilio.

Chap. 13. Of the third Declension.

Of the Third like Lapis or Caput. What nouns make the Acc. in im. Ext & im. The Abl. in i. Nom-plural in ia. Es & eis. Gen. in ium Unm, Orum & ium. Abl. in ù & bus.

THe third Declension is very divers, for it con­tein's all Genders, and (at the least) eleven ter­minations in the Nominative case singular: in a, c, e, i, l, n, o, r, s, t, x.

The terminations of this Declen­sion areSingularlyNom.diversThe Examples, or Types of it areLapisCaput
Gen.isLapidisCapitis
Dat.iLapidiCapiti
Acc.emLapidemCaput
Voc.diversLapisCaput
Abl.eLapideCapite
PlurallyNom.esLapidesCapita
Gen.umLapidumCapitum
Dat.ibusLapidibusCapitibus
Acc.esLapidesCapita
Voc.esLapidesCapita
Abl.ibusLapidibusCapitibus

[Page 54] The Accusative cases of som words are declined onely in im; as, vis. strength; ravis, hoarsness; si­tis, thirst; tussis, a cough; maguderis, the stalk of the herh Benjamin; Charybdis, a gulf; and amussis, a Carpenter's line; to which wee may add the names of Rivers; as, Araris, the Soan in France; Tybris, Cybris by Rome.

Som make their Accusative in em and im indif­ferently; as, Pelvis, a basin; turris, a tower; buris, a plow-stilt; puppis, a poop of a ship; torquis, a chain to wear about one's neck; securis, an ax; restis, a rope; febris, an Agne; clavis, a keie; bipennis, a twi­bil; aqualis, a water-pot; navis,, a ship.

Their Ablative end's in i onely, whose Accusa­tive end's onely in im; as, tussim, Abl. tussi.

Names of Months in is and er, do make their Ablative in i onely; as, September, Abl, bri; Aprilis, Abl. li.

Neuters ending in al, ar, and e, for the most part make their Ablative in i;

as,Vectigal, Abl. li, toll.For Rete in the Ab­lative, is of Retis,
Calcar, Abl. ri, a spur.
Rete, Abl. ti, a net:

Yet these Nouns in ar, and e, keep e in their Ab­lative case; as, Far, bread-corn; hepar, the liber; jubar, the sun-beam; nectar, sweet wine; gausape, a frize; praesepe, a stall; Soracte, a hill in Italie; Prae­neste, the citie Palestrina; Reate, the citie Reati in Italie.

Adjectives, having the Nominative common in is, or er, and the Neuter in e, make their Ablative in i onely; as, fortis, ti, strong; Acer, or Acris, cri, sharp.

Nouns, which take on them the nature of Adje­ctives, make their Ablative case for the most part in i; as, Sodalis, li.

[Page 56] Except Proper names; as, Clemens, tis, Clement.

Nouns, whose Accusative cases end in em or im, make their Ablative in e and i; as, Puppis, Acc. pem vel pim, Abl. pe vel pi.

Par also, with its compounds, make both e and i. Also nouns of the Comparative degree; as, melior, better; and the rest of the Adjectives except those above-mentioned in er or is: But Pauper, poor; degener, out of kinde; uber, plentiful; sospes, safe; and hospes, an host; make their Ablative in e onely.

Som Substantives; as, Ignis, fire; amnis, a river; anguis, a snake; supellex, houshold-stuff; vectis, a door-bar; unguis, a nail, or hoof: Gentiles; as, Ar­pinâs, one of Arpinum; and Verbals in trix; as, Vi­ctrix, a Conqueress, make their Ablative in e and i.

Neuters, whose Ablative end's in i, or in e and i, make their Nominative plural in ia; as, Fortis, tia, strong; felix, licia, happie.

Except Comparatives; as, fortiora, stronger: but Plus make's plura and pluria, more.

Som Nouns make their Nominative and Accusa­tive plural in es or eis the diphthong; as, Omnes or omneis, all; and eis is somtimes contracted into is; as, Sardis.

Of Ablatives in i onely, or in e or i, the Geni­tive case plural end's in ium; as, utili, utilium, pro­fitable; puppi vel pe, puppium. Except Comparatives; as, meliorum.

AndSupplicumofSupplex, a suppliant.
ComplicumComplex, a partner.
StrigilumStrigil, an hors-comb.
ArtificumArtifex, an artifice.
VeterumVetus, old.
VigilumVigil, a watchman.
MemorumMemor, mindeful.
InopumInops, poor
PagilumPugil, a champion.
But plus make's plurium.

When the Nominative cases singular end with two Consonants, the Genitive plural end in ium; as, Pars partium.

ExceptHyemum,ofHyems, winter.
Principum,Princeps, a Prince.
Forcipum,Forceps, a pair of tongs.
Municipum,Municeps, a free-men.
Inopum,Inops, poor.
Coelibum,Coelebs, a single-man.
Clientum,Cliens, a Client.
Participum,Particeps, a Partner.

When like syllables are found in the Nominative and Genitive cases singular, the Genitive case plu­ral end's in ium; as, Collis, a hill, make's Collium,

To which add,Virium,ofVis, strength.
Salium,Sal, salt.
Ditium,Dis, rich.

Manium,ofManes, spirits.
Penatium,Penates, houshold-gods.
Litium,Lis, controversie.

Yet except,

Vatum,ofVates, a Poët.
Juvenum,Juvenis, a youth.
Canum,Canis, a dog.

Opum,ofOpes, wealth.
Apum,Apes, a Bee.
Panum,Panis, bread.

As, a pound, make's assium; mas, a male, marium; vas-vadis, a suretie, vadium; nox, night, noctium; nix, snow, nivium; os, a bone, ossium; faux, a jaw, fauci­um; mus, a mous, murium; caro, flesh, carnium; cor, a heart, cordium.

[Page 60] Ales, a bird. make's alituum; and coelites, the hea­venlie inhabitants coeli [...]num; by taking to them u.

Boum of bos bovis, an ox, is an irregular word, as also bobus and bubus, for bovibus.

The names of Feasts, which are onely plural, make their Genitive case somtimes in orum; as, Agonalia, liorum: somtimes in ium; as, Floralia, lium: and somtimes both in orum, and ium; as, Saturnalia, li­orum, and lium.

Neuters singular in a make the Dative and Abla­tive plural in is or ibus; as, Problema, tis, vel mati­bus. So also Quinquatria, triis, vel tribus.

Words derived from the Greek, when they are declined after their own manner, imitate these examples.

Sing.Nom.Gen.Dat.Acc.Voc.Abl.Som of these make the Geni­tive plural in ων and ium.
Titananin osanianaanane
Arcasasadosadiadaasade
P [...]illisisidosidiidaiiae
Genesisisis, eosiim, inii
Opususuntosuntiuntauunte
Tethysysyosytynyy
Didooûsoooo
Achilleseseoseïeaee

Chap. 14. Of the fourth Declension.

THe fourth Declension hath onely two termina­tions in the Nominative case singular,

us, Masculine and Feminine,asManus.
u, Neuter,Cornu.

[Page 62]

The terminations of this Declen­sion areSingularlyNom.us, u.The Examples, or Types of it areManusCornu
Gen.ûs, u,ManûsCornu
Dat.ui, u.ManuiCornu
Acc.um, u.ManumCornu
Voc.us, u.ManusCornu
Abl.u, u.ManuCornu
PlurallyNom.us, ua.ManusCornua
Gen.uum.ManuumCornuum
Dat.ibus.ManibusCornibus
Acc.us, ua.ManusCornua
Voc.us, ua.ManusCornua
Abl.ibus.ManibusCornibus

Antiently the Genitive singular ended in i, and üis, thence the Antients said fructi for fructûs; and anüis for anûs.

The most holie name Jesus, make's Jesum in the Accusative, and in other cases Jesu.

The Dative case hath somtimes u; as, Fructu for fructui.

These words make their Dative and Ablative plu­ral in ubus; viz. Artus, a joint; arcus, a bow; tribus a stock; acus, a needle; ficus, a fig; specus, a hole; quercus, an oak; lacus, a lake; partus, young; veru, a spit; genu, a knee; All other nouns make ibus.

Chap. 15. Of the fift Declension.

Of the Fift like Facies.

THe fift Delension hath one onely termination in es; as, Facies, a face.

All nouns of this Declension are Feminines; ex­cept Dies, a daie, and Meridies, noon-daie.

Nom.esFaciesThe Genitive singular once ended in es, ii, and e, & the Dative somtimes in e.
Gen.eiFaciei
Dat.eiFaciei
Acc.emFaciemSom nouns of the third Declension were declined after this; as plebs, plebei.
Voc.esFacies
Abl.eFacie
Nom.esFaciesNo nouns of this De­clension have the Gen. Dat. and Ablative plural, ex­cept, Res, a thing; species, a kinde; facies, a face; acies, an edg; dies, a daie; meri­dies, mid-date, or noon.
Gen.erumFacierum
Dat.ebusFaciebus
Acc.esFacies
Voc.esFacies
Abl.ebusFaciebus

Chap. 16. Of the declining of Ad­jectives.

Adjectives of three Termi­nations are de­clined like Bonus. Of three Ar­ticles like Felix, or Tri­stis.

ADjectives are declined with three Terminations, or three Articles.

Adjectives of three Terminations are varied after the first and second Declension; viz. The termination r like Magister; us like Dominus; a like Musa; um like Regnum.

Their example or type isSingulariterNom.BonusBonaBonum
Gen.BoniBonaeBoni
Dat.BonoBonaeBono
Acc.BonumBonamBonum
Voc.BoneBonaBonum
Abl.BonoBonaBono
PluraliterNom.BoniBonaeBona
Gen.BonorumBonarumBonorum
Dat.BonisBonisBonis
Acc.BonosBonasBona
Voc.BoniBonaeBona
Abl.BonisBonisBonis

[Page 66] Ʋnus, one; totus, whole; solus, alone; ullus, unie; alter, another; uter, whether, and their compounds, make their Genitive in ïus, and the Dative in i.

So also doth alius, alia, aliud, Gen. alius, Dat. alii, &c.

Ambo both, duo, two, are irregular, and make their neuter gender in o, and bee thus declined.

PluraliterNom.AmboAmbaeAmbo
Gen.AmborumAmbarumAmborum
Dat.AmbobusAmbabusAmbobus
Acc.AmbosAmbasAmbo
Voc.AmboAmbaeAmbo
Abl,AmbobusAmbabusAmbobus

Adjectives of one or two Terminations follow the rule of the third Declension, and are declined with three Articles.

Their Examples or Types beeSingularlyNom.Hic, haec, & hoc, Felix.SingularlyNom.Hic, & haec Tristis, & hoc, Triste.
Gen.Hujus, Felicis.Gen.Hujus, Tristis,
Dat.Huic, Felici.Dat.Huic, Tristi.
Acc.Hunc, & hanc Felicem, & hoc Felix.Acc.Hunc, & hanc, Tri­stem, & hoc Triste.
Voc.Felix.Voc.T [...]ristis, & Triste.
Abl.Hoc, hac, & hoc Felice vel FeliciAbl.Tristi.
PlurallyNom.Hi, & hae, Felices, & haec. Felicia.PlurallyNom.Hi, & hae, Tristes, & baec, Tristia.
Gen.Horum, harum, & ho­rum Felicium.Gen.Horum, harum, & ho­rum, Tristium.
Dat.His, Felicibus.Dat.His, Tristibus.
Acc.Hos, & has, Felices, & haec, Felicia.Acc.Hos, & has Tristes, & haec, Tristia.
Voc.Felices, & Felicia.Voc.Tristes, Tristia.
Abl.His, Felicibus.Abl.Tristibus.

[Page 68] Nouns compounded of a Substantive and Ad­jective are declined in both; as, Res-publica, Rei­publicae: Jus-jurandum, juris-jurandi.

But such as are compounded of two Substantives, are declined onely in the former; as, Pater-familiâs, Patris-familiâs.

Chap. 17. Of Comparison.

There bee three degrees of Compari­son. The Positive. The Compara­tive. The Superla­tive. But the com­parison of som words is [...]egular. [...]. Defective Improper.

NOuns, whose signification may encreas or bee diminished, do form Comparison.

Comparison is the varying of a word by De­gree.

There bee three De­grees of Comparison,The Positive.
The Comparative.
The Superlative.

The Positive Degree is the first word signifying a thing Simply, and without Excess; as, Tristis, sad; durus, hard.

The Comparative somwhat exceed's the significa­tion of his Positive by more; as, Tristior, sadder, or more sad; durior, harder, or more hard.

The Superlative exceedeth far above the Positive by verie, or most; as, Tristissimus, verie sad; duris­simus, most hard.

The Com­parativeis formed of the first case of the Positive, that en­deth in i, by put­ting theretoor, and us, as of Tristi is made tristior, and tristius; of Duri, duri­or, and durius.
The Su­perlativessimus; as, of Tristi is made tristissimus; of Duri, durissimus.

Positives in r, make their Superlative by putting to rimus; as, Pulcer, fair plucerrimus.

[Page 70] But dexter, on the right hand, dexterior, more on the right hand, dextimus, most on the right hand; and sinister, on the left hand, sinisterior, more on the left hand, sinistimus, most on the left hand, as the Antients formed them, are excepted.

These six ending in lis, do make the Super­lative by changing lis into limus; viz. Docilis, docilli­mus, docible; agilis, agillimus, nimble; gracilis, gracil­limus, slender; humilis, humillimus, humble; similis, si­millimus, like; facilis, facillimus, easie.

Such as are derived of dico, loquor, volo, facio, are compared as of Positives in en [...]; as, Maledicus, male­dicentior, maledicentissimus, cursing; magniloquus, ma­gniloquentior, magniloquentissimus, brag; benevolus, be­nevolentior, benevo'entissimus, kinde; magnificus, magni­ficentior, magnificentissimus, statelie.

If a Vowel com before us in the end, the Com­parative degree is made by magis, and the Superla­tive by maximè; as, Pius, godlie; magis pius, more godlie; maximè pins, most godly.

These also are excepted from the General Rule aforegoing:

Bonus, good, melior, bet­ter, eptimus, the best. Ma­lus, bad, pejor, wors, pessimus, the worst. Magnus, great, major, greater, ma­ximus, the greatest. Par­vus, little, minor, less, mi­nimus, the least.Multus, much, plus, more, plurimus, the most. Vetus, old, veterior, older, veterrimus, oldest; Maturus, ripe maturior, riper, maturi­mus, & maturissimus, verie ripe; Nequam, naught, ne­quior, naughtier, nequissi­mus, the noughtiest.

And manie such like, whose Positives are derived of Adverbs, and Prepositions; as,

Citer, hitherly, citerior, citimus, of citra on this side.

Exterus, ou­terlie, exteriorextimus,of extra without.
extremus

Inferus netherlie, inferior, infimus, of infra, beneath, Posterus, afterlie; posterior, postremus, of post after.

Superus, over­lie superior,supremus,of: supra above.
summus,

To which are wont to bee added, Ʋltra, beyond, ul­terior, further, ultimus, the furthest; Propè, near, pro­pior, nearer, proximus, the next; Pridem, long afore, prior, former, primus, the first; and Diu, long, diutior, longer, diutissimus, verie long.

These words are seldom met withal in reading Autors, and therefore seldom to bee used; viz. Assiduior, more dailie; Strenuior, more stout; Egregiis­simus, verie excellent; Mirificissimus, verie wonder­ful; Pientissimus, vel piissimus, verie godlie; ipsis­ssmus, the verie hee; perpetuissimus, most perpetual; tuissimus, most yours; exiguissimus, the least that may bee; multissimus, the most; proximior, nearer then the nearest.

Som want the Positive. Ocyor, swifter; ocyssimus, verie swift; potior, better able; potissimus, the best able; deterior, wors; deterrimus, the worst; penitior, innex, penitissimus, most innerlie.

Som want the Comparative. Novus, new; novis­simus, the newest; inclytus, famous; inclytissimus, most famous; invitus, unwilling; invitissimus, most un­willing; meritus, deserved; meritissimus, most deser­ved; sacer, holie; sacerrimus, most holie; falsus, fals; falsissimus, verie fals; fidus, trustie; fidissimus, most trustie; nuper, nuperus, late; nuperrimus, verie late; diversus, divers; diversissimus, verie divers.

Som want the Superlative; as, Opimus, wealthie; opimior, more wealthie; juvenis, young; junior, youn­ger; senex, old; senior, older; declivis, down-hill; declivior, more down-hill; longinquus, afar off; lon­ginquior [Page 74] further off; salutáris, wholesom; salutarior, more wholesom; supinus, careless; supinior, more careless; adolescens, youthful; adolescentior, more youthful; ingens, huge; ingentior, more huge; satur, full; saturior, fuller; antè, before; anterior, more be­fore; infinitus, infinite; infinitior, more infinite; taci­turnus, silent; taciturnior, more silent; communis, com­mon; communior, more common.

Licentior, more licentious, is onely the Compa­rative.

Sometimes also Comparison is made of Substan­tives, but abusively; as, Nero, Neronior, more cruel then Nero; Poenus, Poenior, more persidious then a Carthaginian.

Quae Genus: OR, ROB. ROBINSON'S Rules of Nouns Heteroclits, or Irregular.

Chap. 18. Of varying Heteroclits.

Heteroclits are 1: Variant.

NOuns which 1. varie or change their Gender or Declining. 2. Those which want of anie new fashion. 3. And those which have too much, are Heteroclits.

These nouns change their gender and declining, which are,

1. Feminines in the singular number, and neu­ters in the plural; as,

[Page 76] 1. Pergamus, mi, the town Pergamus, make's Per­gama, morum; Supellex, lectilis, houshold-stuff, make's supellectilia, unless it want the plural.

2. Neuters in the singular, and masculines and neuters in the plural; as, Rastrum, stri, a rake, make's rastri, & rastra, strorum; fraenum, ni, a bridle, make's fraeni, & fraena, norum; filum, li, a thred, make's fili, & fila, lorum; Capistrum, stri, an halter, make's capi­stri, & stra, strorum.

3. Neuters in the singular, and masculines onely in the plutal; Argos, gi, the citie Argos, make's Argi, gorum; coelum, li, heaven, make's coeli, lorum.

4. Neuters in the singular, and feminine in the plural; as, Nundinum, ni, a fair, make's nundinae, na­rum; epulum, li, a banquet, make's epulae, larum; bal­neum, nei, a bath, make's balneae, nearum, though JU­VENAL hath balnea in the plural number.

5. Masculines in the singular, and neuters in the plural; as, Maenalus, li, a hill in Arcadia, make's Mae­nala, lorum; Dindymus, mi, the top of Ida, make's Dindyma, morum; Ismarus, ri, a hill in Thrace, make's Ismara, rorum; Tartarus, ri, Hell, make's Tartara, ro­rum; Taygetus, ti, a hill in Lacedemonia, make's Tay­geta, torum; Taenarus, ri, a hill in Laconia, make's Tae­nera, rorum; Massicus, ci, a hill in Italie, make's Mas­sica, corum; Gargarus, ri, a top of Ida, make's Gargara, rorum.

6. Masculines singular, and masculine and neu­ters in the plural; Sibilus, li, an hissing, make's sibi­li, & sibila, lorum; jocus, ci, a jest, make's joci, & joca, corum; locus, ci, a place, make's loci, & loca, corum; Avernus, ni, a lake in Campania, make's Averni, & Averna, norum.

Chap. 19. Of Heteroclits that want Case.

2. Defective in Case.

2. THose Heteroclits which follow are defective in Case, or Number.

1. Aptotes are such as varie no case; as, Fas; right; nîl, nothing; nihil, nothing; instar, like; such as end in u and i; as, cornu, a horn; genu, a k [...]e; gummi, gum; frugi, thristie; Likewise Tempe, a plea­sant field; tot, so manie; quot, how manie; and all nouns of number from three to an hundred.

2. A Monoptote is a noun of one onely case; as, Noctu, by night; natu, by birth; jussu, by bidding; injussu, without bidding; astu, by craft; promtu, in readiness; permissu, by sufferance; but wee read astus in the Accusative case plural, and inficias a ve­nial, which vvord is onely found.

3. Those are Diptotes vvhich have tvvo cases one­ly, as, Nom. fors, Abl. forte, hap; Gen. spontis, Abl. sponte, of one's own accord; Nom. plus, Gen. pluris, more; Gen. repetundarum, of briberie, Abl. repetundis; Gen. jugeris, of an acre; Abl. jugere; Gen. verberis, of a stroke, Abl. verbere; Nom. suppetiae, ard; Acc. sup­petias; Nom. tantundem, so much, Gen. tantidem; Gen. impetis, violence, Abl. impete; Acc. vicem, a turn, Abl. vice; vvhereof verberis, vicem, plus, and jugeris have all their cases in the plural number.

4. Those are Triptotes vvhich have three cases onely; as, Gen. precis, Acc. precem, Abl. prece, praier; Gen. opis, Acc. opem, Abl. ope, help; vis, force, vvan­teth no case except the Dative. And these have all their cases in the plural number.

5. Relatives; as, qui, which; Interrogatives; as, ecquis, who; Distributives; as, nullus, none; neuter, neither, and omnis, all.

[Page 80] Indefinites; as, quilibet, anie one; alter, another, want the Vocative case, and all Pronouns, except Noster, ours, nostras, on our side; meus, mine; tu, thou.

Chap. 20. Of Heteroclits that want Number.

Defective in the singu­lar number. And Plural.

1. ALl Proper Names, having a restreining na­ture, do want the plural number; as, Mars, tis, Mars; Cato, tonis, Cato; Gallia, liae, France; Roma, mae, Rome; Ida, dae, an hill near Troie; Tagus, gi, the river Taio in Spain; Laelaps, pis, a dog's name; Parnassus, si, a hill in Phocis; Bucephalus, li, Alexan­der's hors. Add to these, the names of Corn; as, Triticum, wheat. Things sold by Weight; as, Lana, wooll; Of Herbs; as, salvia, sage; Of Liquors; as, Cer­visia, beer; Of Metals; as, aurum, gold; wherein observ the opinion of Autors, for somtimes they keep, somtimes they reject the plural number.

2. Hordeam, dei, barlie; far, ris, bread-corn; mel, lis, honie; mulsum, si, wine mingled with honie; de­frutum. ti, wine bosted to the half, and thus, thuris, frankincens, have onely the three like cases in the plural number.

3. These Masculines want the plural number; He­sperus, ri, the evening star; vesper, ris, the evening; pontus, ti, the sea; limus, mi, mud; fimus, mi, dung; penus, ni, vel ûs, victuals; sanguis, guinis, blood; aether, ris, the skie; and nemo, no bodie; but nemo want's the Genitive and Vocative singular, as well as the plu­ral number.

4. These Feminines have seldom the plural num­ber; Pubes, bis, ripeness of age, salus, lútis, health; talio, ónis, like for like; indoles, lis, towardliness; tussis. sis, the cough;

[Page 82] pix, cis, pitch; humus, mi, the ground; lues, is, the murrain; sitis, tis, thirst; fuga, gae, flight; quies, étis, rest; cholera, rae, choler; fames, mis, hunger; bilis, lis, choler; senecta, ctae, old age; juventus, tútis, youth; But soboles, lis, an offspring; labes, bis, a spot; and all nouns of the fifth Declension will have three like cases in the plural number, except, res, rei, a thing; species, ciéi, a kinde; facies, ciéi; a face; acies, ciéi, an edg; and dies, diëi, a daie; which words are whole in the plural number. To these they are wont to add manie Feminines; as. Stultitia, tiae, foolishness; invidia, diae, envie; sapientia; tiae, wisdom; desidia, diae, floth; and a manie vvords of like sort, vvhich read­ing afford's: and these somtimes, but very seldom, have the plural number.

5. These Neuters have not the plural number; Delicium, cii, one's delight; senium, nii, old age; le­thum, thi, death; coenum, ni, dirt; salum, li, the salt sea; barathrum, thri, hell; virus, poison; vitrum, tri, glass; viscum, sci, bird-lime; penum, ni, provision; justitium, tii, vacation time; nihilum, li, nothing; ver, veris, the spring; lac, ctis, milk; gluten, tinis, giue; halec, lécis, an herring; gelu, frost; solium, lii, a throne; jubar, baris, the sun-beam. Here also you may put manie such like, vvhich you shall meet vvith as you read.

6, These masculines have onely the plural num­ber; Manes, nium. spirits; majores, rum, Ancestors; cancelli, lorum, a lattice; liberi, rorum, children; an­tes, tium, the first rank of vines; menses, sium, wo­men's flowers; lemures, rum, hobgoblins; fasti, sto­rum, a Register-book; minores, rum, posteritie; natales, lium, one's stock; penates, tium, houshold gods; and names of places; as, Gabii, biorum; Locri, erorum; and vvhatsoëver the like you read any vvhere.

7. These are of the Feminine gender and plural Number;

[Page 84] Exuviae, arum, an Adder's slough; phalerae, rarum, hors-trappings; Nom. grates, Acc. grates, thanks; manubiae; arum, spoil; Idus, duum, the Ides of months, antiae, arum, fore-locks; induciae, arum, truce; insidiae, arum, lying in wait; minae, arum, threatnings; excu­biae, arum, watch and ward; Nonae, arum, the Nones of a month; nugae, garum, trifles; tricae, carum, gew­gaws; Calendae, arum, the first daie of the month; quisquiliae, arum, sweepings; thermae, marum, hot bathes; cunae, narum, a tradle; dirae, rarum, cursing; exequiae, arum, rites at funerals; inseriae, arum, sacri­fices to the infernal spirits; feriae, arum, holidaies; primitiae, arum, the first fruits; plagae, arum, hunter's nets; valvae, varum, double, or two-leav'd doors; divitiae, arum, riches; nuptiae, arum, a wedding; lactes, ctium, the smal guts. To these may bee added The­bae, barum, Thebes; Athenae, narum, Athens in Greece; of vvhich sort you may finde manie names of places.

8. These Neuters have seldom the singular num­ber; Moenia, ium, iorum, the walls of a Town; tesqua, squorum, rough places; praecordia, orum, the midriff; lustra, strorum, dens of wilde-beasts; arma, morum, weapons; mapalia, liorum, cottages; bellaria, riorum, juneates; munia, niorum, an office; castra, orum, tents, justa, storum, Rites at funerals; sponsalia, liorum, be­trothing; rostra, strorum, a pulpit; crepundia, orum, a rattle; cunabula, lorum, a cradle; exta, torum, the en­trafls of beasts; effata, torum, a Soothsayer's mutter­ings. To these may bee added the Heathenish Festi­val names; as, Bacchanalia, liorum, a Feast to Bac­chus; and if you shall read more, you may put them under this Rule.

Chap. 21. Of redundant or abounding Heteroclits.

3. Redundant.

1. THese nouns (as it vvere) have too much, follow­ing divers forms; for they varie both their gen­der, and termination; viz. Tonitrus, & tonitru, thun­der; clypeus, pei, & clypeum, pei, a buckler; baculus, li, & baculum, li, & bacillum, li, a staff; sensus, sùs, a sens, & sensum, si, a conceit, or meaning; tignus, ni, & tigmim, ni, a rafter; tapétum, ti, tapéte, tis, & tapes, pétis, tape­strie; punctus, cti, & punctum, cti, a point; sinápi, & si­nápis, pis, mustard; sinus, ni, & sinum, ni a milk-vessel; menda, dae, & mendum, di, a fault; viscus, sci, & viscum, sci, bird-lime; cornu, & cornum, ni, an horn, and cornus, nûs, the wing of an Armie; (as Lucane saith) even­tus, tûs, & eventum, ti, an hap; and a thousand such, vvhich reading vvill afford thee.

2. Som Greek vvords do make a nevv Latine vvord in their Accusative case: as, Panther, théris, make's Panthéra, rae, a Panther; crater, téris, make's cratéra, rae, a goblet; cassis, sidis, make's cassida, dae, an helmet; aether, theris, make's aethera, rae, the skie.

3. In these nouns the Nominative cafe is divers, but the sens and gender are all one; viz. Gibbus, bi, & gibber, bĕris, a bunth, or swelling; cucumis, mis, & cucumer, mĕris, a cucumber; stipis, pis, & stips, pis, wa­ges; cinis, nĕris, & ciner, nĕris, ashes; vomis, mĕris, & vomer, mĕris, a plowshare; scobis, bis, & scobs, bis, saw­dust; pulvis, vĕris, & pulver, vĕris, dust; pubes, bis, & puber, bĕris, ripeness of age. Add hereunto nouns ending in or, and os; as, Honor, nôris, & honor, nôris, honor; labor, bóris, & labos, bóris, labor; arbor, bŏris, & arbos, bŏris, a tree; odor, dóris, & odos, dóris, savor; [Page 88] Also apes, pis, & apis, pis, a bee; plebs, bis, & plebis, bis, the common people. There bee also manie nouns com­ing from the Greeks, having this double manner; as, Delphin, phinis, & Delphinus, phini, a Dolphin; Ele­phas, phantis, & Elephantus, ti, an Elephant; Congrus, gri, & Conger, gri, a Conger Eel; Meleagrus, gri, & Meleager, gri; Teucrus, cri, & Teucer, cri. And hitherto you shall refer all such as these, which your reading af­fordeth.

2. These nouns are both of the second and fourth Declension; viz. Laurus, ri, & rûs, a Baie tree; quer­cus, ci, & cûs, an Oak; pinus, ni, & nûs, a Pine tree; ficus, ci & cûs, a fig, or a fig-tree; colus, li, & lûs, a dis­staff; penus, ni, & nûs, provision; cernus, ni, & nûs, a dog-tree; lacus, ci, & cûs, a lake; and domus, mi, & mûs, an hous, or home. Though these bee not thus found in everie case, you shall read also more then these, which you may well leav to old Autors.

When you decline Domus, omit the cases ending in me, mu, mi, and mis.

5. Manie Adjectives also do abound, but especi­ally such as com of these Substantives; Arma, morum, Arms; jugum, gi, a yoke; nervus, vi, a s [...]new; somnus, ni, sleep; clivus, vi, a side of an hill; animus, mi, a minde; limus mi, mud; fraenum, ni, a bridie; cera, rae, wax; bacillum, li, a staff; of which Substantives you may make Adjectives in us and is; as of Arma, is made inermus and inermis, unweaponed; Hilarus, merrie, is seldom used, but hilaris is well known to bee used.

Chap. 22. Of the Kindes of Nouns.

Nouns are, 1. Primitive. 2. Derivative.

1. THese Nouns which follow, and such like bee Primitives; viz.

1. A noun Collective, which signifieth a multi­tude in the singular number; as, Turba, a tout; grex, a flock.

2. Fictitious, which is feigned of the sound; as, Sibilus, an hissing; tintinnabulum, a tinckling.

3. Interrogatives, vvhich vvee use in asking; as, Quot, how manie? qualis, what an one?

4. Redditive, vvhich give's ansvver to the Interro­gative; as, Tot, so manie; talis, such an one.

And these tvvo do somtimes turn intoIndefinites, vvhich do not define a certain thing.
Relatives, vvhich are referred to the vvord aforegoing; as, Talis erat, qualem nunquam vidi: Hee was such an one as I never saw.

5. Numeral, vvhich signifie's a number on anie fashion, vvhose kindes are also manie, viz.

1. Cardinal, from vvhich numerals proceed; as, Ʋnus, one; duo, two.

2. Ordinal, vvhich denote's an order; as, primus, the first; secundus, the second.

3. Distributive, vvhich divide's the vvhole into parts; as, Singuli, several; bini, two and two.

4. Partitives, vvhich signifieth either manie seve­rally; as, Quisque, everie one; uterque, both: or one of manie; as, Alter, one of the two; aliquis, som one.

5. Ʋniversal, vvhich signifie's a thing universally; as, Omnis, all; nullus, none.

6. Particular, vvhich signifieth part of the univer­sal; as. Quidam, one; aliquis, som bodie.

[Page 92] 7. Multiplicative, which signifieth the multiplici­tie of a thing; as, Simplex, single; duplex, double.

8. Proportional, which signifieth proportion; as, Simplum, a single part; duplum a double part.

9. Temporal, which signifieth time, as, Binus, two years old; trinus, three years old: and biennis, of two year's standing; triennis, of three years stand­ing, or continuante.

10. Ponderal, which signifieth the weight of a thing; as, Binarius, of two pound weight; ternarius, three pound weight.

II. Derivatives are also of manie sorts, whereof these bee the chief.

1. Verbal, which is derived of a Verb; as, Lectio, xeading; flexilis, flexible.

2. Patrial, which signifieth the Countrie; as, Lon­dinensis, a Londoner.

3. Gentile, which betokeneth the Nation, Side, or Sect; as, Graecus, a Greek; Ciceroniánus, one of Cice­cero's side; Christiánus, a Christian, or a follower of Christ.

4. Patronymic, which is derived either from the Father, or som other person of the familie; as, Aeaci­des, the son of Aeacus.

5. Patrony­mic nouns end indes,asLatoïdes, the son of Latona.Mascu­lines.
ion,Iapetion, the son of Iapetus.
as,asIlias, the daughter of Ilia.Femi­nines.
is,Meneláis, the wife of Menelaüs.
ne,Nerine, the daugh­ter of Nereus.

6. Diminutive, which lesseneth the signification of its Primitive; as, Stultulus, a little fool; lapillulus, a little stone.

[Page 94] 7. Possessive, which signifieth owing, or Possessi­on; as, Regius, the King's, or, of the King; pater­nus, the father's, or, of a father.

8. Denominative, which hath its name from ano­ther, vvhich differeth from it in termination onely; as, Justitia, justice, of justus, just.

9. Material, vvhich signifieth matter; as, Aureus, golden.

10. Local, vvhich denote's a place; as, Hortensis, of the garden; agrestis, of the field.

11. Participial, vvhich is made of a participle, as, Sapiens, wise.

12. Adverbial, vvhich is derived of an Adverb; as, Crastinus, of tomorrow: And here vvee must diligent­ly observ,

1. All vvords vvhose original is unknovvn or un­certain, may bee accounted Primitives in the Latine tongue; yea, though they flovv from another Lan­guage; as, Ego, musa.

2. Lest you bee bee ridiculous in finding the be­ginnings of vvords, you may observ diligently the terminations vvhich com to the Primitives; as of Amo, I love, is made amator, a lover; amicus, a friend; amabilis, lovely, &c.

Chap. 23. Of a Pronoun.

A Pron [...]n is put for a Noun. There bee fif­teen Pronouns. Whereof som bee Primitive. And som Derivative. Pronouns have four Declen­sions. Of the First are Ego, tu, sui. Of the second Ille, ipse, iste. Hic, i [...]. OF the third, Meus, tuus, su­us, noster, ve­ster, cujus. Of the Fourth, Nostras, ve­stras, cujas. Of the Com­position of Pronouns.

A Pronoun is a Part of Speech put for a Noun, and supplying its stead.

There bee fifteen Pronouns; Ego, I, tu, thou, suî, of himself, ille, hee, ipse, himself, iste, yond, hic, this is it, meus, mine, tuus, thine, suus, his own, noster, ours, vester, yours, nostras, our countrie-men, vostras, yours.

[Page 96] To which may bee added, Qui, which; quis, who; cujus, whose; cujas, whose countrie-man.

And som of these bee calledPronoun Substantives, viz. Ego, tu, suî, which are referr'd to three genders, without varying their termination.
Pronoun Adjectives, viz. all the rest which bee varied by three genders; as, Meus, mea, meum.

According to their Species, Pro­nouns are called1. Primitives, which are the first words; as, Ego, tu, suî, ille, ipse, iste, hic, is, and qui.
and these bee call'dDemonstratives, which are used in shewing a thing not spoken of be­fore; as, Ego, tu, suî, ille, ipse; hic, is.
Relatives, which wee use in rehears­ing a thing that was spoken of be­fore; as, ille, ipse, iste, hic, is, and qui.
2. Derivatives, are such as are derived of their Primitives; as, Meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, nostras, vestras, cujus, cujas, are derived from the Genitive cases of their Primitives, Meî, tuî, sui, nosirî, vestrî, nostrûm, vestrûm, and quis, from the Nominative qui.

Of these som are

Possessives, which signifie owing or possession; as, Meus, tuus, suus, noster vester.

Gentiles, which signifie belonging to Countries, or Nations, to Sects or Factions; as, nostras, vestras, and cujas, which were once used as Nouns in átis, and áte.

Finites, which define, or set out a certain person; as, Ego, tu.

Indefinites, which do not define a certain person; as, Qui, cujus.

Reciprocals, which betake themselvs to the same third person which went before it; as, Suî, suus.

Peter intreateth thou wouldst not forsake him.

Everie man spareth his own Errors. Everie man is drawn of his own pleasure.

[Page 100] There bee four Declensions of Pronouns.

The Genitive case singular of the first Declension endeth in i: of the Second in ius, or jus: of the Third in i, ae, i: of the Fourth in atis.

Ego, tu, suî, bee of the first Declension, and are, thus declined.

SingulariterNom.Ego, I.PluraliterNom.Nos, wee.
Gen.Meî, of mee.Gen.Nostrûm, nostrî, of us.
Dat.Mihi, to mee.Dat.Nobis, to us.
Acc.Me, mee.Acc.Nos, us.
Voc. Voc. 
Abl.à Me, from meeAbl.Nobis, from us.
SingulariterNom.Tu, thou.PluraliterNom.Vos, yee.
Gen.Tuî, of thee.Gen.Vestrûm, vestrî, of you.
Dat.Tibi, to thee.Dat.Vobis, to you.
Acc.Te, thee.Acc.Vos, you.
Voc., thou.Voc.Vos, yee.
Abl.à Te, from thee.AblVobis, from you.

Sing. & Plur.Gen.Suî, of himself, orBut it want's the Nominat. and Vo­cative cases in both Numbers.
Dat.Sibi. themselvs.
Acc.Se.
Abl.Se.

Ille, ipse, iste, hic is, qui, and quis bee of the second Declension and bee thus declined.

SingulariterNom.Iste, ista, istud.PluraliterNom.Isti, istae, ista.
Gen.Istius.Gen.Istorum, istarum, istorum.
Dat.Isti.Dat.Istis.
Acc.Istum, istam, istud.Acc.Istos, istas, istas.
Voc. Voc. 
Abl.Isto, istâ, isto.Abl.Istis.

Ille and ipse are declined like iste, saving that ipse in the Neuter Gender, in the Nominative and the Accusative case singular maketh ipsum.

[Page 100] Hic is declined as is aforesaid in the Articles, pag. 7.

SingulariterNom,Is, ea, id.PluraliterNom.Ii, eae, ea.
Gen.Ejus.Gen.Eorum, earum, eo­rum
Dat.Ei.Dat.Iis, vel eis.
Acc.Eum, eam, id.Acc.Eos, eas, ea.
Voc. Voc. 
Abl.Eo, eâ eo.Abl.Iis, vel eis.

So also is the Compound of is and demum decli­ned.Sing.Nom.Idem, eadem, idem.
Gen.Ejusdem.
Dat.Eidem.
Acc.Eundem, eandem, idem.

SingulariterNom.Qui, quae, quod. PluraliterNom.Qui, quae, quae.
Gen.Cujus. Gen.Quorum, quarum, quorū.
Dat.Cui. Dat.Quibus, vel queis.
Acc.Quem, quam, quod. Acc.Quos, quas, quae.
Voc.  Voc. 
Abl.Quo,quâ, quo,Abl.Quibus,
Quî,Queis.

After this manner also is declined Quis, quae, quid.

But its Com­pound thus:Nom.Quisquis, quicquid.
Acc.Quicquid.
Abl.Quoquo, quaqua, quoquo.

Meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, & cujus bee of the third Declension, and are declined like Adjectives of three Terminations on this manner.

NominativoMeus, mea, meum.GenitivoMei, meae, mei.And so in the other cases.
Tuus, tua, tuum.Tui, tuae, tui.
Suus, sua, suum.Sui, suae; sui,
Noster, nostra, nostrum.Nostri, nostrae, nostri.
Vester, vestra, vestrum.Vestri, vestrae, vestri.
Cujus, cuja, cujum. 

But Meus hath Mi, mea, meum, in the Vocative case singular.

[Page 102] Nostras, vestras, and cujas, bee of the fourth De­clension, and are declined like Adjectives of three Articles.

As,Nom.Nostras,Gen.Nostratis.&c.
Vestras,Vestratis.
Cujas,Cujatis.

Pronouns are Compounded,

1. Among themselvs; as; Ego-ipse, mei-ipsius, mihi-ipsi. istic, & illic.

Istic and illic bee thus declined,Nom.Istic, istaec, istoc, vel istuc.
Acc.Istinc, istanc, istoc, vel istuc.
Abl.Istoc, istac, istoc.

Plur. Nom. & Acc. Istaec.

2. With Nouns; as, Aliquis, bujusmodi.

3. With Verbs; as, Quivis, quilibet.

4. With Adverbs; as, Nequis:

So alsoEccum, Eccam,of ecce and is.Ellum, Ellam,
Eccos, Eccas,Ellos, Ellas, of ecce and ille.

5. With a Conjunction; as, Quisnam, siquis.

6. With a Preposition; as, Mecum, nobiscum.

7. With Syllabical additions; met, te, pte, ce, cine, of which met is added to the first and second per­son; as, Egomet, tuimet: also wee saie sibimet and se­met, but wee do not saie tumet, lest it should seem a Verb of tumeo, to swel.

Te is added onely to tu and te; as, Tute, tete.

Pte is added to these Ablatives Feminine; Meâ, tuâ, suâ, nostrâ, vestrâ; as, Meâpte, tuâpte, suâpte, no­strâple, vestrâpte; and somtimes to their Masculines and Neuters; as, Meopte labore, suopte jumento.

Ce is added to all cases of these Pronouns, Hic, ille, iste, as oft as they end in s; as, Hujusce, hosce, hisce; wee saie also, hicce, huncce, and ejusce, and somtimes hice is read.

Cine is put to the Nominative and Accusative of [Page 104] Hic; as, Hiccine, haeccine, hoccine; Hunccine, hanccine, hoccine, &c.

Quis and qui are compounded on this manner;

Quis in composition is set after these particles, viz.

En,asEcquis, whāt one.
Ne,Nequis, no one.
Alius,Aliquis, som one.
Num,Nunquis, whether anie one.
Si,Siquis, if anie one.

And these in the Feminine gender singular, and in the Neuter plural make qua, not quae; as, Siqua mu­lier, If anie woman. Nequa flagitia, Not anie vil­lanie. But Ecquis make's ecqua and ecquae in the Fe­minine gender.

Quis in composition is set before these particles, viz.

Nam,asQuisnam.And these everie where keep quae; as, Quaenam do­ctrina, what learning. quaecunque negotia, what­soever business.
Piam,Quispiam.
Putas,Quisputas.
Quam,Quisquam.
Que,Quisque.

Qui in composition is set before these particles, viz.

Dam.asQuidam, a certain one.
Vis,Quivis, who you will.
Libet,Quilibet, who that will.
Cunque,Quicunque, whosoever.
Chap. 24. Of a Verb and its Kindes.

III. A Verb signifieth to bee, to do, or to suffer. It is Personal, or, Imperso­nal. There be­long to a Verb five Kindes, Active. Passive. Neuter. Deponent. Commune. Four Moods. Indicative. Imperative. Subjunctive Infinitive, To which belong The Ge­runds, Di, do, dum. And the Supines, Um & u. Five Ten­ses, Present. Imperfect. Preterper­fect. Preterplu­perfect. Future. Four Con­jugations: whereof the First hath a long. Second e long. Third e long. Fourh hath i long be­fore re and ris.

AVERB is a part of Speech which signifieth, to bee, to do, or to suffer; as, Sum, I am; Amo, I love; Amor, I am loved.

A Verb is first divided intoPersonal, which is distinguished by three Per­sons in both Numbers; as, Singul. Amo, I love; Amas, then lovest; Amat, hee loveth. Plur. Amamus, wee love; Amatis, yee love; Amant, they love.
Impersonal, which hath no certain significati­on of Person or Number, unless it bee by means of an oblique case; as, Oportet me, It behooveth mee; oportet te, it behooveth thee, statur à me, it is stood of mee, or I stand; statur à te, it is stood of thee, or thou standest.

There belong to a Verb, I. Kinde. II. Mood. III. Tens. IV. Conjugation.

I. There bee five Kindes of Verbs.

1. Active, which signifieth to do, and endeth in o, and by taking to it r may make a Passive; as, Amo, I love.

2. Passive, which signifieth to suffer, and endeth in or, and by taking away r it may bee an Active; as Amor, I am loved.

3. A Neuter endeth in o or m, and cannot take r to make it a Passive; as, Curro, I run; Sum, I am.

There bee three kindes of Neuters, according to their signification.

Substantive, which signifieth the Beeing of a thing; as, Sum, I am.

Absolute, which by it self maketh up the sens; as, dormio, I [...]eep.

[Page 108] Transitive, whose action passeth into a thing of near signification; as, Curro stadium, I tun a race.

4. A Deponent endeth in or, and hath either the Active signification, as, Loquor verbum, I speak a word; or the Neuter; as, Glorior, I boast.

5. A Commune endeth in or, and hath both the Active, and Passive signification; as, Osculor, I kiss, or am kissed.

II. There bee four Moods.

1. The Indicative simply sheweth a thing, or ask­eth a question; as, Ego amo, I love; Amas tu, lovest thou.

2. The Imperative biddeth or intreateth; as, Ama tu, do thou love; Da mihi, give mee.

3. The Subjunctive is joined with another Verb in the same sentence; as, Cùm amarem, eram miser, when I loved, I was a wretch.

And this mood is called the Optative, when it is used in wishing; and the Potential when it is constru­ed by may, can, would, or ought.

4. The Infinitive doth not define a certain person, or number; as Amare, to love. And to this mood belong three Gerunds, which have their case or en­ding of a Noun, their signification of a Verb.

Di,asAmandi, of loving, or beeing loved.
Do,Amando, in loving, or beeing loved.
Dum,Amandum, to love, or to bee loved.

Two Supines, whereofThe first endeth in um, and signifi­eth Actively; as, Amatum, to love.
The later endeth in u, and signifi­eth Passively; as, Amatu, to bee loved.

III. Verbs have five Tenses.

1. The Present tens which speaketh of the time present, and signifie's now to do, or to bee don; as, Amo, I love.

[Page 110] 2. The Preterimperfect tens speaketh of the time not yet perfectly past; and signifieth a thing to bee don, but not yet finished; as, Amabam, I loved, or I did love.

3. The Preterperfect tens speaketh of the time perfectly past, and signifieth a thing to bee now fi­nished; as, Amavi, I have loved.

4. The Preterpluperfect tens speaketh of the time more then perfectly past, and signifieth a thing to bee long since finished; as, Amaveram, I had loved.

5. The Future tens speaketh of the time to com, and signifieth somthing to bee don for the future; as, Amabo, I will love.

The Future tens of the Subjunctive mood is cal­led Exact; becaus it hath the signification both of the Preter tens, and Future tens together; as, Cùm Amavero, when I shall have loved.

IV. Conjugation is the Varying of a Verb by Moods and Tenses.

Verbs have four Conjugations, which are known one from another by certain tokens, or characteristi­cal letters.

1. The first Conjugation hath a long before re and ris; as, Amáre, amáris. 
2. The second Conjugation hath e long before re and ris; as, Docére, docéris.* In the Infini­tive Mood Pre­sent tens of Verbs in o.
3. The third Conjugatjon hath e short before re and ris; as, Légĕre, légĕris.And in the se­cond person sin­gular of the In­dicative mood Present tens of Verbs in or.
4. The fourth Conjugation hath i long before re and ris; as Audire, audiris. 
Chap. 27. Of the Form of the first Conjugation.

Verba in (o) primae Conjugationis va­riantur sicut Amo.

Verbs in (o) of the first Conju­gation bee vari­ed like Amo, &c.

Amo, amas, amávi, amáre, amátum.

Verba in (or) primae Con­jugationis variantur sicut Amor.

Verbs in (or) of the first Conjugation bee varied like A­mor.

  • A [...]on
  • amáris, amáre,
  • amá­tus sum amá­tus fui,
  • amávi
The Indicative Mood.
Present tens.Sing.1AMoI love. Amor,I am loved.
2Amasthou lovest. Amáris,thou art loved.
3Amat,hee loveth. Amate,hee is loved.
      Amatur,  
Plur.1Amamus,Wee love.    
2Amatis,yee love. Amámur,Wee are loved.
3Amant,they love. Amamini,yee are loved
       Amantur,they are loved.
Preterimperf.Sing.1Amábam,I didlove. Amabar,I was loved.
2Amabas,thou didst Amabáris,thou walt loved.
3Amabat,hee did Amabare,bee was loved.
     Amabatur,  
Plur.1AmabámisWee did Amabámur,Wee wereloved.
2Amabatis,yee did Amabamini,yee were loved.
3Amabant,they did Amabantur,they were loved.
     loved.Amatussum,I havebeen loved.
Preterperf.Sing.1Amávi,I havefui,
   es,thou hast
2Amavisti,thou hastfuisti,
   est,bee hath
3Amavit,hee hathfuit,
    Amatisumus,Wee have
Plur.1Amavimus,Wee havefuimus,
   estis,yee have
2Amavistis,yee havefuistis,
   sunt,they have
3Amavérŭtthey havefuérunt,
  Amavere   fuére. 
Preterpluperfect.Sing.1Amaveram,I hadloved.AmatuseramI hadbeen loved.
   fueram,
2Amaveras,thou hadsterasthou hadst
   fueras,
3Amaverat,hee haderathee had
   fuerat,
Plur.1Amave [...]ámtis,Wee hadAma [...]ieramusWee had
   fueramus
2Amaveratis,yee haderatisyee had
   fueratis,
3Amaverant,they haderantthey had
   fuerant,
Future.Sing.1Amábo,I shalllove.Amabor,I shall 
2Amabis,thou shaltAmáberisthou shaltbee loved.
   Amábere,
3Amabit,hee shallAmabitur,hee shall
Plur.1Amabimus,Wee shallAmabimur,Wee shall
2Amabitis,yee shallAmabimini,yee shall
3Amabunt,they shallAmabuntur.they shall

The Imperative Mood hath one onely Tens, viz. the Present Tens.
Present tens.Sing.2Ama,Love thou,Amáre,Bee thou loved.
Amato,Amator,
3Amet,let him love.Ametur,let him bee loved.
Amato.Amator,
 1Amemus,Let us love.Amemur,Let us bee loved.
Plur.2Amate,love yeeAmamini,hee yee loved.
Amatote,Amaminor,
3Ament,let them love.Amentur,bee they loved.
Amanto,Amantor,

[Page 114]

The Subjunctive Mood.
Present tens.Plur. 1 Sing.1CùmAmem,whenI love.Amer,I amloved.
2Ames,thou lovest.Améristhou art
3Amet,hee loveth.Amére,
   Ametur,hee is
1Amemus,Wee love.Amemur,Wee are
2Ametis,yee love.Amemini,yee are
3Ament.they love.Amentur.they are
Imperfect.Plur. 1 Sing.1CùmAmarem,whenI loved.Amarer,I wasloved.
2Amares,thou lovedstAmaréristhou wast
3Amaret,hee loved.Amarerc,
   Amaretur,hee was
1Amaremus,Wee loved.Amarémur,We were
2Amaretis,yee loved.Amaremint,yee were
3Amarent.they loved.Amarentur.they were
PreterperfectPlur. 1 Sing.1Amaverim,I haveloved.AmatussimI havebeen loved.
   fuerim,
2Amaveris,thou hastsisthou hast
   fueris
3Amaverit,hee hathsithee hath
   fuerit,
1AmaverimusWee haveAmatisimusWee have
   fuérimus
2Amaveritisyee havesitisyee have
   fueritis,
3Amaverint.they havesintthey have
   fuerint,
Preterpluperfect.Plur. Sing.1Amavissem,I hadloved.AmatusessemI hadbeen loved.
   fuissem,
2Amavisses,thou hadstessesthou hadst
   fuisses,
3Amavisset,hee hadessethee had
   fuisset,
1AmavissemusWee hadAma [...]iessemusWee had
   fuissemus
2Amavissetisyee hadessetisyee had
   fuissetis,
3Amavissent.they hadessentthey had
   fuissent,
Future.Plur. 1 Sing.1Amavero,I shalllove.AmatuseroI shallbee loved.
   fúero,
2Amaveris,thou shalteristhou shalt
   fueris,
3Amaverit,hee shallerithee shall
   fuerit,
1AmaverimusWee shallAmatierimusWee shall
   furimus
2Amaveritis,yee shalleriusyee shall
   fueritis,
3Amaverint.they shallerintthey shall
   fuerint

The Infinitive Mood.
Present and Imperfect tens.Amáre,to love.Amari,to be loved:
Preterperf. and Preterplup.Amavisse,to have or had loved.Amatum esse vel fuisseto have or had been loved.
The Future tens.Amatu. rum esseto love hereafterAmatum iri velto bee loved hereafter.
Amandum esse

Gerunds.
Amandi,of loving.of beeing loved.
Amando,in loving.in beeing loved.
Amandum,to love.to bee loved.

Supines.
Amatum, to love.Amatu, to bee loved.

Participles.
Of the Pre­sent tens.Amans,loving.Of the Pre­ter tens.Amatus,loved.
Of the Fu­ture in rus.Amatu­rus,about to love.Of the Fu­ture in dus.Aman­dus,to bee loved.
Chap. 28 Of the form of the Second Conjugation.

verba in (o) secun­dae Conjugatio­nis formantur sicut Doceo.

Verbs in (o) of the second Conjuga­tion bee formed like Doceo.

Doceo, doces, docui, docére, doctum.

Verba in (or) se­cundae Conjugationis formantur sicut Doceor.

Verbs in (or) of the second Conjuga­tion bee formed like Doceor.

  • Doceor
  • docé [...]is docé [...]e
  • do­ctus sum do­ctus fui
  • docéri
The Indicative Mood.
Present tens.sing.1Dóceo,I teach. Doceor, I am taught. 
2Doces,thou teachest. Docéris, thou art taught. 
3Docet,hee teacheth. Docere,   
     Docetur, hee is taught. 
Plur.1Docemus,Wee teach. Docemur, Wee are taught. 
2Docetis,yee teach. Docemini yee are taught. 
3Docent,they teach. Docentur, they are taught. 
Imperfect.sing1Docebam,I didteach.Docebar, I was taught. 
2Docebas,thou didstDocebáris. thou wert taught. 
3Docebat,hee didDocebare,   
    Docebatur, hee was taught. 
Plur. Docebamus,Wee didDocebámur, Wee were taught. 
 Docebatis,yee did,Docehámini, yee were taught. 
 Docebant,they didDocebantur. they were taught. 
Preterperf.Sing.1Docui,I havetaught.Doctussum,I havebeen taught.
   fui, 
2Docuisti,thou hastes.thou hast
   fuisti, 
3Docuit,hee hathest,hee hath
   fuit, 
Plur.1Docuimus,Wee haveDoctisumus,Wee have
   fuimus 
2Docuistis,yee haveestis,yee have
   fuistis, 
   sunt, 
3Docuéruntthey havefueruntthey have
 Doeuere, fuere, 
Preterpluperf.Sing.1Docueram,I hadtaughtDoctuseram been-taught.
   fueram,I had
2Docueras,thou hadsteras 
   fueras,thou hadst
3Docuera [...],hee haderat, 
   fuerat,hee had
Plur.1DocuerámusWee hadDoctieramus 
   fueramusWee had
2Docueratis,yee haderatis 
   fueratis,yee had
3Docuerant.they haderant 
   fuerant,they had
Future.Sing.1Docého,I willteach.Docebor,I will bee taught.  
2Docehis,thou wiltDoceberis   
3Docebit,hee willDocebere,thou wilt bee taught.  
    Docebitur,hee will bee taught.  
Plur.1Docehimus,Wee willDocebimur,Wee will bee taught.  
2Docebitis,yee willDocehimini,yee will bee taught.  
3Docehunt,they willDocebuntur,they will bee taught.  

The Imperative Mood.
Present tens.Sing.2DoceTeach thou.DocéreBee thoutaught.
 Doceto, Docetor, 
3Doceatlet him teach.Doceaturlet him bee
 Doceto, Docetor, 
 1Doceamus,let us teach.Doceamur,let us bee
Plur.2Docete Docemmi 
 Docetote,teach yee.Doceminorbee yee
3Doceant Doceantus 
 Docento.let them teach.Docentor,let them bee

The Subjunctive Mood.
Present tens.Sing.1CumDoceam,whenI teach.Docear,I amtauhgt. 
2Doceas,thou teachest.Docearis  
   Doceare,  
3Doceat,hee teacheth.Doceatur,hee is 
Plur.1Doceamus,Wee teach.Doceamur,Wee are 
2Doceatis,yee teach.Doceamini,yee are 
3Doceantthey teach.Doceantur,they are
Imperfect.Plur. Sing.1CùmDocérem,whenI didteach.Docérer,I wastaught.
2Doceres,thou didstDocereristhou wert
3Doceret,hee didDocerere
   Doceretur,hee was
1DocerémusWee didDoceremurWee were
2Doceretis,yee did,Docereminiyee were
3Docereat.they didDocerenturthey were
Preterperf.Plur. Sing.1Docuerim,I havetaught.DoctussimI havebeen taught.
   fuerim,
2Docueristhou hastsisthou hast
   fueris,
3Docuerit,hee hathsithee hath
   fuerit,
1Docuérimus,Wee haveDoctisimus,Wee have
   fuérimus,
2Docueritis,yee havesitisyee have
   fuéritis,
3Docuerint,they havesintthey have
   fuerint,
PreterpluperfPlur. Sing.1Docuissem,I hadtaughtDoctusessemI hadbeen taught.
   fuissem,
2Docuisses,thou hadstessesthou hadst
   fuisses,
3Docuisset,hee hadessethee had
   fuisset,
1DocuissemusWee hadDoctiessemusWee had
   fuissemus
2Docuissetis,yee hadessetisyee had
   fuissetis,
3Docuissent.they hadessentthey had
   fuissent.
Future.Plur. Sing.1Docuero,I willteach.DoctuseroI shallbee taught.
   fuero,
2Docueris,thou wilteristhou shalt.
   fueris,
3Docuerit,hee willerithee shall
   fuerit,
1DocuérimusWee willDoctierimusWee will
   fuerimus
2Docueritis,yee willeritisyee shall
   fueritis,
3Docuerint.they willerintthey shall
   fuerint.

The Infinitive Mood.
Present and Preterim­perf. tens.Docére,to teach.Docerito bee taught.
Preterperf. and Preterplup.Docuisse,to have or had taught.Doctum esse vel fuisse.to have or had been taught.
Future.Docturum esseto teach hereafter.Doctum iri velto bee taught hereafter.
   Docendum esse 
Gerunds.
  • Docendi, of teaching, or of beeing taught.
  • Docendo, in teaching, or of beeing taught.
  • Docendum, to teach, or to bee taught.
Supines.
Doctum, to teach.Doctu, to bee taught.

Participles.
Of the Pre­sent tensDocens,teach­ingOf the Pre­ter tens.Doctus,taught.
Of the Fu­ture in rus.Doctu­rus,about to teach.Of the Fu­ture in dus.Docen­dus,to bee taught.
Chap. 29. Of the form of the third Conjugation.

Verba in (o) tertiae Conjugation is formantur sicut Lego.

Verbs in (o) of the third Conjuga­tion bee formed like Lego.

Lego, legis, legi, legĕre, lectum.

Verba in (or) ter tiae Conjugatio­nis formantur si­cut Lego.

Verbs in (or) of the third Conju­gation bee form­ed like Legor.

  • Legor,
  • legĕris legĕ [...]e,
  • lectas sum lectas fui,
  • legi.
The Indicative Mood.
Present tens.Sing.1LEgo,I read. Legor,I am read.  
2Legis,thou readest. Legeristhou art read.  
3Legit,hee readeth. Legere,  
     Legiturhee is read.  
Plur.1Legimus,Wee read. Legimur,Wee are read.  
2Legitis,yee read. Legitini,yee are read.  
3Legunt.they read. Leguntu [...].they are read.  
Imperfect.Sing.1Legébam,I did read. Legebar,I was read.  
2Legèbas,thou readst. Legeharis,thou wast read.  
3Legebat,hee did read. Legebare,  
     Legebatur,hee was read.  
Plur.1Legebámus,Wee didread.Legebamur,Wee were read.  
2Legebatis,yee didegebanum,yee were read.  
3Legebant.they didLegebantur,they were read.  
Preterperfect.Sing.   read.LectussumI havebeen read.
1Legi,I havefui,
   esthou hast
2Legisti,thou hastfuisti,
   e [...]thee hath
3Legit,hee hathfuit,
[...]lur.   Lectisumus,Wee have
1Legimus,I havefuimus,
   sitis,yee have
2Legistis,yee havefuistis,
   suntthey have
3Legérunt,they havefuérunt,
 Legere. fuere.
Preterplup.Sing.1Legeram,I hadread.LectuseramI hadbeen read.
   fueram,
2Legeras,thou hadsterasthou hadst
   fueras,
3Legerat,hee haderathee had
   fuerat,
[...]lur.1Legerámus,Wee hadLectieramusWee had
   fueramus
2Legeratis,yee haderatisyee had
   fueratis,
4Legerant.they haderantthey had
   fuerant.
Future.Sing1Legam,I willread.Legar, I shallbee read.
2Leges,thou wiltLegeris thou shalt
3Leger,hee willLegere, 
    Legetur, hee shall
Plur.1Legémus,Wee willLegemur, Wee shall
2Leget [...]s,yee willLegemin [...], yee shall
3Leg [...]a [...].they willLegentur. they shall

The Imperative Mood.
Present tens.Sing.2LegeRead thouLegereBee thouread.
Legito,Legitor,
3Legatlet him read.Legaturlet him bee
Legito,Legitor,
 1Legamus,let us read.Legamur,let us bee
Plur.2Legiteread yee.Legiminibee yee
Leguote,Legiminor,
3Legantlet them read.Legantur,let them bee
Legunto.Leguntor,

The Subjunctive Mood.
Present tens.Sing.1CùmLegam,whenI read.Legar,I amread. 
2Legas,thou readest.Legaris,thou art 
3Legat,hee readeth.Legare, 
    Legatur,hee is 
Plur.1Legàmus,Wee read.Legamur,Wee are 
2Legatisyee read.Legamini,yee are 
3Legant.they read.Legantur.they are
Imperfect.Sing.1CùmLegerem,whenI didread.Legerer,I wasread.
2Legeres,thou didstLegeréris,thou wast
3Legeret,hee didLegerere,hee was
    Legeretur, 
Plut.1Legerémus,Wee didLegerémur,Wee were
2Legeretis,yee didLegeremini,yee were
3Legerent.they didLegerentur,they were
Preterperfect.Sing.1Legerim,I haveread.LectussimI havebeen read.
   fuerim, 
2Legeris,thou hastsisthou hast
   fueris, 
3Legerit,hee hathsithee hath
   fuerit, 
Plur.1Legérimus,Wee haveLecti.simusWee have
   fuerimus, 
2Legeritis,yee havesitisyee have
   fueritis, 
3Legerint,they havesintthey have
   fuerint, 
Preterplup.Sing.1Legissem,I hadread.LectusessemI hadbeen read.
   fuissem, 
2Legisses,thou hadstessesthou hadst
   fuisse, 
3Legisset,hee hadessethee had
   fuisset. 
Plur.1LegissemusWee hadLectitessemusWee had
   fuissemus 
2Legissetisyee hadessetisyee had
   fuissetis, 
3Legissent,they hadessentthey had
   fuissent. 
Future tens.Sing.1Legero,I shallread.LectuseroIshall bee read.
   fuero, 
2Legeris,thou shalteristhou
   fueris, 
3Legerit.hee shallerithee
   fuerit, 
Plur.1Legerimus,Wee shallLectieriniusWee
   fuerimus 
2Legeritis,yee shalleritisyee
   fueritis, 
4Legerint.they shallerintthey
   fuerint. 

[Page 123]

The Infinitive Mood.
Present and Imperfect tens.Legere,to read.Legi,to bee read.
Preterperf. and Preterplup.Legiss,to have or had read.Lectum esse vel fuisse,to have or had been read.
Future.Lecturum esseto read hereafter.Lectum iri vel legendum esse,to bee read hereafter.
Gerunds.
  • Legendi, of reading, or of beeing read.
  • Legendo, in reading, or of heeing read.
  • Legendum, to read, or to bee read.
Supines.
Lectum, to read.Lectu, to bee read.

Participles.
Of the Pre­sent tens.Legens,reading.Of the Preter tens.Lectus,read.
Of the Fu­ture in rus.Lecturus,to read.Of the Future in dusLecturus,to bee read.
Chap. 30. Of the Form of the fourth Conjugation.

Verba in (o) quar­tae Conjugationis variantur sicut Audio.

Verbs in (o) of the fourth Conjuga­tion bee varied like Audio.

Audio, audis, audivi, audi [...]e, auditum,

Verba in (or) quar­tae Conjugationis variantur sicut Audior.

Verbs in (or) of the fourth Conjugation bee varied like Audior.

  • Audior
  • audi [...]s audi [...]e,
  • audi­tus sum audi­tus fui,
  • au­di [...]i
The Indicative Mood.
Present tens.Sing.1AƲdio,I hear.Audior,I am heard.   
2Audisthou hearest.Audiris,thou art heard   
   Audior,    
3Audit,hee heareth.Auditur,hee is heard.   
Plur.1Audimus,Wee hear.Audimur,Wee are heard.   
2Auditis,yee hear.Audimini,yee are heard.   
3Audiunt.they hear.Audiuntur.they are heard.   
Preterimperf.Sing.1Audiebam,I didhear.Audiebar,I washeard. 
2Audiebas,thou didstAudiebaristhou wast 
   Audiebare,  
3Audiebat,hee didAudiebatur,hee was 
Plur.1AudiebamusWee didAudiebámur,Wee were 
2Audiebatis,yee didAudiebamimyee were 
3Audiebantthey didAudiebanturthey were 
Preterperf.Sing.1Audivi,I haveheard.Auditus.sum,I havebeen heard.
   fui, 
2Audivisti,thou hastes,thou hast
   fuisti, 
3Audivit,hee hathest,hee hath
   fuit, 
Plur.1Audivimus,Wee haveAuditisumus,Wee have
   fuimus, 
2Audivistis,yee haveestis,yee have
   fuistis, 
3Audivéruntthey havesunt,they have
 Audivere f [...]érunt, 
   fuére. 
Preterpluperf.Sing.1Audiveram,I hadheardAudituseramI hadbeen heard.
   fueram, 
2Audiveras,thou hadsterasthou hadst
   fueras, 
3Audiverat,hee haderathee had
   fuerat, 
Plur.1AudiveramusWee hadAuditieramusWee had
   fueramus 
2Audiveratis,yee haderatisyee had
   fueraits, 
3Audiverant,they haderantthey had
   fuerant. 
Future.Sing.1Audiam,I shallhear.Audi [...]r,I shall bee heard.  
2Audies,thou shaltAudieris,thou shalt bee heard.  
   Audiere,   
3Audiet,hee shallAudietur,hee shall bee heard.  
Plur.1AudiemusWee shallAudiemur,Wee shall bee heard.  
2Audietis,yee shallAudiemini,yee shall bee heard.  
3Audient.they shallAudientur.they shall bee heard.  

The Imperative Mood.
Present tens.Sing.2AudiHear thou.Audire,Bee thou heard.
 Audito, Auditor, 
3Audiatlet him hear.Audiatorlet him bee heard.
 Audito. Auditor, 
Plur.1Audiamus,let us hear.Audiamur,let us bee heard.
 Audite Audimini 
2Auditote,hear yee.Audiminorbee yee heard.
 Audiant Audiantor 
3Audiunte,let them hear.Audiuntor.let them bee heard.

The Subjunctive Mood.
Present tens.Sing.1CùmAudiam,whenI hear.Audiar,I amheard.
2Audias,thou hearest.Audiaristhou art
   Audiare, 
3Audiat,hee heareth.Audiatur,hee is
Plur.1AudiamusWee hear.Audiamur,Wee are
2Audiatis,yee hear.Audiaminiyee are
3Audiant.they hear.Audiantur.they are
Preterimperf.Sing.1CúmAudiem,whenI heard.Audirer,I washeard.
2Audires,thou heardest.Audireristhou wast
3Audiret.hee heard.Audirere
    Audiretur,hee was
Plur.1AudirémusWee heard.Audiremur,Wee were
2Audiretis,yee heard.Audireminiyee were
3Audirent.they heard.Audirenturthey were
Preterperf.Sing.1Audiverim,I haveheard.Auditus.simI havebeen heard.
fuerim,
2Audiveris,thou hastsisthou hast
fueris,
3Audiverit,hee hathsithee hath
fuerit,
Plur.1AudivérimusWee haveAuditisimusWee have
fuerimus
2Audivéritis.yee havesitisyee have
fuéritis
3Audiverint,they havesintthey have
fuerint.
Preterpluperf.Sing.1Audivissem,I hadheardAuditus.essemI hadbeen heard.
fuissem
2Audivisses,thou hadstessesthou hadst
fuisses,
3Audivisset,hee hadessethee had
fuisset,
Plur.1AudivissémusWee hadAuditiessemusWee had
fuissemus
2Audivissetis,yee hadessetisyee had
fuissetis,
3Audivissent,they hadessentthey had
fuissent.
Future.Sing.1Audivero,I shallhear.AudituseroI shallbee heard.
fuero,
2Audiveris,thou shalteristhou shalt
fueris,
3Audiverit,hee shallerithee shall
fuerit,
Plur.1AudiverimusWee shaltAuditierimusWee shal
fuerimus
2Audiveritisyee shalleritisyee shall
fueritis,
3Audiverint.they shallerintthey shall
fuerint

[Page 127]

The Infinitive Mood.
Present and Imperfect tens.Audire,to hear.Audiri,to bee heard.
Preterperf. and Preterplup.Audivisse,to have heard.Auditum esse vel fuisse,to have or had been heard.
Future.Auditurum esseto hearAuditum iri velto be heard
hereafter.Audiendum esse,hereafter.
Gerunds.
  • Audiendi, of hearing, or of beeing heard.
  • Audiendo, in hearing, or of beeing heard.
  • Audiendum, to hear, or to bee heard.
Supines.
Auditum, to hear,Auditu, to bee heard.

Participles.
Of the Present tens.Audiens, hearing.
Future in rus.Auditurus, to hear.
Of the Preter tens.Auditus, heard.
Future in dus.Audiendus, to bee heard.

As in Praesenti. OR, WILLIAM LILIE'S Rules of the Preterperfect tenses and Supines of Verbs.

Chap. 21. Of the Preterperfect tenses and Supines of Verbs.

As in prae­senti con­tein's Rules of the Preter ten­ses of Sim­ple Verbs. 1. In the first Conjugati­on As, maketh avi. 1. In the se­cond Es make's ui. In the Third, Bo make's bi. Co, ci. Do, di. Go, xi. Ho, xi. Lo, ui. Mo, ui. No, vi. Po, psi. Quo, qui. Ro, vi. So, sivi. Sco, vi. To, ti. Ecto, exi. Vo, vi. Xo, xui. Cio, ci. Dio, di. Gio, gi Pio, pi. Rio, ri. Tio, ssi. Uo, ui. In the Fourth is make's ui.

I. AS in the Present tens, make's the Preterper­fect tens in avi; as, No, nas, to swim, navi; vocito, vocitas, to call often, vocitavi. Except 1. Lavo; lavi, to wash; juvo, juvi, to help; nexo, nexui, to knit; seco, secui, to cut; neco, necui, to kill; mico, mi­cui, to shine; plico, plicui, to fold; frico, fricui, to rub; domo, domui, to tame; tono, tonui, to thunder; sono, sonui, to sound; crepo, crepui, to crack; veto, vetui, to forbid; cubo, cubui, to lie down; which seldom make's avi. 2. Do; das to give, will make dedi; and sto, stas, to stand, steti.

ES in the Present tens, make's the Preterperfect tens in ui; as, Nigreo, nigres, nigrui, to wax black; jubeo, jubes, jussi, to bid; sorbeo, sorbui, & sorpsi, to sup; mulceo, mulsi to asswage; luceo, luxi, to shine; sedeo, sedi, to sit; video, vidi, to see; prandeo, prandi, to dine; strideo, stridi, to make a nois; suadeo, suasi, to persuade; rideo, risi, to laugh; and ardeo, arsi, to burn.

2. The first syllable is doubled in these four fol­lowing; viz. Pendeo pependi to hang; mordeo, momordi, to bite.

[Page 130] Spondeo, spospondi, to promise; tondeo, totondi, to clip or shear.

3. If l or r stand next before geo, geo is turned into si; as, Ʋrgeo, ursi, to urge; mulgeo, mulsi, & mul­xi, to milk; frigeo, frixi, to bee cold; lugeo, luxi, to lament; augeo, & auxi, to encreas.

4. Fleo, fles, to weep, make's flevi; leo, les, to be­smear, levi, and its compound delco, make's delevi, to blot out; pleo, ples, to fill, make's plevi. 5. Neo, nes, to spin, nevi; maneo, to tarrie, make's mansi. 6. Tor­queo, to wrest, torsi, 7. And haereo, to stick, haesi.

8. Veo is made vi; as, Ferveo, fervi, to bee hot; but niveo, to wink, and its compound conniveo to close and open the eies, make's nivi & nixi; cieo, to trouble, make's civi; and vieo, to binde, vievi.

III. THe third Conjugation will form the Preter­perfect tens, as is plain here. Bo is made bi; as, Lambo, lambi, to lick. Except 1. Scribo, scripsi, to write; nubo, nupsi, to bee married to a man; and cum­bo, cubui, to lie down.

Co is made ci; as Vinco vici to overcom. But 1. Par­co make's peperci, & parsi, to spare; dico, dixi, to saie; and duco, duxi, to lead.

Do is made di; as, mando mandi, to eat; but scindo, to cut, make's scidi; findo, fidi, to cleav; fundo, sudi, to powr out; tundo, tutudi, to knock; pendo pepen­di, to weigh; tendo, tetendi, to stretch; pedo pepédi, to fart, cado, cecĭdi, to fall; caedo, cecidi, to beat; cedo, cessi, to give place; vado, to go away; rado, to shave; laedo, to hurt; ludo, to plaie; divido, to divide; trudo, to thrust; claudo, to shut; plaudo, to clap hands; rodo, to gnaw, change alwaies do into si.

Go is made xi; as, jungo, to join, junxi; but r be­fore go make's si; as, spargo, sparsi, to sprinkle; lego, to read make's legi; and ago, to do, egi; tango, [Page 132] tetigi, to touch; pungo to prick, make's punxi & pupugi; frango, fregi, to break; pango, pepigi, to make a bar­gain; pango pegi, to join; pango, panxi, to sing.

Ho is made xi; as, Traho, traxi, to draw; and veho, vexi, to carrie.

Lo is made ui; as, Colo, colui, to till; but Psallo, to sing, and sallo, to salt, make salli: vello, to pluck up, make's velli and vulsi; falle, to deceiv, make's fefel­li; cello to break, ceculi; and pello, to drive away, pe­puli.

Mo is made ui; as, Vomo, vomui, to vomit: but emo, make's eini, to buie; como, compsi, to comb; promo, prompsi, to draw; demo, dempsi, to take away; sum̄o, sumpsi, to take; premo, pressi, to press.

No is made vi; as, sino, sivi, to suffer. Except Te­mno, tempsi, to despise; sterno, stravi, to strew; sperno, sprevi, to despise; lino, levi, lini, & livi to dawb; cerno, crevi, to discern. Gigno, make's genui, to beget; pono, posui, to put; cano, cecini, to sing.

Po is made psi; as, scalpo, scalpsi, to scratch; rum­po, rupi, to break; strepo, strepui to make a nois; cre­po, crepui, to track.

Quo is made qui; as, linquo, liqui, to leav. Except coquo, coxi, to boil.

Ro is made vi; as, sero, to plant or sow, make's sevi, which changing the signification, rather ma­keth serui; verro, to brush, verri, & versi; uro ussi, to burn; gero, gessi, to act, or beat; quaero, quaesivi, to seek; tero, trivi, to weat; curro, cucurri, to run.

So will make sivi; as, accerso, to go to call, arcesso to go to call, incesso, to revile, and lacesso, sivi, to pro­voke. Except capesso, to offer to take, which make's capessi, & capessivi; facesso, to go about to do, and viso, to visit, make's visi: but pinso, to bake, will have pinsui.

Sco is made vi; as pasco, pavi to feed; but posco, will have poposci, to require.

[Page 134] Disco, didici, to learn, and quinisco, quexi, to nod with the head.

To is made ti; as, verto, verti, to turn; Sisto, stiti, to make to stand; but mitto, make's misi, to send; peto, will form petivi, to ask; sterto, stertui, to snort; meto, messui, to mow.

Ecto is made exi; as, flecto, flexi, to bend; but pecto, to comb, make's pexi, and pexui; and necto, to knit, nexi, and nexui.

Vo is made vi; as, volvo, volvi, to roll over; Ex­cept vivo, vixi, to live. Nexo, make's nexui to knit; and texo, texui, to weav.

Cio is made ci; as, facio feci, to make; jacio, jeci, to cast: but lacio, to allure, make's lexi; and specio, to behold, spexi.

Dio is made di; as, fodio, to dig, make's fodi.

Gio is made gi; as, fugio, fugi, to avoid.

Pio is made pi; as, capio cepi, to take: Except cu­pio cupivi, to desire; and rapio rapui, to snatch; and sapio sapui, or sapivi, to bee wise.

Rio is made ri; as, pario peperi, to bring forth.

Tio is made ssi; as, quatio quassi, to shake; which Preterperfect tens is seldom used.

Ʋo is made ui; as, statuo statui, to appoint; but pluo, to rain, make's pluvi, and plui; struo struxi, to build; fluo, fluxi, to flow.

IV. THe fourth Conjugation make's is in the pre­sent tens, and ivi in the preterperfect tens; as, scio scis scivi, to know. Except venio veni, to com; cambio campsi, to exchange; raucio rausi, to bee hoars; farcio farsi, to stuff; sarcio sarsi, to patch; sepio sepsi, to hedg; sentio sensi, to perceiv; fulcio fulsi, to under­prop; haurio hausi, to draw; sancio sanxi, to e­stablish; vincio vinxi to binde; saii [...] salui, to leap, and amicio amicui, to cloath. Wee seldom use, Cam­bivi, haurivi, amicivi, &c.

Chap. 32. Of the Preterperfect tenses of Compound Verbs.

The Simpl and Com­pound verbs have the same Pre­terperfect tens. Except, 1. Words that double the first syl­labl, 2. Plico. 3. Oleo. 4. Pungo. 5. Do, & Sto. 6. Verbs chāging the first vowel into e. 6. Verbs change the first vowel into e. 7. Pasco, 8. Verbs that change the first vowel into a. 9. Placeo. 10. Pango. 11. Maneo. 12 Scalpo. calco, salto, 13. Claudo, quatio, lavo 14. Verbs that change the first vowel of the Present tens into i, but not of the Preter tens. 15. Facio. 16. Lego.

THe Simple and the Compound Verb have the same Preterperfect tens; as, Docui, I have taught; edocui, I have fully taught. but

1. The syllable which the Simple verb doubleth, is not alwaies doubled in the Compound, except in these three, praecurro, to run before; excurro, to run out; and repungo to prick again; and in the Com­pounds of Do to give; disco to learn; sto to stand; and posco to require.

2. Plico compounded with sub or a Noun, will have plicavi; as, supplico, to supplie; multiplico, to multi­plie; but applico, to applie; complico, to fold up; re­plico, to replie, will end in ui, or avi.

3. Though Oleo, to smell, make's olui, yet its compounds make rather olevi: but Redoleo, to smel strong, and suboleo, to smel a little, are formed like the simple Verb.

4. All the compounds of Pungo, to prick, make punxi; but repungo, to prick again, make's repupugi, and repunxi.

5. The Compounds of Do, when they are of the third Conjugation, make didi; as Credo, to believ; edo, to set forth; dedo, to yield; reddo, to restore; perdo, to destorie; abdo, to hide; obdo, to set against; condo, to bnild; indo, to put in; trado, to deliver; prodo, to betraie; vendo, to sell: But Abscondo, to hide, make's Abscondi..

The Compounds of Sto, to stand, make stiti.

6. These Simple Verbs beeing compounded do change the first vowel of the Present tens, and Pre­terperfect tens, and so of all other tenses into e, viz. [Page 138] Damno, to condemn; lacto, to give suck; sacro, to de­dicate; fallo, to deceiv; arceo, to drive away; tracto, to handle; fatiscor, to bee wearie; partio, to divide; scando, to climb; spargo, to sprinkle; and pario, to bring forth young, whereof two Compounds, Com­perio, to finde out by search, and reperio, to finde by chance, do make peri, and all the rest perui; as, aperio to open; operio, to cober.

7. These two compounds of Pasco, viz. compesco, to pasture together, and dispesco, to drive from pa­sture, will have pescui, the rest will have pavi; as, epasco, to cat up.

8. These Verbs beeing compounded do change the first vowel every where into i, viz. habeo, to have, lateo, to lie hid, salio, to leap; statuo, to ap­point; cado, to fall; laedo, to hurt; pango pegi, to join; cano, to sing, quaero, to seek; caedo cecidi, to beat; tango, to touch; egeo, to want; teneo, to hold; taceo, to keep silence; sapio, to bee wise; and rapio, to snatch; as, rapio rapui, make's eripio eripui: but the Compounds of Cano, make the Preterperfect tens in ui; as, concino to agree in one tune, concinui.

9. So of Placeo cometh displiceo to displeas: but complaceo to like well, and perplaceo to pleas through­ly; do follow the simple Verb.

10. These four Compounds of pango to join, do keep a, viz. Depango to fasten down; oppango to fa­sten to; circumpango to fasten about; and repango, to dis-join.

11. These four Compounds of Maneo mansi, to tarrie, do make minui, viz. Praemineo, to excel others, cmineo, to appear before others; promineo, to hang out in sight, and immineo, to hang over: but the rest follow the simple Verb.

12. The Compounds of scalpo, to scratch; calco, to tread; salto, to dance, change a into u; as, exscul­po, [Page 140] to carv; inculco, to inculcate, and resulto, to re­bound.

13. The Compounds of Claudo to shut, quatio to shake, lavo to wash, do cast away a; as, occludo to shut fast, excludo to shut out, of claudo. Percutio to smite, and excutio to shake off, of quatio. Proluo, is, lui, to wash much; diluo, is lui, to purge with washing. of lavo.

14. These Verbs beeing compounded, change the first vowel of the Present tens (into i) but not of the Preter perfect tens, viz. Ago to do, emo to buie, sedeo to sit, rego to rule, frango to break, capio, to take, jacio to cast, lacio to allute, specio to behold, premo, to press: as of frango is made refringo refregi to break open; of capio, incipio incepi to begin: but perago to finish satago to bee busie about a thing, coëmo to vnie together, do follow their simple Verb. And of ago, dego to live, make's degi, and cogo to compel, coëgi: as also of rego, pergo to go forward, make's perrexi, and surgo to arise, surrexi, the middle syllable of the Pre­sent tens beeing taken away.

15. Facio changeth nothing unless it have a Pre­position before it; as, Olfacio to smel, calfacio to make hot, and inficio to infect.

16. The compounds of Lego, with re, se, per, prae, sub, trans, keep the vowel of the Present tens, the rest change it into i; of which Intelligo to understand, diligo to love, negligo to neglect, make lexi, and all the rest make legi.

Chap. 33. Of the Supines of Simple Verbs.

The Supine is formed of the Pre­ter tens, Bi make's tum. Ci, ctum. Di, sum. The syllabl is not dou­bled in the Supines. Gi, ctum. Li, sum.

Mi,tum.
Ni,
Pi,
Qi,

Ri, sum. Si, sum. Psi tum. Ti tum. Vi tum. Ʋi itum, utum. Sum. Xi ctum.

NOw learn to form the Supine from the Pre­terperfect tens thus: Bi, maketh tum; as, Bibi bibitum to drink,

Ci is made ctum, as vici victum to overcom, ici ictum to smite, feci factum to do, jeci jactum to cast.

Di is made sum, as vidi visum to see: but som do double ss; as pandi passum to lay open, sedi sessum to sit, scidi scissum to cut, fidi fissum to cleav, fodi fossum to dig.

And here also you may observ, that the syllable which is doubled in the Preterperfect tens, is not doubled in the Supines, as totondi to clip, make's ton­sum; cecidi to beat, caesum; cécidi to fall, casum; te­tendi to stretch, tensum, and tentum; tutudi to knock, tunsum; pepédi to fart, peditum: to which add dedi, which maketh datum.

Gi is made ctum, as, legi to read, lectum; pegi to join, and pepigi to make a bargain, pactum; fregi to break, fractum; tetigi to touch, tactum; egi to do, actum; pupugi to prick, punctum, and fugi to avoid fugitum.

Li is made sum, as salli to season with salt, salsum; pepuli to drive away, make's pulsum; ceculi to break, culsum; fefelli to deceiv, falsum; velli to pluck up, vulsum, and tuli to suffer, latum.

Mi, ni, pi, qui, are made tum, as emi emptum to buie, veni ventum to com, cecini cantum to sing, cepi captum, to take, coepio coeptum to begin, rupi ruptum to break, liqui lictum to leav.

Ri is made sum, as verri versum to brush: except peperi partum to bring forth.

Si is made sum, as visi visum to visit; yet misi ma­keth [Page 144] missum to send, with a double ss: except fulsi fultum to underprop hausi haustum to draw, sarsi sartum to patch, farsi fartum to stuff, ussi ustum to burn, gessi gestum to bear, torsi tortum or torsum to wrest, indul­si indultum or indulsum to pamper.

Psi is made tum, as scripsi scriptum to write; ex­cept campsi campsum, to exchange.

Ti is made tum, as steti to stand, and stiti to make to stand, make statum; except verti versum to turn.

Vi is made tum, as flavi flatum to blow; except pa­vi pastum to feed, lavi lotum lautum or lavatum to wash, potavi potum & potatum to drink, favi fautum to favor, cavi cautum to beware, sevi satum to sow, livi or lini litum to dawb, solvi solutum to loos, volvi volutum to rowl, singultivi singultum to sob, venivi venum to bee sold, sepelivi sepultum to burie.

Ʋi make's itum, as domui domitum to tame: ex­cept everie verb in uo, becaus ui will alwaies make utum, as exui exutum to put off; but rui make's ruitum to rush; so secui sectum to cut, necui nectum to kill, fricui frictum to rub, miscui mistum to mingle, amicui amictum to clothe, torrui tostum to rost, docui doctum to teach, tenui tentum to hold, consului consul­tum to consult, alui altum or alitum to nourish, salui saltum to leap, colui cultum to worship, occului occultum to hide, pinsui pistum to bake, rapui raptum to snatch, serui sertum to put to, texui textum to weav. But these change ui into sum, for censeo to think ma­keth censum, cellui celsum to break, messui messum to mow, nexui nexum to knit, pexui pexum, to comb, pa­tui passum to lie open, carui cassum & caritum, to want.

Xi is made sum, as vinxi victum to binde: but five lose n, viz. finxi fictum to feign, minxi mictum to piss, pinxi pictum to paint, strinxi strictum to tie, rinxi rictum to grin.

[Page 146] And these xi into xum, Flexi flexum to bend, plexi plexum to punish, fixi fixum to fasten, fluxi fluxum to flow.

Chap. 34. Of the Supines of Compound verbs and of the Preterperfect tens of verbs in Or.

The Com­pound su­pine is for­medlike the Simple. Verbs in or make their Preterperf. tens of the latter supine by putting to s and sum vel fui.

EVerie Compound Supine is formed as the Sim­ple, though there remain not alwaies the same syllable in both.

The compound of tunsum to kneck, n beeing taken away, make's tusum, and of ruitum to rush, is made rutum, i beeing taken away, and so of saltum to leap, is made sultum.

When sero maketh satum, its compounds make situm.

These Supines captum to take, factum to do, jactum to cast, raptum to snatch, cantum to sing, partum, to bring forth, sparsum to sprinkle, carptum to crop and fartum to stuff, change a into e.

The verb edo to eat, when it is compounded ma­keth not estum, but esum, onely comedo to eat up ma­keth both.

Of nosco to know, cognitum to know, and agnitum to acknowledg, are onely used, the rest of its com­pounds make notum, for noscitum is of no use.

II. VErbs in or take their Preterperfect tens from the later Supine, by changing u into us, ad­ding sum vel fui; as of lectu is made lectus sum vel fui. But of these verbs, somtimes a Deponent, som­times a Commune is to bee noted; for labor to slide, make's lapsus sum, patior to suffer, make's passus sum, and its compounds compatior to suffer together, com­passus sum, [Page 148] perpetior to suffer throughly perpessus sum, fateor to confess, make's fassus sum, and its compounds, as con­fiteor to confess confessus sum, diffiteor to denie, diffes­sus sum, gradior to go by steps, make's gressus sum, and so its compounds, as digredior to digress, digressus sum, fatiscor to bee wearie make's fessus sum, metior to mea­sure mensus sum, utor to use usus sum; ordior or weav make's orditus, ordior to begin orsus, nitor to endeavor nisus or nixus sum, ulciscor to revenge ultus sum, irascor to bee angrie make's iratus sum, reor to suppose ratus sum, obliviscor to forget oblitus sum, fruor to enjoie fructus or fruitus sum, misereor to pitie misertus sum; tuor and tueor to see make not tutus but tuitus sum, though both have tutum and tuitum in the Supine; loquor to speak make's loquutus sum, sequor to follow sequutus sum, experior to trie expertus sum, paciscor to make a bargain pactus sum, nanciscor to get nactus sum, apiscor to get, which is an old verb, make's aptus sum. whence adipiscor to obtain adeptus, queror to complain questus sum, proficiscor to go on a journie profectus sum, expergiscor to awake experrectus sum, comminiscor to feign commentus sum, nascor to bee born natus sum, morior to die mortuus sum, orior to arise make's ortus sum.

Chap. 35. Of certain verbs Irregular, or going out of the common rules of con­jugating.

Verbs irre­gular are 1. Redun­dant, ha­ving a Pre­ter tens of the Active and of the Passive voice. 2. Variant, as Neuter­passives. and Such as borrow their Preterper­fect tens. 3. Defective 1. In the Preter tens. 2. In the Supine.

THese verbs have a Preterperfect tens both of the Active and Passive voice, as coeno to sup make's coenavi and coenatus sum, juro to swear juravi and jura­tus, poto to drink potavi and potus, titubo to stumble titubavi or titubatus,.

[Page 150] So also careo to want make's carui and cassus sum, prandeo to dine, prandi, and pransus, pateo to lie open patui & passus, placeo to pleas placui and placitus, suesco to accustom suevi and suetus, veneo to bee sold venivi and venditus sum, nubo to bee married to a man nupsi and nupta sum, mereor to deserv merui and meritus sum: to these add, libet it listeth libuit and libitum est vel fuit, licet it is lawful licuit, and licitum est vel fuit, taedet it irketh taeduit, and pertaesum est vel fuit, pudet it ashameth puduit, and puditum est vel fuit, and piget it irketh which make's piguit and pigitum est vel fuit.

NEuter-passives are thus formed: viz. like neu­ters in the present tens, and passives in the pre­ter tens; Gaudeo to rejoice gavisus sum vel fui, fido to trust fisus sum vel fui, audeo to bee bold ausus sum vel fui, fio to bee made or don factus sum vel fui, soleo to bee wont solitus sum vel fui, moereo to bee sad moestus sum vel fui, But PHOCAS taketh moestus for a noun Adjective.

SOm verbs borrow their preterperfect tens from another verb; as a verb Inceptive ending in sco, standing for the primitive verb, will have the preter­perfect tens of the primitive verb, thus; tepesco to begin to bee warm make's tepui of tepeo to bee warm, fervesco to begin to bee hot make's fervi of ferveo to bee hot, cerno to see will have vidi of video to see, quatio to shake concussi of concutio to shake, ferio to smite percussi of percutio to smite, meio to piss will have min­xi of mingo to piss, sido to settle sedi of sedo to sit, tollo to lift up will have Justuli of suffero to bear, sum I am will have fui of fuo to bee, fero to bear tuli of tulo to bear, sisto to make to stand steti of sto to stand, furo to bee mad insanivi of insanio to bee mad.

[Page 152] So also vescor to eat will have its preterperfect tens from pascor to bee fed, medeor to heal from medicor to heal, liquor to bee melted from liquefio to bee melted, reminiscor to remember from recordor to call to minde.

THese verbs want the preterperfect tens: vergo to bend or look towards, ambigo to doubt, glisco to grow or encreas, fatisco to chink, polleo to bee able, nideo to shine: to these add puerasco to begin to bee a childe; and passives whose actives want the Supines, as metuor to bee feared, timeor to bee feared; and all Desideratives except parturio to strive to bring forth, and esurio to begin to bee hungrie, or to de­sire to eat (with a few others) which have the pre­terperfect tens.

THese verbs seldom or never have the Supine: Lambo to lick, mico to shine, rudo to braie, scabo to claw, parco to spare, dispesco to drive from pasture, posco to require, disco to learn, compesco to pasture to­gether, quinisco to nod, dego to live, ango to vex, sugo to suck, lingo to lick, ningo to snow, satago to bee bu­sie about a thing, psallo to sing, volo to will, nolo to bee unwilling, malo to bee more willing, tremo to tremble, strideo to make a nois, strido to make a nois, flaveo to bee yellow, liveo to bee black and blew, aveo to cobet, paveo to fear, conniveo to wink, ferveo to bee hot. The Compounds of nuo to nod, as renuo to re­fuse: the compounds of cado to fall, as incido to fall into; Except occido to fall down occasum, and recido recasum to fall back: respuo to refuse, linquo to leav, luo to punish, metuo to fear, cluo to glister, frigeo to bee cold, calvo to bee baid, sterto to snort, timeo to fear, luceo to shine, arceo to drive away, whose com­pounds make ercitum: the compounds of gruo to crie like a Crane, as ingruo to invade.

[Page 154] And all verbs Neuters of the second Conjugation that end in ui; except oleo to smell, doleo to griev, placeo to pleas, taceo to hold one's peace, pareo to o­beie, careo to want, noceo to hurt, pateo to lie open, la­teo to lie bid, va'eo to bee able, caleo to bee warm, which will have the Supines.

Chap. 36. Of verbs that want certain Moods and Tenses.

3. Incer­tain Moods and tenses, as, Aïo. Ausim. Duim. Saive. Ave. Cedo. Faxo. Forem. Quaeso. Infit. Defit. Confieri. Inquam. Odi. Cepi. Memini. Dor. For. Sci. Eo & queo. Orior. Morior. Volo. Nolo. Malo. Fero. Feror. Edo. Sum.

THese verbs (more usually) are called Defectives which want certain Moods and Tenses, viz.

Indicative Mood Present tens, Aïo I saie, or quoth I; Aïs thou saiest; Aït hee saith, or quoth hee, Plur. Aïunt they saie.

Imperfect. Aïebam I did saie, hath all persons in both numbers.

Imperativus, Aï saie thou?

Subjunct. Present, Aïas thou maiest saie, Aïat hee may saie. Plur. Aïamus wee may saie, Aïant, they may saie.

Participium Praesens, Aïens saying.

Subjunct praesens. Ausim I dare, Ausis thou darest, Ausit hee dare. Plur. Ausint they dare.

So also Duim I give, Duis thou givest, Duit hee giveth. Plur. Duint they give.

For the Antients exprest the Subjunctive Mood in im, hence wee read creduim for eredam.

Indicat. Futur. Salvebis thou shalt greet, or bid God speed.

Imperat. Salve salveto greet you well. Plur. Salvete salvetote greet yee well.

Infinitive, Salvere to greet well.

Imperative, Ave Aveto hall thou. Plur. Avete A­vetote hall yee.

[Page 156] Infinit. Avére, to bid one hall.

Imperat. Cedo reach mee. Plur. Cedite, antiently Cette reach yee.

Indic. & Subjunct, Futur. Faxo vel Faxim I will bring to pass, Faxis thou wilt make, Faxit hee will make. Plur. Faxint, they will make.

Subiunct. Forem I should, or might bee, Fores thou shouldest, or might bee, Foret hee should or might bee. Plur. Forent they might bee.

Infinit. Futur. Fore to bee.

Indic. Praesens, Quaeso, I praie. Plur. Quaesumus wee praie.

Indic. Praesens, Infit hee saith. Plur. Infiunt they saie. And Defit it is wanting, Defiet it will bee wanting, Defiat let it bee wanting, as also defieri to bee wanting, Confieri to bee don at once.

Indicat. Praesens, Inquio vel Inquam, I saie, Inquis thou saiest, Inquit hee saith. Plur. Inquiunt they saie.

Perfectum, Inquisti thou hast said, Inquit, hee hath said.

Futurum, Inquies thou shalt saie, Inquiet hee shall saie. Plur. Inquietis yee shall saie, Inquient they shall saie.

Imperat. Inque, Inquito saie thou.
Subjunct. praes. Inquiat hee may saie.
Particip. praesens, Inquiens saying.

Odi I hate, coepi I begin, memini I remember, have onely those tenses which are formed of the Pretertens, viz. those that end in ram, rim, ssem, ro, and sse, save that memini hath in the Imperative mood singular Memento remember thou, mementote remem­ber yee.

These simple verbs For, dor, fer, der, are not found in the first person singular of the Present tens, but (almost) in all the rest.

Dic, duc, fer, fac, are cut off by Apocope.

[Page 158] Sci of scio to know is not in use, nor solebo of soleo to bee wont, nor fuo to bee, an old verb.

Eo I go, and queo I am able, make their Preter­imperfect tens ibam and quibam, and their Future ibo and quibo.

Orior oreris to arise, hath oriri in the Infinitive mood, and morior maketh mori and moriri.

Volo I will, nolo I will not, malo I had rather, fero I bear, feror I am born. and edo to eat, have commonly a Syncope in manie tenses; as Volo, vis, vult. Vultis. Nolo, nonvis, nonvult. Nolumus. Malo, mavis, mavult. Malumus. Fero, fers, fert. Feror, ferris vel ferre, fertur. Edo, edis vel es, edit vel est, &c. of which volo and malo want the Imperative mood. Nolo make's in the Imperative mood Noli nolito do not thou. plur. Nolite nolitote do not yee.

Sum with its compounds want's the Gerunds, Supines, and Participles of the Present tens, save that absens, praesens com of absum, praesum; for futu­rus is of fui, which was once the preter tens of the obsolete verb fuo. Possum want's the Imperative mood.

Chap. 32. Of Forming the verb Sum.
The verb Sum hath a manner of declining which belong's onely to its self.Verbum Sum peculiarem Con­jugandi rationem sibi postu­lat.
Sum, es, fui, esse, futurus.Sum, es, fui, esse, futurus.

The Indicative Mood.The Subjunctive Mood.
Present tens.Sing1Sum, possum,I am CùmSim, Possim,whenI am. 
2Es,thou art. Sis,thou art. 
3Est,hee is Sit,hee is. 
Plur.1Sumus,Wee are Simus,Wee are. 
2Estis,yee are. Sitis,yee are. 
3Sunt.they are. Sim.they are. 
Imperfect.Sing.1Eram, poteram,I was. CùmEssem, possemwhenI was. 
2Eras,thou wast. Esses,thou wert 
3Erat,hee was. Esset,hee was. 
Plur.1Eramus,Wee were. Essemus,Wee were. 
2Eratis.yee were. Essetis,yee were.
3Erant.they were. Essent.they were. 
Preter tens.Sing.1Fui, Potui,I havebeen.CùmFuerim, potue­rum,whenI havebeen.
2Fuisti,thou hastFueris,thou hast
3Fuit,hee hathFuerit,hee hath
  Fuimus,Wee have  
Plur.1Fuistis,Fuerimus,Wee have
2Fuérunt,yee haveFueritis,yee have
3Fuére.they haveFuerint.they have
Preterplup.Sing.1Fueram. po­tueramI hadbeen.CùmFuissem. potu­issem,whenI hadbeen.
2Fueras,thou hadstFuisses,thou hadst
3Fuerat,hee hadFuisset,hee had
Plur.1Fueramus,Wee hadFuissemus,Wee had
2Fueratis,yee hadFuissetis,yee had
3Fuerant.they hadFuissent.they had
Future.Sing.1Ero. Potero,thou shaltbee.CùmFuero. potue­ro,whenI shallbee.
2Eris,I shallFueris,thou shalt
3Erit,hee shallFuerit,hee shall
Plur.1Frimus,Wee shallFuerimus,Wee shall
2Eritis,yee shallFueritis,yee shall
3Erunt.they shallFuerint.they shall

The Imperative Mood.The Infinitive Mood.
Present tens.Sing.2Sis, es, esto,Bee thouPresent and Imperfect.Esse,to bee.
3Sit, esto,bee hee.   
1Simus,Bee wee.Perfect and Preterplup.Fuisse,to have or had been.
Plur.2Sitis, este, estote,bee yee.   
3Sint, sunto,bee they.FutureFuturum esseto bee here­after.
So likewise are its com­pounds declined, Absum to bee absent, Desum to bee wanting Praesum to bee before, Obsum to bee against; but Prosum to pro­fit, take's d between two vow­els, and Possum to bee able, (of potis able, and sum to bee) som­times keep's t, and sometimes changeth it into s before s.Sic variantur & ejus com, posita, Absum, desum, praesum­obsum; prosum recipit d inter duas vocales, & Possum (à potis & sum) quandoque re­tinet t, quandoque mutat in s ante s.
Cap. 38. Of Verbs Impersonals and Derivatives.

Imperso­nals bee de­clined in the third person one­ly. And they bee of the Active voice. Verbs De­rivatives are 1. Inchoa­tives. 2. Frequen­tatives. 3. Desidera­tives. 4. Diminu­tives. 5. Imita­tives. 6. Appara­tives. 7. Denomi­natives.

IMpersonals bee declined throughout all Moods and tenses in the voice of the third person singu­lar onely.

And they bee either1. Of the Active voice which end in t; as Decet it becommeth, decebat, decuit, decuerat, decebit. Deceat, deceret, decuerit, decere.
2. Of the passive voice, which end in tur; as, Studetur it is studied, studebatur; studitum est vel fuit., studitum erat vel fuerat, studebitur, stu­deatur, studeretur, studitum sit vel fuerit, studitum esset vel fuisset, studitum erit vel fuerit, studeri.

Impersonals want (for the most part) Gerunds, Supines, and Participles.

The Participles by which wee express the preter tens are put Substantively in the Neuter gender.

Impersonals of the Active voice are these eleven, which (almost) alwaies remain Impersonals; viz. Decet it becommeth, Libet it listeth, Licet it is lawful, Liquet it is cleer, (whose Preter tens is not exstant) lubet it listeth, miseret it pitieth, oportet it behooveth, poenitet it repenteth, piget it irketh, pudet it ashameth, and taedet it irketh, which are also somtimes found in the third person plural, as decent, oportent, pudent.

To these are reckoned som personals (which are found absolutely in the third person without a no­minative case, having an Infinitive mood presently after them). Such are,

In the first Conjugation, delectat it delighteth, ju­vat it helpeth, praestat it is better, restat it remaineth, stat; it is resolved on, constat, it is manifest, vacat I am at leisure.

[Page 164] In the Second, apparet it appeareth, attinet it be­longeth, debet it ought, patet it is evident, place it pleaseth, solet it is wont.

In the Third, Accidit, it befalleth, coepit it begin­neth, conducit it belongeth to, contingit it hapneth, de­sinit it ceaseth, incipit it beginneth, sufficit it suffi­ceth.

In the Fourth, Convenit it agree'th, evenit it fall's out, expedit it is expedient.

Among the irregular verbs, est it is, interest it con­cerneth, prodest it doth profit, potest it may, fit it is don, refert it concerneth.

Likewise verbs of an exempt power (i. e. that signifie an action not of anie humane power) com near the nature of Impersonals, as Fulgurat it light­neth, pluit it raineth, lucescit it waxeth light.

2. Impërsonals of the Passive voice haue no certain number, becaus they com of all verbs Actives, and som Neuters, as, Legitur it is read, curritur it is run.

Lastly no verb (almost) is so far a personal, as that it cannot take upon it the form of an Impersonal, and som Impersonals turn again som­times into Personals.

A verb Impersonal may indifferently bee taken to bee of anie person in both numbers, viz. by rea­son of an oblique case adjoined; as, me oportet I must, te oportet thou must, illum oportet hee must. Opor­tet nos, wee must, oportet vos yee must, oportet illos they must. Statur à me I stand, statur à te thou standest, statur ab illo hee standeth. Statur à nobis wee stand. statur à vobis yee stand, statur ab illis they stand.

Derivative verbs are verie often used for their Primitives, as Timesco for timeo to fear, hisco for hi to gape.

There bee five kindes of Derivatives, verbs.

1. Inchoätives, or Augmentatives, which signifie [Page 166] beginning or augmentation, and end in sco; as, Lu­cesco to begin to bee light, Ardesco to bee hotter and hotter.

2. Frequentatives, which signifie a certain assidu­itie or endeavor; and end in to, so, xo, or tor; as, Visito to visit often, Viso to go to see, nexo to tie of­ten, sector to endeavor to follow.

3. Desideratives, or Meditatives which signifie a certain desire or strift, and end in urio; as, Lecturio to strive to read, coenaturio to desire a supper.

4. Diminutives, which signifie the lessening of its Primitive, and end in lo or sso; as, Sorbillo to sup often, pitisso to sipple or sup a little.

5. Imitatives, which signifie imitation, and end in isso, and in or; as, Patrisso to resemble a father, vul­pinor to plaie the Fox.

6. Hitherto belong also Apparatives, which signifie a preparation to, and end in co; as, Vellico to pluck, fodico to dig.

7. As also Denominatives, which com from nouns, and have no proper appellation; as, Lignor to purvey wood, rusticor to live in the Countrie.

Chap. 39. Of a Participle.

A Partici­ple taketh part of a Noun and part of a Verb. There bee four kindes of Partici­ples. 1. Of the Present tens. 2. Of the Preter tens. 3. Of the Future in rus. 4. Of the Futurr in dus. How Par­ticiples are formed. Of what verbs they com, Nouns Par­ticipials. Participles of the Pre­sent tens be declined like Felix. of other tenses like Bonus.

APARTICIPLE is a part of Speech de­rived of a Verb, which taketh part of a Noun as well as of Verb; as Amans loving. A Participle hath from a Noun, gender, case, and declension; from a Verb, tens and signification; from both these, number, and figure.

According to tens there bee four kindes of Parti­ciples.

1. A Participle of the Present tens hath the signi­fication of the Present tens, and endeth in ans, ens, and iens; as, Amans, docens, legens, audiens.

[Page 168] But iens of eo is seldom read in the Nominative case, but euntis &c. in the oblique cases. But its com­pounds have the Nominative case in iens, and the Genitive in euntis; except Ambiens, ambientis.

2. A Participle of the Preter tens signifieth the time past, and endeth in tus, sus, xus, as Amatus loved, visus seen, nexus knit; and one in uus, as Mortuus dead.

3. A Participle of the future in Rus hath the si­gnification of the Future tens of its Infinitive mood Active; as, Amaturus to love, Docturus about to teach.

4. A Participle of the Future in Dus hath the si­gnification of the Future tens of the Infinitive Pas­sive; as, Amandus to bee loved hereafter.

The Participle of the Present tens is formed of the Preterimperfect tens by changing the last syllable into ns; as of Amabam, amans.

The Participle of the Preter tens is formed of the later Supine by putting to s; as of Amatu, amatus.

The participle of the Future in rus is formed of the later Supine by puting to rus; as of Amatu, amaturus.

The participle of the Future in dus is formed of the Genitive case of the participle of the present tens by changing tis into dus; as of Amantis, aman­dus.

These participles are derived of their verbs be­sides the common rule; Pariturus about to bring forth, nasciturus to bee born, soniturus to sound, ar­guiturus to reprove, moriturus to die, luiturus that shal pale or suffer punishment, nosciturus to know, osurus to hate, futurus to bee, oriturus to arise.

These bee like participles but are derived of Nouns, Tunicatus coated, togatus gowned, persona­tus personated, larvatus marked, &c.

[Page 170] From Actives and Neuters which have the Su­pines com two Participles, one of the present tens, and the other of the Future in rus; as of Amo, amans amaturus, of Curro, currens cursurus.

But of som Neuters are found also Participles in dus, as Dubitandus to bee doubted, vigilandus to bee watched, carendus to bee wanted, dolendus to bee grieved. And of these which make their preterper­fect tens in manner of passives, is made also a parti­ciple of the preter tens; as gaudeo gavisus glad, juro juratus sworn: so likewise from Impersonals in tur; as of Aratur aratus plowed.

Of Verbs Passives com two participles, one of the preter tens, the other of the Future in dus; as of Amor cometh Amatus, amandus.

Of Verbs Deponent com three participles, viz. of the present tens, preter tens, and of the Future in rus, as of Auxilior to aid cometh auxilians, auxilia­tus, auxiliaturus.

To manie also belongeth a participle in dus, espe­cially to such as govern an Accusative case, as of Loquor to speak, cometh Loquens, loquuturus, loquutus, loquendus.

Of Verbs Commune com four participles, as of Largior to bestow or bee bestowed, cometh Largiens, largiturus, largitus, largiendus.

There bee no participles exstant from verbs Im­personals, except Poenitens repenting, decens be­comming, libens & lubens willing, pertaesus irking, poenitendus to bee repented, pudens shaming, pudendus to bee ashamed, pigendus to bee irked.

Participles are turned into nouns Participials.

1. When they govern another case then their verb doth govern; as, Amans pecuniae loving of manie.

2. When they are compounded with words which their verbs will not bee compounded withal; as, [Page 172] Infans an infant, Indoctus unskilful.

3. When they bee compared; as, Amans loving. Amantior more loving, Amantissimus verie loving.

4. When they signifie no time; as, Sapiens wise, Sponsa a bride.

Participles of the Present tens verie often becom Substantives, somtimes of the Masculine gender; as, Oriens the East: somtimes of the Feminine; as, Consonans a Consonant: somtimes of the Neuter; as, Accidens an accident: somtimes of the Common of three; as, Appetens greedie of.

Participles of the Present tens are declined with three Articles; as, Hic, haec, & hoc Amans, like Felix.

Participles of other tenses are declined with three terminations; as, Amatus, ta, tum; Amaturus, ra, rum, Amandus, da, dum, like Bonus.

Chap. 40 Of an Adverb.

V. An Adverb explaineth a Verb. There bee 33 kindes of Adverbs.

AN ADVERB is a part of Speech added to other words (but especially to the Verb) to declare and perfect their sens and signification.

The Significations of Adverbs are manie, whose varietie must bee gathered out of the Circumstan­ces of the Verbs.

According to their signification som are called Adverbs ofPlace, and sig­nifieIn a Place; as, Hic here, Illic there.
To a Place; as, Huc hither, Illuc thither.
From a Place; as, Hinc hence, Illinc thence.
By a Place; as, Hac this waie, Illac that waie.
Time; as, Nunc now, tunc then, hodie to date; usque until, or as far as, is both of Time and Place.
Number; as, Semel once, bis twice, ter thrice, iterum again.
Order; as, Indè after that, deni (que) lastly, demū lastly.
Asking; as, Cur why, quare wherefore, unde whence.
Calling; as, Heus ho, ô eho so ho.
Affirming; as, Certè truly, nae truly, profectò scilicet yes.
Denying; as, Non not, haud not, minimè no.
Swearing; as, Pol by Apollo, aedipol by Apol­lo's temple, hercle by Hercules.
Exhorting; as, Agè go to, sodes if you dare, sûltis if you will.
Granting; as, Licèt it may bee so, estò bee it so, sit sanè bee it indeed so.
Forbidding; at, Nè not, non not.
Flattering; as, Amabò prethee.
Wishing; as Ʋtinam would to God, ô si O that.
Gathering together; as, Simul together, unà in one, pariter alike.
Parting; as, Seorsim severally, gregatim by flocks, bifariam two waies.
Choosing; as, Potiùs rather, imò yea rather, satiùs better.
Excluding; as, Tantùm onely, modò onely, solùm onely.
Including or denying onely; as, Non modò not onely, non solùm not onely, nedum much less.
Diversitie; as, Aliter otherwise, secus otherwise.
Propinquitie or Nearness; as, Obviàm meeting, praestò at hand.
Intending or Increasing; as, Valdè very, nimis too, funditus utterly, omnino altogether.
Remitting or diminishing; as, Vix scarce, aegrè hardly, paulatim by little and little, pedetentim foot by foot.
Restraining; as, Quatenus as for as, quoad as much concerneth, in-quantum in as much as.
Of a thing not finished; as, Penè almost, ferme in a manner.
Explaining; as Putà suppose, utpote as, nimirum to wit, id est that is, videlicet to wit, quasi dicat as if one should saie.
Doubting; as, Forsan perhaps, forsitan perhaps so, fortassis if it bee so.
Chance; as, Fortè as it fall's out, fortuitò by chance, fortè-fortunâ by fortune.
Shewing; as, En lo, ecce behold, sic thus, ità so.
Likeness; as, Sic so, sicut as, ceu as, tanquam as, ita as.
Quantitie; as, Parùm a little, minimè very little, satis enough, abunde in abundance.
Qualitie; as, Bene well, malè ill, and such as end in e, and com of Adjectives of three termina­tions; as, Doctè learnedly, Pulcrè bravely; al­so such as end in er, and com of Adjectives of three Articles; as, graviter heavily, feliciter happily.
Comparing; as, Tam as well, quàm as, minùs less, aequè as well as, magis atque rather then.

Adverbs derived of Adjectives are compared like Adjectives, and differ onely in termination; as, Do­ctè learnedly, doctiùs more learnedly, doctissimè most learnedly; fortiter strongly, fortiùs more strongly, for­tissimè most strongly.

[Page 178] Likewise Bene well, meliùs better, optimè very well; Saepe often, saepius more often, saepissimè very often; nuper lately, nuperrimè very lately with ma­nie others.

Somtimes Adjectives of the Neuter Gender, take upon them the nature of Adverbs, in imitation of the Greeks; as, Recèns for recenter newly, Torvùm for torvè frowningly.

Chap. 41. Of a Conjunction.

VI. A Conjun­ction con­joineth words and sentences. Its kindes according to significa­tion are 17. According to its Or­der four.

A CONjUNCTION is a part of Speech which fitly joineth words and sentences toge­ther.

According to their signification som beeCopulatives, which couple both the sens and the words; as, Et and, que and, nec nor.
Suspensives, which staie the speech, or make another thing to bee exspected; as, Cùm both, tum both, & both, vel either, nec nei­ther.
Disjunctives, which sever the sens and couple the words; as, Aut or, sive or, vel or.
Causals, which give the reason of the former sentence; as, Nam for, enim for, quia becaus.
Discretives, which make a difference; as, Sed but, verò but, at but.
Conditionals, which implie a condition; as, Si if, sin but if, nisi except, dum so that.
Exceptives, which except some thing; as, Ni unless, nisi except, quin but, alioquin otherwise.
Interrogatives, which ask a question; as, Nè whether, an whether, utrùm whether.
Dubitatives, which propound a doubt; as, An whether or no, num whether or no, nunquid what.
Rationals, or Illatives, which infer the conclu­sion [Page 180] from the reason set down; as, Ergò there­fore, ideo therefore, itaque therefore.
Continuatives, which continue the members of a speech in order; as, Deinde after, porrò fur­thermore, proinde thereupon, insuper moreover.
Concessives, or Adversatives, which grant som­what which the following sentence may op­pose; as Etsi although, quanquam although, licèt though, tametsi although, quamvis al­though.
Redditives to the same, which beeing referred to their Concessives, make a sentence divers from the former; as Tamen yet, attamen but yet, verùm but, veruntamen yet notwithstanding.
Electives, which shew the former member of the sentence to bee preferred; as, Quàm as, ac as, atque as.
Diminutives, which lessen the sens; as, saltem at least, vel even.
Expletives, or Completives, which fill up a sen­tence for ornament's sake; as, Quidem, in­deed, autem and, scilicet forsooth, enimvero truly.
Conjunctions adverbial, or Adverbs conjun­ctive, which with a very little difference are discerned from Adverbs; as, Quando when, or seeing that, proinde therefore, or then.

According to their Order som beePrepositives, which are set in the beginning of sentences; as, Nam for, quare, wherefore, at but.
Subjunctives, or Postpositives, which have the second, third, or fourth place in a claus, as, Quidem indeed, quoque also, verò indeed, enim for.
Commons, which may indifferently bee set be­fore or after; as, Ergò therefore, igitur there­fore, itaque therefore, sed but.
Encliticals, or Inclinatives, which are annexed to the former word, and incline or turn back their accent into the last syllable of it; as, Que, nè, ve, dum, sis, nam.
Chap. 42. Of a Preposition.

VII. A Preposi­tion is set before other words. There bee 54 Prepo­sitions, som of which are 1 Separable. 2. Others Inseparable

A PREPOSITION is a part of Speech which is set before other words,

either inApposition; as, Ad scholam to the school.
Composition; as, Advenio to com to.

Prepositions are either1. Separable.
Or,
2. Inseparable.

Separable Prepositions are used both in and out of Composition; of whose regiment wee shall treat, LIB. 3. CAP. 8.

For thirtie one of these govern an Accusative case, viz.

Ad to. Erga towards.Praeter besides.
Apud at. Extra without.Propter becaus of.
Adversùsagainst.Infra below.Secundùm accor­ding to.
AdversùmInter between.
Ante before. Intra within.Secus by.
Cison this side.Juxta by.Supra above.
CitraOb for.Trans beyond.
Circumabout.Penès in the power.Versùs towards.
CircaPer by.Ʋltra beyond.
CirciterPonè behinde. 
Contra against. Post after. 
  • Which som have comprised in these four Verses.
    • Ad, penès, adversùs, cis, citra, circiter, extra,
    • Erga, apud, ante, secus, trans, supra, versùs, ob, intra,
    • [Page 184]Ʋltra, post, praeter, propter, prope, ponè, secundùm,
    • Per, circum, circa, contra, juxta, inter, & intra,
  • And twelv govern an Ablative case, viz. A, ab, abs, from; absque without, coram before, cum with, de, è, ex of, prae before, pro for, sine without.

Five govern both these cases; viz. Clam privily, in in, sub, & subter under, super above; onely tenus up to, will have an Ablative case singular, and Ge­nitive plural.

Inseparable Prepositions are such as are never found without Composition, viz.

Am,asAmbio, to go about.
Di,Diduco, to go aside.
Dis,Distraho, to distract
Re,asRecipio to recciv.
Se,Sepono to set aside.
Con,Convivo to live toge­ther.
Ve,Vesanus outragious.

The signification of Prepositions is not so much to bee learned by rules, as by daily use of reading and writing.

Som Prepositions are wont to bee set after their cases; viz. Cum, as quibuscum with whom; tenus, as pube tenus up to the thin; versùs, as Londinum versùs towards London; to which usque may bee added, as ad Orientem usque as far as the East.

Prepositions when they bee put without a case becom Adverbs; as, Coràm laudare, clàm vituperare, to prais one in presence, and disprais privily.

Som Adverbs, Conjunctions, and Prepositions ac­cording to their several signification are judged som­times Prepositions, somtimes Adverbs, and somtimes Conjunctions.

Som Prepositions do make Adjectives of the Com­parative and Superlative degree, as in Chap. 17. l2.

Chap. 43. Of an Interjection.

VIII. An Interje­ction is put in amongst other words.

AN Interjection is a part of Speech interposed among others, which signifieth a passion of the minde suddenly breaking forth.

[Page 186] There bee so manie Interjections then as there are motions of a troubled minde, viz. of

  • Rejoicing; as, Evax hey brave, vah how, io O fine.
  • Sorrowing; as, Heu alas, hei, hoi welladay, ô, oh ah.
  • Dreading; as, Atat out alas.
  • Marvelling; as, Papae O strange!
  • Disdaining; as, Hem oh, vah away with it.
  • Shunning; as, Apage abant, apagite bee gon.
  • Calling; as, Eho, how, ho, io so ho.
  • Praising; as, Euge weldon, eja aha.
  • Scorning; as, Hui whoo.
  • Exclaiming; as, Proh O.
  • Cursing; as, Malùm a mischief, vae malùm wo with a mischief.
  • Disliking; as, Phy out upon it.
  • Threatning; as, Vae wo.
  • Laughing; as, Ha, ha, he.
  • Silence; as, Au 'st, whisht, Pax peace.

Somtimes Nouns, Verbs, and other words are put into a Speech in manner of Interjections; as, Infan­dùm not to bee spoken, Amabò of all loves, or as thou lovest mee, Malùm a mischief, mirabile dictu wonderful to bee said. &c.

LIB. III. OF SYNTAX.

Syntax teacheth the due joining of words, By rules,

SYNTAX, or Construction, is the third part of Grammar, which teacheth the due joining of words together.

And that is the due joining of words which the most approved among the antients have used both in writing and speaking.

There bee two parts of Syntax,Concordance, &CHAP. 1
Government,CHAP. 2.

Chap. 1. Of Concordance.

1. Of Con­cordance.

COncordance is the construction of words accord­ing to their agreement in som of the things that belong unto them.

There bee three Concords,The first between the Nominative case and the Verb. §. I.
The second between the Substan­tive and the Adjective. §. II.
The third between the Antece­dent and the Relative. §. III.
To which may bee added the RulesOf the case of the Relative. §. IV.
Of the word that asketh, and the word that answereth to the que­stion. §. V.
§. I. The Rule of the first Concord.

A Verb Personal agreeth with its Nominative case in Number and Person; as,

  • The Master readeth, and yee neglect.
  • Whil'st the cat sleepeth, the mice dance.

1. Obs. The Nominative case of the first or second person is very seldom set down; as,

Without God (wee) can do nothing.

1. Exc. Unless it bee for differencing sake, i. e. when wee signifie several emploinients; as,

Thou plaiest, I ply my book.

2. Exc. Or for Emphasis sake, i. e. when wee mean more then wee speak expresly; as,

Thou art our Patron, thou art our Father, if thou forsakest us, wee are undon.

2. Obs. The Verb Substantive is very often under­stood; as, There (is) no safetie in War.

Such a Master, such a man.

3. Obs. Oft-times other Verbs (also) are understood; as, (* To prick out) the raven's eies.

The sow († will return) to the mire.

§. II. The Rule of the second Concord.

THe Adjective agreeth with its Substantive in case, gender, and number; as,

True faith is a rare bird in the earth, and verie like to a black swan.

An hastie bitch bringeth forth blinde whelps.

1. Obs. An Adjective put like a Substantive doth supply the place of a Substantive; as,

  • A learned poor man is better then an unlearned rich man.
  • All evil things are to bee avoided.
  • A good man is a common good.
§. III. The Rule of the third Concord.

3. The third.

THe Relative (qui) agreeth with its Antece­dent in gender, number, and person; as,

  • The man is wise that speaketh few words.
  • The first hour that gave life, took from it.
  • The burden is made light, which is well born.

N. B. The Antecedent (most commonly) is a word that goeth before the Relative, and is rehearsed again of the Relative.

The Nominative case, the Substantive, and the An­tecedent bee called Supposites, becaus in Concor­dance they bee (as it were) put under the Verb, Ad­jective, and Relative (which also by som are called Apposites) and bear them up. hence

1. Obs. In speeches which belong onely to men, the Supposite is often understood; as,

  • Thus (men) say commonly.
  • Good (boies) learn diligently.
  • A good (woman) com of good parents.
  • Hee) that maketh too much hast, dispatcheth too late.
  • (Things) which hurt us teach us.

2. Obs. Somtimes a whole claus, a member of a sentence, a Verb of the Infinitive mood, an Adverb with a Genitive case, or a word put for it self, do supplie the place of Supposites; as,

  • To-have-faithfully-learned-the-Liberal-Arts, doth qua­lifie men's manners.
  • To-rise-early is verie wholsom.
  • Part of the ensigns are burnt.
  • I-came-in-season, which is the chiefest of all things.
  • Farewel beeing often said, I again spake manie words.

[Page 184] 3. Obs. The Supposite somtimes agreeth with the Verb, or Adjective, or Relative in sens rather then words, as;

  • A companie rush. Both are deluded, or mocked.
  • An armed Nation fight.
  • Where is that rogue that hath undon mee?

4. Obs. A Verb, Adjective, or Relative set between two Supposites of divers numbers or genders may agree with either of them. as.

  • The falling out of lovers is the renewing of love.
  • Povertie seemed a great burden.
  • A living-creature full of reason, whom wee call a man.
  • A bird which is called a sparrow.
  • The Citie Lutetia which wee call Paris.

5. Obs. Many Supposites Singular having a Con­junction Copulative between them, wil have a Verb, Adjective, or Relative plural, and these will agree with the more worthie supposite: as.

  • I and thou, who plie our books diligently are in safetie.
  • Thou and hee, who sit so negligent, take heed you bee not whipt.
N. B. The worthiness of a Supposite is considered according to its1 Gender; or,
2 Person.

1 The first Person is more worthie then the Second, or third, & the second more worthie then the third.

2. The Masculine Gender is more worthie then the Feminine, or Neuter; and the feminine is more worthie then the Neuter.

Excep. But in things not apparent to have life the Neuter Gender is more worthie, as,

  • The Bows and the Arrows are good.
  • Thy rod and thy staff, (these) have comforted mee.

6. Obs. When the Verb or Adjective answereth to manie supposites it agreeth expressly with that which is nearest to it, and with the rest by supplying it, as,

  • Thou liest where I (lie,) thou suppest when wee (sup).
  • The husband and the wife is angrie.

Exc. Yet when there is a comparison or likeness, the Verb or Adjective agreeth with the Supposite which is further from it; as,

  • I write better then thou (writest).
  • God's law is sweet, as honie (is sweet).

7. Obs. A Pronoun Primitive seem's to bee inclu­ded or understood in a Possessive, and therefore the Relative or Adjective do oft agree with such a Pri­mitive; as,

  • It concerneth not mee, who am the eldest.
  • Seeing no bodie readeth my writings fearing to re­cite them publickly.
§. IV The Rule concerning the case of the Relative.

To which add, 4. The case of the Re-lative.

WHen there cometh no Nominative case between the Relative and the Verb, the Relative shall bee the Nominative case to the verb; as,

Hee that bewareth not afore, shall bee sorrie after­ward. That which (is) rare, (is) dear.

Hee may easily finde a stick, who desire's to beat a dog.

But if there doth com a Nominative case between the Relative and the Verb, the Relative shall bee governed of the Verb, or of som other word in the same sentence; as,

  • Oft-times thou maist conquer by patience, whom thou canst not conquer by force.
  • If (thou) canst not do what (thou) wouldest; will that, which (thou) maiest do.
  • Whose shadow I reverence.
  • Like to whom I have not seen.

[Page 198] 1. Obs. As the Relative may bee the Nominative case to the Verb, so it may bee the Substantive to an Adjective; as,

  • Hee that rejoiceth at other men's evils is twice wretched.
  • Happie is hee, whom other men's harms make warie.

2. Obs. Nouns Interrogatives and Indefinites do follow the rule of the Relative, which evermore go before the Verb, like as the Relative doth; as,

What an one was hee? Hee was such an one as I never saw.
§. V. The rule of the Question and Answer.

5: Of the Question and Answer.

WHen a question is asked, the answer must bee made by the same case and tens that the question is asked by; as,

What do yee? Wee plie our books.

Who is rich? Hee that desireth nothing. Who is poor? The covetous man. What is now adoing in England? They consult about Religion.

1. Obs. This rule faileth when the divers nature of words requireth divers cases; viz.

1. When a question is made by Cujus, ja, jum; as, Whose cattle are these? Egon's.

2. Or by a word that may govern divers cases; as,

  • Is hee accused of theft? or of murder? Of both.
  • What cost it? A pennie.

3. When one may answer by a Possessive; as,

  • Whose book is this? Mine.
  • Whose hous is this? My Father's.

Chap. 2. Of the Government of Nouns.

2. Of Con­struction. 1. Of Nouns.

GOvernment is the Construction of words, accor­ding to which everie aforegoing word govern­eth a certain case or mood of the word which fol­loweth it.

Government isOf Nouns, Chap. 2.
Of Pronouns, Chap. 3.
Of Verbs, Chap. 4.
Of Participles, Chap. 5.
Of Adverbs, Chap. 6.
Of Conjunctions, Chap. 7.
Of Prepositions, Chap. 8.
Of Interjections, Chap. 9.

For all parts of Speech govern cases except a Conjunction, which yet will have certain moods and tenses.

Nouns govern four cases:A Genitive, §. VI.
A Dative, §. VII.
An Accusative, §. VIII.
An Ablative, §. IX.
§. VI. The rule of Nouns governing a Genitive case.

6. With a Genitive case.

THese are they that govern a Genitive case.

I. Substantives: For when two Substantives com together betokening divers things, the later shall bee the Genitive case; as,

  • The fear of the Lord is the beginning of wisdom.
  • God's word remaineth for ever.

1. Obs. But if two or more Substantives belong to one thing, they shall bee put in the same case; as,

  • My father beeing a man loveth mee a childe.
  • Mark Tullie Cicero the Prince of Orators.

2. Obs. The Genitive case of the owner is often changed into an Adjective Possessive; as,

  • My father's hous.
  • My master's son.

3. Obs. The former Substantive is somtimes under­stood by an Ellipsis or defect of a word; as,

  • To *Church. St Marie's.
  • I saw this man's †Servant. Byrrhia.
  • The third *Daie. of the Kalends.

4. An Adiective of the Neuter gender beeing put for a Substantive will have a Genitive case; as,

  • As much monie as any man keep's in his chest, so much credit hee hath.
  • Wee do not see that (end) of the wallet which is on the back.

So also will others after the Greek fashion; as,

  • Black wooll will take no die.
  • Sneaking dogs clap the tail under the bellie.

5. Words importing anie qualitie to the prais or disprais of a thing, coming after a Noun or Verb Substantive, shall bee put in the Ablative or Geni­tive case; as,

  • A childe of an ingenuous look, and ingenuous blush.
  • Everie basest fellow is of a most lavish tongue.

6. Opus and Ʋsus when they bee Latine for need, will have an Ablative case; as,

  • What need words?
  • Hee hath need of twentie pounds.

But Opus necessarie, admit's of divers cases; as,

  • A guide is necessarie for us.
  • Get such things as are necessarie for you.

II. Adjectives that signifie desire, knowledg, re­membrance, care, fear, or such like passion of the minde; as, The nature of man is eager of news.

  • The minde is foresighted of that which is to com.
  • Live mindeful of death. Fearful of a storm.
  • Ignorant of learning.

III. Adjectives derived of Verbs that end in ax; as, Virtue is an abandoner of vices.

Time is a consumer of things.

IV. Nouns Partitives; as, Som of you.

Take whether of these thou wilt.

V. Nouns beeing put partitively; viz. having after them this english of or among; such as are,

1. Certain Interrogatives; as, Which of the bre­thren? Is there anie among men so miserable as I am.

2. Certain nouns of Number; viz. Cardinals and Ordinals; as, Four of the Judges.

It is not yet apparent who was the eighth of the wise men.

3. Nouns of the Comparative and Superlative degree; as,

Of the hands the right is the stronger.

The middle finger is the longest among the fingers.

1. Obs. Yet these in another sens will have an Ab­lative case; as,

The first from Hercules. The third from Aeneas.

2. And in another sens a Dative; as,

Second to none in godliness.

3. They are used also with the Prepositions by which their Genitive case is explained; as,

One of you is a god. One alone of a great manie.

The chief amongst all.

VI. Besides a great companie of other Adjectives, (viz. Compos, reus, exsors, particeps, and the like) which may better bee learned by frequent reading; as,

Able to perform his vow. Accused of theft. Exempted from all fault. Partaking of his counsel.

Touching which see LINACER'S or DISPAU­TER'S Grammars.

§. VII. The rule of Nouns governing a Dative case.

7. A Dative.

THese govern a Dative case.

I. Adjectives that betoken

1. Profit or Disprofit; as,

  • O bee good and favorable to thine own.
  • Fit for the Countrie, profitable for the field.
  • A rout grievous to the peace, and enemie to gentle rest.

2. Likeness or Unlikeness; as,

  • A Poët is verie near to an Orator. Equal to Hector.
  • Disagreeing to the truth.

3. Pleasure; as, Pleasant to all persons.

4. Submitting; as, Beseeching his father.

5. Belonging to anie thing; as,

  • Idleness will bee troublesom to thee.
  • There is no waie unpassable for virtue.

6. Hitherto are referred nouns compounded with Con; as, Cognatus mihi, a kin to mee.

1. Obs. Yet som of these which signifie Likeness may have a Genitive case; as,

  • Thou art like thy Master.
  • Hee was equal to this man. Partaker of the roguerie.

2. Obs. Communis, alienus, immunis, proprius, conscius, and superstes will have divers cases; as,

  • Common to all living creatures.
  • Death is common to all men.
  • This is common betwixt mee and thee.
  • Ʋnmeet for the purpose. Far from ambition.
  • Estranged from Scevola's studies.
  • Free from this evil. Free to all.
  • Wee are free from those evils.
  • It's proper to fools. Proper to mee.
  • I am guiltie to my self of no fault.
  • [Page 208]Hee was privie to the prank.
  • Hee outlived his honor.
  • That surviveth other things.

3. Obs. Natus, commodus, incommodus, utilis, inutilis, vehemens, aptus, ineptus, par, aequalis, will have som­times an Accusative case with a Preposition; as,

  • Born to glorie. Shoos fit for the feet.
  • A man good of no side.
  • Virtues are equal and even amongst themselvs.

II. Nouns Adjectives derived of Verbs, and of the Passive signification in bilis; as,

  • Hee is dead, beeing to bee lamented of all good men.
  • And more to bee lamented by none then thee.
§. VIII. The Rule of Nouns that govern an Accusative case.

ADjectives govern an Accusative which signifie the measure of length, bredth, or thickness of anie thing; as, A foot high. An hand broad.

Three fingers thick. Seven foot long.

But they som­times also governA Genitive case; as, Borders ten foot broad.
An Ablative; as, A Well three foot wide.
§. IX. The Rule of Nouns governing an Ablative case.

I. THese govern an Ablative case.

1 Nouns, and Adverbs of the Comparative degree having then, by, or in after them; as,

  • Silver is baser then gold, and gold then virtue.
  • No Theatre to truth is greater then Conscience.
  • Higher by a foot. To excel in strength.

[Page 210] 1. Obs. Tantò, quantò, multò, paulò, nimiò, eò, quò, hoc, aetate, natu, are joined to both degrees of compari­son; as,

  • Hee is far more skilful then the rest, but not much better.
  • By how much one is less learned, by so much hee is more impudent. The greatest in age, i. e. The eldest.
  • The less by birth, i. e. The youngest.

II. These Adjectives dignus, indignus, praeditus, captus, contentus, extorris, fretus; as,

  • Thou art worthie of hatred.
  • Ʋnbefitting the gravitie of a wiseman.
  • Endued with everie virtue. Deprived of eies.
  • Get thee hence, content with thy condition.
  • Banished from his own hous. Trusting to thy clemencie.

1. Obs. But dignus, and indignus will have somtimes a Genitive case; as, A warfare worth thy labor.

Not unworthie of his great Ancestors.

III. Nouns of Diversitie will have an Ablative case with a Preposition; as, Another thing from this. Another man from him.

And somtimes a Dative, as, Different from this thing.

IV. Adjectives and Verbs that signifie plentie or want will have an Ablative, and somtimes a Geni­tive case; as, Love is verie full both of honie and gall.

  • Love is a thing full of thoughtsom fear.
  • Thou aboundest in love. Thou wantest virtue.
  • Rich in white cattle. Rich in grounds.
  • Void of guile. Blessed with grace.
  • Go on or increas in virtue. Ʋpright in life.

1: Obs. Som of these will have also an Ablative case with a Preposition; as, Void of anger.

V. Anie Adjective or Verb wil have an Ablative case,

1. Of the Instrument; as, Stout at the sword.

Better at Oars. JESUS vanquished the Devil, not with arms, but with death.

[Page 212] 2. Of the Caus; as, Pale with anger. Wors for too much libertie.

3. Of the Circumstance or manner of doing of the thing; as,

  • An envious man groweth lean at the prosperitie of another. By name a Grammarian, but indeed a Bar­barian. A Trojane by birth, a Syrian by nation.
  • Crooked old age wil com by and by with a stil pace

1. Obs: But somtimes the Ablative case of the caus or manner of doing will have a Preposition, as,

  • Ʋnprovided of monie.
  • Hee used the man with a great deal of courtesie.

VI. Adjectives and Verbs of buying and selling will have an Ablative case of the price, as,

  • Cheap at twentie pounds. Dear at a farthing.
  • Not to bee sold for pearls, or purple, or gold.
  • That victorie cost much blood, and manie wounds.
  • Hee taught for wages. Wheat is sold at a low rate.
  • To hire for a pennie. To let for a shilling.
  • Hee live's at ten pounds rent.

1. Obs. Yet these words, when they are without Substantives, are put after Verbs in the Genitive case; viz. Tanti, quanti, pluris, minoris, as,

  • I sell not for more then others, but for less.
  • Things are so much worth as they may be sold for.

N. B. A Noun or Pronoun Substantive, joined with a Participle, expressed or understood, and ha­ving no other word whereof it may bee governed, shall bee put in the Ablative case absolute; as,

  • The King coming the enemies ran away i, e. When
  • the King com's. I beeing Captain.
  • And it may bee resolved by whilst, when, if, &c.

VII. Adjectives, and Verbs Passives and Neuters that signifie som propertie or passion, will have an Accusative case, or Ablative, signifying the part or place wherein the propertie or passion is; as,

  • Hee is diseased in his feet. Hee is sick in minde rather then in bodie.
  • Hee hath red hair. Red-haired.

1. Obs. But the part affected is somtimes put in the Genitive case; as, O thou! that hast an happie wit.

Thou troublest thy self in minde.

2. Obs. These bee Greek phrases:

Merrie as concerning other things. Like in other things. Like him both in speech and color.

Chap. 3. Of the government of Pronouns.

2. Of Pro­nouns.

THese Genitive cases of the Primitives Meî, tuî, suî, nostrî and vestrî bee used when suffering or passi­on is signified, but Meus, tuus, suus, noster and vester bee used when action or possession is signified, as, Part of thee. Thy part. The image of us. Our image. The love of himself. His own love. (i. e.) of mee.

1. Obs. Possessives are somtimes put for Primitives, as, Hee did it for my sake.

2. Obs: Nostrûm and vestrûm bee used after distribu­tives, Partitives, Comparatives and Superlatives, as, Som of you. The bigger of you. The eldest of us.

3. Obs: Meus, tuus, suus, noster vester, will have cer­tain genitive cases after them, viz. Ipsius, solius, unius duorum, trium, &c. omnium, plurium, paucorum, and the genitives of participles which are referred to the Primitive understood in the Possessive, as,

  • Thou shalt guess out of thine own minde.
  • Thou hast seen the eies of mee weeping.

II. Ipse and idem may bee joined to all persons.

  • I my self will see. Thou thy self go on to do it.
  • Plato himself said. Hee himself did it.

Idem governeth somtimes a Dative case, as,

  • Hee that saveth a man against his will, doth the same as hee that kil's him.
  • But more commonly an Ablative case with a Pre­position, as. The same with it.

III. Ille noteth the eminencie or worth of a thing; and Iste the baseness or contempt of it, as, That brave Alexander the great. That mean fellow.

Hic is for the most part referred to the later Ante­cedent, and the nearer to its self; ille to the former, and the further from it, as,

  • The husbandman's aim is contrarie to the shepard's;
  • hee look's for profit from his land; and hee from his stock of cattle.

Chap. 4. Of the government of Verbs.

VErbs go vern aNominativeCase,§. X.
Genitive§. XI.
Dative§. XII.
Accusative§. XIII.
Ablative§. XIV.

To which also belong the RulesOf such as have a divers constru­ction. §. XV.
Of the Infinitive mood, of the Ge­runds, and Supines. §. XVI.
Of time, space and place. §. XVII.
Of Verbs Impersonals. §. XVIII.
§. X. The Rule of Verbs governing a Nominative Case.

3. Of Verbs with 1. A Nomi­native.

VErbs Substantives, certain passives, and Verbs of gesture will have a Nominative case after them as well as before them, as,

  • God is the chiefest good.
  • Faith is accounted the foundation of our Religion.
  • An evil sheapherd sleepeth void of care.
  • Hee will becom a learned man.

1. Obs: All manner of Verbs (almost) will have after them a Nominative case of the Noun Ad­jective, that agreeth with the Nominative case of the Verb, in case, Gender. & Number, as,

  • The earth remaineth unmoveable. I write very seldom.
  • Good boies learn diligently. I speak often.
§. XI. The Rule of Ʋerbs governing a Genitive Case.

2. A Geni­tive.

THese Verbs govern a Genitive case:

I. Sum, when it betokeneth possession, or, otherwise perteining to a thing, as a propertie or dutie, as, This hous is my father's hous.

  • It is (the dutie) of a young man to reverence his elders.
  • It is the propertie of a good sheapherd to shear his sheep, not to pill them.

1. Obs: But som Adjectives as meum, tuum, huma­num, &c. are put in the Nominative case where officium or munus (a dutie) seem's to bee understood, as, by an Ellipsis.

  • It is not my dutie to speak against the Autoritie of the Senate.
  • It is incident to a man to bee angrie. It is a beastlie part to rage.
  • It is a Kinglie part to do well.

II. Verbs that betoken to esteem or regard, as,

  • Honestie is reckoned little worth.
  • Monie is every where much regarded:
  • I care not this for thee, who valuest mee but an hair.
  • [Page 220]I take it in good part.

1. Obs. But aestimo will have an Ablative case; as,

  • Virtue is much to bee esteemed.
  • Hee valued it at three-pence.

2. Obs. Valeo will have a Genitive, an Accusative, or an Ablative case; as, It is so much worth.

It is worth two farthings.

3. Obs. Wee say also, I account, or esteem it as nothing.

III. Verbs of accusing, condemning, warning, or acquitting, will have a Genitive case of the crime or punishment; as, It behooveth him to look to himself, that accuseth another of dishonestie.

They condemned most innocent Socrates to lose his life.

  • Hee admonished mee of a mistake.
  • Hee is acquitted of theft.

1. Obs. And this Genitive case is turned somtimes into an ablative, either with, or without a prepo­sition; as, I will condemn thee of the same fault.

  • Is hee accused of theft, or dishonestie? Of both.
  • I thought that thou wert to bee admonished of that matter.

IV. Satago, misereor, and miseresco; as,

  • Hee is busie about his own matters. Pitie the pains.
  • Pitie thine own stock.

1. Obs. But misereor and miseresco, are somtimes read with a Dative case; as,

Pitie this man. Have compassion on the bad.

V. Reminiscor, obliviscor, and memini; as,

  • Hee remembreth his promise. It is the propertie of fools to see other men's faults and forget their own.
  • I will make thee to remember mee alwaies.

1. Obs. And these will have also an Accusative case; as, I remember my lesson. I forget the song.

VI. Som also, after the manner of the Greeks, will have a Genitive case; as,

  • Ceastheir womanish complaints.
  • [Page 222]It is time to give over the fight.
  • Hee is worthy of all mischief, that blusheth at his Fortune.
§. XII. Of Verbs governing a Dative case.

3. Dative.

ALl manner of Verbs put acquisitively, i. e. which are known commonly by these tokens to or for after them will have a Dative case, as,

  • I have it for this man and not for thee.
  • I sleep not to all men. Neither is there sowing nor mowing for mee there.
  • And to this rule do also belong Verbs that beto­ken,

1. To profit or disprofit, as,

  • It cannot profit or disprofit mee.
  • Hee hurteth the good, who spareth the bad.

2. To compare, as,

  • To compare great things with small.
  • Hee made himself equal to his Brother.

1. Obs: But these will have somtimes an Accusa­tive or an Ablative case with a Preposition, as,

  • If hee bee compared to him hee is nothing.
  • I compare Virgil with Homer.

3. To give or to restore, as,

  • Fortune hath given too much to manie, enough to none.
  • Hee is ungrateful that requite's not a favor to him that deserveth it.

4. To promise or paie, as,

  • I promise thee these things.
  • Hee hath paied the debt unto mee.

5. To command or to shew, as,

  • Monie hoarded up commandeth or serveth everieibodie.
  • Take heed oftimes, what thou saiest of anie bodie, and to whom.

[Page 224] 6. To trust, as, Beleiv not a woman, no though shee seem dead. I commit this to thy trust.

7. To Obey, or to bee against; as,

  • A dutiful son alwaies obeieth his father.
  • Fortune resisteth sluggish praiers.

8. To threaten or to bee angrie with; as,

  • Hee threatned death to them both.
  • I am angrie with thee.

9. Sum, with its Compounds, except possum; as,

  • Hee is a father to the citie, and a husband to the citie.
  • Manie things are wanting to them that desire manie things.

1. Obs. Likewise Sum and Suppetit signifying to have; as,

  • Everie man hath his own liking.
  • Wee have mellow apples.
  • Hee is not poor, who hath the use of things.

2. Obs. Sum, with manie others will have a dou­ble Dative case; as,

  • The sea is a destruction to greedie seamen.
  • A godlie King is an ornament to the Common-wealth.
  • Thou hopest it will bee a prais to thee, which thou im­putest as a fault to mee.

13. Verbs compounded with the Adverbs, Satis, bene, malè, and the Prepositions, Prae, ad, con, sub, ante, post, in, and inter; as,

  • Hee hath don good to manie, hee hath don ill to none.
  • I prefer no man before thee.
  • A new relator addeth somthing to things hee hath heard.

1. Obs. A few of these somtimes change their Da­tive case into another case; as;

  • One man excell's another in wit.
  • I forbid thee fire und water.

2. Obs. But Praeeo, praecedo, praecurro, with som other Compounds of prae, will have rather an Accusative case; as, Thou shalt go before mee.

[Page 226] 3. Obs. There is oft-times a Pleonasm or redun­dance of the Dative cases, Mihi, tibi, sibi; as,

I Slaie this man with his own sword.

N. B. Somtimes a Dative case is put figuratively in stead of an Accusative or Ablative with a Preposi­tion: and of som it is called the eighth case; as,

The crie goeth unto heaven. Keep the heat from the cattle.

§. XIII. The rule of Verbs governing an Accusative case.

4. Accusa­tive.

VErbs Transitives, are all such as have after them an Accusative case of the doer or sufferer as, Fear God. Honor the King.

  • It's a son's dutie to reverence his parents.
  • The fierce lioness followeth the wolf, and the wolf the kid.

1. Obs. Verbs absolute may have an Accusative case of their own signification, and somtimes an Abla­tive; as, I live a life. To live a life long.

Thou sleepest Endimion's sleep. They rejoiced with exceeding great joy. To go a long waie. To go the right waie. Hee died a sudden death.

2. Obs. Som verbs will have an Accusative case figu­ratively; as, Hee smell's like a goat. The voice sound's like a man. Hee offend's in the same thing.

They counterfeit sober men, and live riotously.

3. Verbs of Asking, teaching, and arraying, will have two Accusative cases, one of the Person, and another of the Thing; as,

  • Do thou onely ask God leav..
  • Hunger teacheth a man manie things.
  • Hee put on his shooes which hee had first put off.

[Page 228] 4. But som of these somtimes change the one Ac­cusative case into the Dative or Ablative, with, or without a Preposition; as, I put on thy coat, or,

I put thy coat on thee. Hee informeth the Senate of his journie. Let us intreat leav of him.

§. XIV. The rule of Verbs governing an Ablative case.

5. Ablative

THese govern an Ablative case.Concerning which wee have spoken afore in the Regiment of Nouns.
I. All Verbs, so that the Abla­tive case bee
1. Of the Instrument.
2. Of the Caus.
3. Of the Manner of doing.
II. Verbs of Price.
III. Verbs that signifie som propertie or passion:
IV. Verbs of plentie or scarceness.

V. Som certain Deponents and Neuters, viz.

Fungor,asThey that would get true glorie, must discharge the duties of Justice.
Fruor,It is the best to make use of another's madness.
Ʋtor,It helpeth in a bad matter, if thou canst use a good courage.
Vescor,I eat flesh.
Nitor,I trust to my strength. It becommeth one to relie on his virtue, not his blood.
Dignor,I think not my self worthie of such ho­nor.
ProsequorI pursue thee with love, i. e. I love thee.
Muto,Hee changeth square things for round.
Munero,Hee rewarded him with the fellowship of his Kingdom.
Supersedeo,Wee must leav off the multitude of examples.
Communico,I will give thee allowance at my table.
Afficio,I affect thee with joie, or, I make thee glad, with som few others.

VI. Verbs of Comparing or exceeding; as,

  • I prefer this man by manie degrees.
  • Hee is beyond him but a little space.
  • It is unseemly to bee overcom in virtue by those whom thou excellest in eminencie of place.

7. Verbs that betoken Receiving, distance, or ta­king away, will have an Ablative case with a Pre­position; as, I heard it of a manie. It is far distant from us. I delivered thee from the evils.

1. Obs. And this Ablative may bee turned into the Dative; as, Hee took his life from him.

VIII. Mereor will have an Ablative case with the Preposition De; as, Thou never deservedst well of mee.

Cataline deserved very ill of the Common-wealth.

IX. Verbs Passives will have after them an Abla­tive case with a Preposition, and somtimes a Dative; as, Virgil is read of mee. A boar is oft-times held by a little dog. Honest things, not hidden things are desired of good men.

1. Obs. The other cases remain in the Passives which belonged to their Actives; as,

  • Thou are accused by mee of theft.
  • Thou shalt bee made a mocking-stock.

2. Obs. Vapulo, vaeneo, liceo, exulo, and fio do follow the construction of Passives, i. e. they govern an Ablative case with a Preposition, or a Dative; as,

  • Thou shalt bee whipt by the master. I had rather bee spoiled by a citizen, then sold by an enemie.
  • What will becom of him? Virtue is cheapned by all at a low rate. Why is Philosophie banished from banquets.
§. XV. The rule of Verbs having divers Constructions.

With a di­vers Con­struction.

I. The same verb may have divers cases in a se­veral respect or consideration, as,

Hee gave mee his garment for a pawn, Thou beeing present, with his own hand.

II. These Verbs have a divers construction

  • 1. In the same signification, a.,
    • 1. I flatter thee.
    • 2. Hee bespotted mee.
    • 3. I hearken to thee.
    • 4. I agree with thee.
    • 5. I dissent from thee.
    • 6. I bestow a book on thee.
    • 7. I mock thee.
    • 8. I bestow my means on thee.
    • 9. I put on thy coat.
    • 10. Hee spread his cloak on the hors.
    • 11. I forbid thee this thing.
    • 12. I cure
      • my son
      • that diseas.
    • 13. I moderate my affection.
    • 14. I deprave thee.
    • 15. I tarrie for thee.
    • 16. I forbid thee the hous.
    • 17. I go into the hous.
  • 2. In different signification, as,
    • 1.
      I assentto thee.
      Icom
    • 2.
      I enviethee.
      I imitate
    • 3.
      I obeiethee.
      I hear
    • [Page 234]4.
      • I see to thee.
      • I avoid thee.
      • I make a caution, or I am careful for thee.
    • 5.
      • I give place to thee.
      • I go out of the Citie.
      • Give mee a book.
    • 6.
      • I advise, or look to thee.
      • I ask advice of thee.
      • I resolv concerning thee.
    • 7.
      • It hapneth to mee.
      • It toucheth mee.
    • 8.
      • I favor thee.
      • I desire thee.
    • 9.
      • It is wanting to mee.
      • Hee faileth mee.
      • Hee revolteth from mee.
    • 10.
      • I give, or send
      • letters to thee
        • to carrie to
        • one. to read.
    • 11.
      • I lend thee on usurie.
      • I borrow of thee on usurie
    • 12.
      • I am sick of a Fever.
      • I take pains for the publick safetie.
    • 13.
      • I am careful for thee.
      • I am affraid of thee.
    • 14.
      • I remember thee.
      • I spake of thee.
    • 15.
      • I conquer the citie.
      • I obtein my desire.
    • 16.
      • I promise you.
      • I entertain you.
      • I betake my self home.
    • 17.
      • I report it to you.
      • I propound it to you.
    • 18.
      • I refuse a gift.
      • I declare him Consul.
    • 19.
      • I paie thee.
      • I free thee.
    • [Page 236]20.
      • I endeavor this.
      • I desire this.
    • 22.
      • I labor about trifles.
      • I have leasure for trifles.
      • I am void of blame.
      • The place is emptie.

Use will teach the rest.

§. XVI. The Rule of the Infinitive mood.

Of the In­finitive mood.

VErbs of the Infinitive mood are put after Verbs or Adjectives, as,

  • Ponticus wilt thou bee made rich? Thou must de­sire nothing.
  • And hee was worthyto be loved.
  • Bold to endure all things. Enduring to bee called.

1. Obs. They have an Accusative case before them in stead of a Nominative as, I bid thee to go hence.

I bid thee bee in good health.

Which may bee resolved by that, as; I bid that thou go hence. I am glad that thou art in good health.

2. Obs. They have like cases before and after them; as, An Hypocrite desireth to seem just.

Nature hath granted to all men to bee happie, If anie knew how to use it.

3. Obs. They are somtimes put absolutely by an Ellipsis, as,

That these villanies should bee committed. i. e. It is fit.

The Lamb trembled. i. e. Begun to tremble.

§. XVII. The Rule of the Gerunds.

Of the Gerunds. Di. Do. Dum.

GErunds and Supines will have such a case as the Verbs that they com of, as,

[Page 238] Wee must use age. To hear a sermon.

And they are as it were Nouns of both Numbers

These inDiof theGenitiveCase
DumAccusative
DoAblative

as,An occasion of studying.
Fit to studie.
Wearie with studying.

Hence is it that,

1. The Gerund Di may bee used after certain Sub­stantives and Adjectives; as,

  • There is no place for telling.
  • The wicked love of having.
  • Certain of going. Skilful in darting.
  • For the caus of seeing them. Leav of snatching apples.

1. The Infinitive mood is somtimes put in stead of this Gerund; as, Skilful to heal.

2. Gerunds in Do bee used with one of these Pre­popositions; A, ab, abs, de, è, ex, cum, in pro; as,

  • Idle boies are quickly frighted from learning.
  • The manner of right writing is joined with speaking.

Obs. Somtimes they are used without a Prepositi­on; as, Wee learn by teaching.

3. The Gerund in Dum is used after one of these Prepositions, Inter, ante, ad, ob, propter; as,

  • In supper while bee merrie.
  • Christ died to redeem us.

1. Obs. When you have this English must or ought it may bee put in the Gerund in Dum, with the Verb est, and a Dative case expressed or understood; as,

I must go hence. Wee ought to praie that there may bee a sound minde in a sound bodie.

N. B. Gerunds are often turned into Participials in Dus, which agree with their Substantives; as,

  • In reading old Autors thou shalt profit.
  • [Page 240]It it the next to theft to bee drawn on by a re­ward to accuse men.
§. XVIII The Rule of Supines.

Of the Su­pines.

Um.

THe first Supine is put after Verbs, and Partici­ples that betoken moving to a place; as,

They com to look on. Why goest thou about to undo thy self.

1 Obs. But these have a motion scarce discernable; I set to sale. I bestow my daughter to bee married.

2. The Poëts saie, I go to visit. I go to see.

3. This Supine is put absolutely with the Verb est; It is don.

II. The later Supine is put after Nouns Adjectives; U. as, Easie to bee don. Ʋnhonest to bee spoken.

§. XIX. The Rule of Time.

Of Time.

NOuns are commonly used,

1. In the Ablative case, which betoken part of Time; i. e. with answer to when; as,

  • No man is wise at all hours.
  • Thou wakest in the night, and sleepest in the daie.

2. In the Accusative case, which signifie continu­al term of Time, without ceasing or intermission; i. e. with answer to the question how long? as,

  • Thou sleepest the whole winter.
  • Black Pluto's gate lieth open night and day.

1. Somtimes a Preposition is added; as,

Three months agoe. About three years. In a few daies. For a daie. About that age. About that time.

§. XX. The Rule of space or distance of place.

Of Space.

NOuns that betoken space between place and place bee commonly put in the Accusative case, and somtimes in the Ablative, as,

  • Depart not a foot-breadth from a good conscience.
  • They are not manie paces one from another.
§. XXI. The Rule of Nouns of place.

Of Place.

NOuns of place, when they follow a Verb that signifieth action or motion,

1. In a place, to a place, from a place, or by a place (if they: bee nouns Appellatives or proper names of great places viz. Regions &c.) bee put with a Pre­position, as, Hee is in the market.

  • I live in England. Hee went hence to the Church.
  • Hee came through France into Italie.
  • Hee is gon out of the town.

1. Obs. But somtimes the Preposition is under­stood; as, Hee went to Italie.

2. In a place or at a place (if they bee proper names of cities or towns) of the first or second declension and the Singular Number bee put in the Genitive case; But of the third Declension or Plu­ral number onely in the Ablative; as,

  • What should I do at Rome?
  • Hee lived at London. Hee was born at Athens.
  • I beeing unconstant love Tibur at Rome, and Rome at Tibur.

3. To a place (if they bee proper names) are put in the Accusative case, as,

  • I go to London to buie wares.
  • [Page 244]I went to Cambridg.

IV. From a place or by a place (if they bee pro­per names) are put in the Ablative case; as,

  • Hee went by London to Cambridge.
  • Hee went from London.

Ohs. Humus, militia, bellum, domus, and rus do fol­low the Rules of Proper Names of Cities or Towns as, Wee live together at home, and in the wars.

  • Hee was brought up in the Countrie.
  • I will go into the countrie. Go home.
  • Hee is returned out of the Countrie.
  • Hee is newly gon from home.
§. XXII. The Rule of the government of Impersonals.

Of Imper­sonals. 1 Active. 2. Passives.

I. IMpersonals of the Active voice govern,

1. A Genitive case, viz. Interest; refert, and est for interest; as, It concerneth all men to do well.

It much concerneth a Christian Common-wealth, that the Bishops bee learned and pious.

1. Obs. Except these Ablative cases, Meâ, tuâ, suâ, nostrâ, vestrâ, and Cuiâ, as,

  • It is expedient to thee to know thy self.
  • It little concerneth you.

II. A Dative, viz. Accidit, certum est, contingit, con­stat, confert, &c. which bee put acquisitively; as,

It is better for mee to die manfully, then to live with disgrace. I am resolved to run all hazards.

III. An Accusative 1. Onely, viz. Juvat, decet, delectat, oportet, as, It becometh not men to scold like women.

2. With the Preposition Ad, viz. Attinet, pertinet, spectat, as, It belongeth to thee. It belongeth to all men to live well.

3. With a Genitive viz. Poenitet, taedet, miseret, mi­serescit, pudet, piget; as,

  • It repenteth everie one of his own estate.
  • It irketh mee of my life.

II. Impersonals of the Passive voice have such cases as other Verbs Passives have; as,

  • Neither is there sowing nor mowing there for mee.
  • Hee is gon to Athens. They slept all night.
  • The enemies fought stoutly.

1. Obs. Yet manie times the case is not expressed; as, What do they in the School? They plie their books.

Chap. 5. Of the Government of Participles.

5. Of Par­ticiples.

PArticiples govern such cases as the Verbs that they com of; as, Like to enjoie his friends.

Taking order for thee. Called the seven wise men.

1 Obs. But when they bee changed into Nouns they will have a Genitive case; as,

Greedie of another man's goods. Most desirous of thee.

2. Participials in Dus will have a Dative case; as,

Hee is to bee earnestly entreated by mee.

3. Exosus, and perosus having the Active significa­tion will have an Accusative case; as,

Hating crueltie.

But having the Passive, a Dative; as,

Hated of God and good men.

4. Pertaesus will have a Genitive or an Accusative case; as, Wearie of wedlock. Wearie of his sluggish­ness.

5. Natus, prognatus, satus, cretus, creätus, ortus, editus, will have an Ablative case; as,

  • O thou that art born of a Goddess!
  • A good woman com of good parents.
  • Of what blood is hee com?

Chap. 6. Of the Government of Adverbs.

6. Adverbs. 1. With Case.

§. I. Of Adverbs which govern cases.

ADverbs govern,

1. A Nominative case, viz. En see, and Ecce behold, beeing adverbs of Shewing; as,

Behold Priam. Lo two Altars.

1 Obs. But beeing Adverbs of upbraiding they will have an Accusative; as,

See his habit or fashion. Look thou the other fellow.

2. A Genitive, viz. Adverbs of quantitie, time, and place, as, In what Countrie. To what land. At that time. An abundance of tales. Words enough. Part of the men.

1. Obs. So also Ergò for Caussâ; as, For his sake.

2 Obs. Pridie the day before, and postridie the daie after, will have a Genitive or an Accusative case; as, The daie before that daie. The daie after the Kalends.

3 Obs. Minimè gentium in no wise, is a proper phrase, or manner of speech.

3 A Dative, viz. such as bee derived of Nouns that govern a Dative case; as, Hee came to meet him. Hee singeth like him. Hee liveth unprofitably to himself.

1 Obs. These Datives bee used Adverbially, Tem­pori betime, luci by day, vesperi at even; as,

  • Wee must rise betime. Wee must go to bed at even.
  • Wee must take pains by daie.

4. An Accusative case of the Preposition they bee com of; as, Nearer the citie. Next to Spain.

N. B. Plùs, minùs, ampliùs, will have a Nominative, a Genitive, a Dative, and an Ablative case; as,

  • Above three hundred waggons. Above 50 men. Above half a mile. More then that.
§. II. Of Adverbs which govern moods.

With a Mood.

UBi when, post quam after that, cùm when, do govern an Indicative; as, When I shall sacrifice an heifer for my fruits, com thou.

Or Subjunctive; as, When I sung of Kings, and wars, Apollo snatcht mee by the ear.

Donec until, govern's an Indicative; as,

Ʋntil hee bad to fold the sheep and count them.

Or Subjunctive; as, Ʋntil that water, which thou hast put in, bee boiled.

Donec as long as, an Indicative; as,

As long as I was safe.

Dum whilst, or as long as, govern's an Indicative; as, Whil'st the maid is making readie.

As long as thou doest what befitteth thee.

Dum so that, or until, doth govern a Subjunctive; as, So that I may profit thee. Ʋntil the third Summer shall see him reigning in Italie.

Quoad as long as, govern's an Indicative; as,

As long as thou exspectest thy Chamber-fellow.

Or Subjunctive; as, As long as I could.

Quoad until, doth govern a Subjunctive; as,

I will keep all things safe till the Armie bee sent hither.

Simulac & simulatque as soon as, do govern an In­dicative; as, As soon as hee was able to abide war.

Or a Subjunctive; as, As soon as his age waxed ripe.

Quemadmodum as, ut as, utcunque as, sicut as, do go­vern an Indicative; as, As thou salutest, so shalt thou bee saluted again.

Or a Subjunctive; as, As thou shalt sow, so shalt thou reap.

Ʋt after that, doth govern an Indicative; as, After that they came into the citie.

[Page 252] Quasi as, ceu as, tanquam as, Perinde acsi like as, Haud secus acsi no otherwise, then as, do govern a Subjun­ctive; as,

As though wee knew not our selvs among our selvs.

And these also couple like cases; as,

  • I knew the man even as thy self.
  • Hee smileth on mee as on a friend.

Nè not, an Adverb of Forbidding, doth govern an Imperative; as, Bee not so wroth.

Or a Subjunctive; as, This is a great knave, do not fear him.

Chap. 7. Of the Government of Conjunctions.

Of Con­junctions which do couple.

§. I. Of Conjunctions which do couple Words.

COnjunctions Copulatives & disjunctives, and these four quàm, nisi, praeterquam, an, do couple like cases, and most commonly like moods and tenses; as, The night, and love, and wine do perswade no moderate thing.

  • Hee is younger then thou art.
  • Hee pleaseth no bodie but himself.
  • Peter and John did praie and preach in the Temple.

1. Obs. But oftentimes som particular reason of words, require divers cases, moods and tenses; as,

  • I bought a book for an hundred asses and more.
  • I lived at Rome, and at Ʋenice.
  • I gave them thanks, and will do so whil'st I live.

2. Obs. Cùm and tum, and tum beeing doubled, will couple like cases; as,

Hee embraceth all learned men, but especially Mar­cellus. Hee hateth both learning and virtue.

§. I. Of Conjunctions which govern moods.

Govern Moods.

ETsi although, tametsi although, etiamsi although, quanquam although, in the beginning of a Speech govern an Indicative; as,

Though no news was brought.

But in the middle of a Speech a Subjunctive; as, Thou blamestimee though thou hast don it thy self.

Quamvis although, licèt although, commonly do govern a Subjunctive; as,

Though thou comest thy self.

Ni except, nisi unless, si if, siquidem if so bee, quòd that, quia becaus, quàm then, postquam after, posteaquam after that, ubi for postquam, nunquam never, priusquam before that, do

governAn Indicative, or,as,I am glad that thou
Subjunctive,art returned safe.

Si if, doth govern an Indicative; as,

If thou beest well, it is well.

Or a Subjunctive; as, If thou shalt denie, thou shalt bee whipt.

Si used for quamvis though, a Subjunctive; as,

No not though shee intreat.

Quando seeing that, quandoquidem seeing that, quoniam becaus, do govern an Indicative; as,

Saie on, seeing that wee sit together on the soft grass.

Quippe becaus, doth govern an Indicative; as,

Becaus hee is sick.

Qüippe qui as hee that, doth govern an Indicative, or Subjunctive; as,

As hee hath twise forsworn himself.

Qui, when quippe is understood, signifying a Caus, a Subjunctive; as,

Thou art a fool to believ this fellow, i. e. becaus you believ.

[Page 256] Cùm for quamvis although, quandoquidem seeing that, quoniam becaus, govern a Subjunctive; as,

Seeing thou art fit.

Nè, an, num, whether, of Asking, will have an In­dicative; as, Whether is hee alive, or no?

Of Doubting, a Subjunctive; as,

See whether hee bee returned?

Ʋt to the end that, for nè non lest not, for quanquam although, and utpote becaus, govern's a Subjunctive; as, To the end that hee might bee with you.

  • I am affraid hee cannot withstand it.
  • Though all things fall out as I would.
  • Becaus thou hast deceived mee so oft.

Ʋt for postquam after that, quemadmodum even as, si­cut as, or used in asking, will have an Indicative; as, After that I went from the citie.

  • Go on to do as thou dost.
  • Like as is his madness. How doth hee?

Chap. 8. Of the government of Prepositions.

8. Of Pre­positions.

  • I. THirtie Prepositions govern an Accusative case viz.
    • 1. To the Church.
    • 2. At the market.
    • 3. Before death.
    • 4. Against two.
    • 5. Towards thee.
    • 6. On this side Thames.
    • 7. On this side the River.
    • 8. About the town.
    • 9. About the hill.
    • 10. About two thousand.
    • 11. Against the prick.
    • 12. Towards the people.
    • 13. Without the hous.
    • 14. Betwixt the cup and the lip.
    • 15. Within the hous.
    • 16. Below all men.
    • 17. By the well.
    • 18. For a reward.
    • 19. In his power.
    • 20. Through the plain fields.
    • 21. Behind the back.
    • [Page 258]22. After death.
    • 23. Besides the cottage.
    • 24. For my Neighbor.
    • 25. According to Aristotle.
    • 26. By the water courses.
    • 27. Above his capacitie.
    • 28. Beyond the Alps.
    • 29. Towards London.
    • 30. Beyond the Indians.
  • II. And twelv govern an Ablative case;
    • 1. From God.
    • 2. From an enemie.
    • 3. Of any bodie.
    • 4. Without monie.
    • 5. Before the master.
    • 6. With loss.
    • 7. Concerning trifles.
    • 8. Out of a well.
    • 9. From an high rock.
    • 10. Before all things.
    • 11. Without bread.
    • 12. For the poor.
  • III. Five govern an Accusative and an Ablative case.
    • 1. Privie to his father.
    • 2
      • Into the hous.
      • In the hous.
    • 3.
      • A little before night.
      • In the night.
    • 4. Ʋpon a stone.
    • 5. Ʋnder the earth.

To which you may add tenùs, up to, as,

  • Ʋp to the privie parts.
  • Ʋp to the breast. Ʋp to the ears.

1. Obs. A Preposition is often understood as,

  • I exspect to daie, or at the furthest (to) morrow.
  • Hee appeared (in) the shape of a man.

2. Obs. And oftimes it is more then needs; as, Abstein from vices. I will call my friend to this matter.

3. Obs. A Preposition in composition doth som­times govern the same case, which it governed bee­ing without composition, as,

I pass by thee unsaluted. I leav my office.

[Page 260] 4. Obs. These seem to bee singular expressions, as,

  • To go out of the doors.
  • To prevent the windes in running.

Chap. 9. Of the government of Interjections.

9. Interje­ctions.

CErtain Interjections govern cases, viz.

1. O of Exclamation, a Nominative, Accusa­tive, and vocative; as,

O gladsom daie! O happie husbandmen! O prettie boie! But of calling, a Vocative only as,

Com hither ô Galatéa!

2. Heus, and ohe, a Vocative; as, O Syrus! Ho little book!

3. Pro and proh, ah and vah, an Accusative and Vo­cative; as, O the faith of God and man!

O holy Jupiter! Ah mee poor man! Ah the incon­stancie! Alas unhappie maid! Oh you villain!

4. Heu, a Nominative, Dative, and Accusative; as,

Alas the godliness. O the hated stock.

Alas for mee poor man.

5. Hem and apage an Accusative; as, Fie upon craft. See Davus for you. Away with such comple­ments.

6. Hei and vae a Dative; as, Wo is mee.

Wo bee to thee.

1. Obs. Interjections are often put without a case; as, Alas, I am affraid. What madnes, (with a mis­chief?

2. Obs. And they are often understood, as;

(O) mee poor wretch. (O) the base prank.

I think you wonder, Sirs.

Chap. 10. Of the Figures of a word.

OF Figures. 1. Of a Word.

FIgure is a kinde of speaking on som new fashion, or the altering of a word or speech from the usual manner of speaking, and that also by autoritie of good writers.

Figure is of two sorts,1. Of a Word:which belong's toEtymologie.
2. Of Construction:Syntaxis.

A Figure of a Word is that which anie waie changeth the form of a word, and these bee its chief kindes.

1 Prosthesis, is the putting a letter or syllable to the beginning of a word; as Gnatus for natus, tetuli for tuli.

2. Aphaeresis, is the taking a letter or syllable from the beginning of a word; as, Ruit for Eruit, temnere for contemnere.

3. Epenthesis, is the putting of a letter or syllable in­to the middle of a word; as, Relligio for religio, Indu­perator for Imperator.

4. Syncope, is the taking a letter or syllable from the middle of a word, as, Abiît for abivit, dîxti for dixisti.

5. Paragoge, is the putting of a letter or syllable to the end of a word; as, Dicier for dici, emorier for e­mori.

6. Apocope, is the taking of a letter or syllable from the end of a word; as, Ingenî for ingenii.

7. Diaeresis, is the dividing of one syllable into two; as, Auläi for aulae, evolüisse for evolvisse.

8. Synaeresis, is the contracting of two vowels into one syllable, which belong to two divers syllables; as, Thesei for Thesei. vêmens for vehemens.

[Page 264] 9. Metathesis is the mis-placing of a letter or syl­lable; as, pistris for pristis a long ship.

10. Antithesis, or Antistoechon is the putting of a letter for a letter; as, Olli for illi.

11. Tmesis, is the parting of a compound word be­twixt the parts whereof another is put; as, Quae mihi cunque placent, What things soever pleas mee.

12. Enallage, is the putting of the Parts of Speech, or their Accidents one for another; as, The people beeing as King. i. e. ruling all abroad. Agnus trepida­re for trepidabat, The Lamb did tremble.

13. Archaismus, is an old fashion of speaking, which is now out of use; as, Valdè tonit for tonuit, It thun­dred exceedingly. Tam nulli consilii, So void of coun­sel. Operam abuti, To bestow his labor to a wrong end.

14. Metaplasinus, is anie change (at all) in a word; as, Agreste for agresti.

Chap 11. Of the Figures of Construction.

2. Of Con­struction.

A Figure of construction is that which anie waie changeth the frame of a Speech. Its kindes are

1. Apposition, is the putting together of two or more Substantives in the same case; as, The river Rhine. The citie Athens. M T. C.

And it is either to1. Restrain generalitie; as, A living crea­ture, an hors.
2. Take away Equivocation; as, The dog-star.
3. To attribute a propertie to one; as, Erasmus a man of most exact judg­ment.

[Page 266] 2. Syilepsis, is the comprehending of the more unworthie gender or person under the more wor­thie; as, I and my brother are white. Mars and Ve­nus, both beeing naked, lie tied fast together in the snares.

3. Prolepsis, is a brief expression of things; as,

Two Eagles flew, this from the East, that from the West. The people live, som in want, som in delights.

Bear yee one another's burdens. Let both of us take an equal share.

4. Zeugma, is the bringing back of one Verb or Adjective to divers Supposites, to one expresly, and to the other by supplying it; as,

  • John was a Fisher, and Peter.
  • The husband and the wife is angrie.

5. Synthesis, is a Speech which agreeth in sens, though not in words; as, Wee are both hurt.

A brood goos. Two thousand slain.

6. Antiptôsis, is the putting one case for another; as,

All kinde of elegancie. Are yee autors of it.

7. Synecdoche, is when that which belong's to a part is spoken of the whole; as,

A Blackmoor having white teeth. Wounded in the forehead. Flowers that have the names of Kings written on them.

8. Elleipsis, is the want of a word in a Speech; as,

I (thought) presently with my self. I remember that I saw.

9. Pleonasmus, is the abounding of a word in a Speech beyond anie necessitie of it; as,

I saw it with these eies. I slaughtered him with his own sword.

10. Asyndeton, is the want of Conjunctions in a Speech; as, It shall bee don will thou, nill thou.

Eat, drink, plaie.

11. Polysyndeten, is an over-plus of Conjunctions in a Speech; as,

[Page 268] Sleep, and wine, and good chear, and whores, and haths, do weaken men's bodies and mindes.

12. Anastrophe, is when a Preposition is set before its case; as,

The command is in thy power.

13. Synchysis, is a confused order of words; as,

For1 it is bad2 for such as have3 blear'd-eies and4 raw5 sto­macks to6 plaie at ball7.

14. Hypallage, is a placing of words contrariwise; as,

To commit the South-windes to the ships.

15. Hellenifmus, is a going from the Latine use to imitate the Greeks; as,

Do not fight against two.

The rest which belong rather to the handsoming then the making of a Speech, are to bee sought for among the Rhetoricians.

LIB. IV. OF PROSODIE.

IV. Prosodie, treateth of

PROSODIE is the fourth part of Grammar, which teacheth the right pronuntiation of words.

A right pronuntiation is that which observeth in everie word, the Spirit, Tone, and Time of the Syl­lables.

Prosodia there­fore treateth1. Of the Spirits.Chap. 1.
2. Of the Tones or Accents.
3. Of the Time or Quantitie of Syl­lables, Chap. 2. 3. 

Chap. 1. Of Spirits and Tones, or Accents.

1. Spirits. 2. Tones.

1. A Spirit is the manner of uttering a syllable with a breath.

And it isSharp, with which a syllable is sharply ut­tered; as, Hamus, homo.
Gentle, or flat, with which a syllable is gent­ly pronounced; as, Amo, omnis.

2. A Tone, or Accent is the manner of pronouncing a syllable by lifting it up, or letting it down; as, Probitátem, vituperáre.

There bee three sorts of Accents,1. An Acute, which sharpneth or lifteth up a syllable, and is marked with a thwart stroke ascending towards the right hand (').
2. A Grave, which flattteth or letteth down a syllable, and is marked with a thwart stroke descending towards the right hand (`).
3. A Circumflect, which uttereth a syl­lable with a longer staie, lifting it up as the Acute, and letting it down as the Grave Accent, and it is marked with a figure made of an acute and grave ().

There bee three Rules of Tones or Accents.

1. A word of one syllable, beeing short or long by Position, hath an Acute Accent; as, Mél, párs, but if it bee long by Nature, it is Circumflected; as, Spês, flôs.

2. In a word of two syllables, if the first bee long by Nature, and the later short, the first is Circum­flected; as, Lûna, mûsa; but otherwise it hath an Acute; as, Bónus, Déus, sólers.

3. A word of manie syllables, having the last syl­lable save one long, when a long syllable followeth, it hath an acute in the last syllable save one; as, Li­bértas; but when a short syllable followeth, it hath a Circumflect in the last syllable save one; as, Amâre, Românus.

But if it have the last syllable save one short, the syllable before the last save one will have an acute accent; as, Dóminus, Póntifex.

The rest of the syllables in words of manie syl­lables, have grave accents (though not marked) as, Celebérrimus.

1 Obs. The Compounds of Facio have an acute in the last syllable save one; as, Benefácis, malefácis.

2 Obs. The Compounds of Fis, fit, have an acute in the last syllable; as, Calefit, benefit.

3 Obs. Grammarians do often confound a Circum­flect with an acute, becaus it is scarce differenced from it in pronuntiation.

There bee five things which alter the rules of the Accents.

[Page 274] I. Difference, for which sake

1. Som words are Circumflected in the last syl­lable, as the Ablative case of the first Declension Musâ, whereby it may differ from the Nominative and Vocative Musa. Thus ergô for caussâ differ's from ergò the Conjunction.

2. Som have an acute accent in the last syllable, as manie Adverbs, to difference them from other parts of Speech; viz. Ʋnà, aliquà, putà, ponè, &c. which in the end of a sentence have an acute accent, but in the beginning or middle thereof a grave accent.

3. Som have an acute in the syllable before the last syllable save one; as, Déinde, déorsum, quinimo, intereáloci, nihilóminus, quátenus &c. when they are not several words; as are Intérea loci, nihilo minus, pú­be ténus, &c.

N. B. An accent is now seldom marked, except for difference sake, for then it is noted not onely in the last syllable, but also in the last syllable save one, and in that which is before the last save one; as, óccido, occido.

II. Transposition, or mis-placing words. For when Prepositions bee set after their cases, they have a grave accent, as, Transtra pèr & remos. Te penès im­perium.

III. Attraction, when the last syllable of the word going before doth draw unto it the accent of the Inclinative Conjunction; as, Lumináque laurúsque Dei.

But when there is an apparent Composition, the accent is not altered; as, itaque, úndique, hiccine.

IV. Concision, when words are cut off by Syncope, or Apocope, for then they keep the accent of the whole word; as, Virgili for Virgilii, Arpinâs for Arpinâtis. So also hûc, illûc, for hûcce, illûcce, and the Com­pounds of dic, duc, fac, as, benedic, reduc, benefac.

[Page 276] V. The Idiome, or the proprietie of the language: For Greek words, if they com whole to the Latines, (i. e. if they bee expressed with the very same let­ters) they keep their own accent; as, Metamórphosis, Orthographia.

But if they becom altogether Latine, they keep the Latine accent; as, Geórgica, Philosóphia, Idólum.

N. B. If the proper accent of a strange word bee unknown, it will bee most safe to pronounce it ac­cording to the Latine accent.

2. Those syllables which are common are pro­nounced short in Prose, i. e. where a mute and a li­quid do follow a short vowel; as, Célebris, Cáthedra; otherwise they are pronounced long; as, Ʋnius, il­lius, ubique.

3. An Interrogation doth alter the accent; as, Siccine aïs Parmenó?

Chap. 2. Of the Quantitie of the First and Middle Syllables.

3. Time or quantitie. Of the first. Middle.

TIme or Quantitie is the measure of pronouncing a Syllable, or the space of tuning a Vowel, whereby wee measure how long it is in pronoun­cing.

According to time or quan­tie, a syllable is said to beeShort, which hath one time, or which is quickly pronounced; as, pĭŭs, whose time is thus marked (˘).
Long, which hath two times, or which hath the space of two short times; as, Aūdīre, whose long time is thus marked (¯).

[Page 278]

According to the order wch they have in words, Sylla­bles are nam'dFirst,which have thefirstplace in a word.
Middle,middle
Last,last

The quantitie of the first sylla­bles is known eight manner of waies: byI. Position.
II. A Vowel before a vowel.
III. A Diphthong.
IV. Derivation.
V. Composition.
VI. Preposition.
VII. Rule.
VIII. Example, or Autoritie.

But the Middle Syllables have besides these a par­ticular waie of beeing known, which you maysee IX

I. According to Position,

1. A Vowel set before two Consonants, or a dou­ble consonant in the same word, is long; as, Vēntus, āxis, patrīzo. But the Compounds of jugum make i short; as, Bĭjugus.

2. And if a Consonant doth close the foregoing word, and the word following beginneth with a consonant, the vowel foregoing shall bee long; as,

Majōr sūm quām cui pōssīt fōrtuna nocere.

3. A short vowel in the end of a word, when the word following beginneth with two consonants, somtimes, but seldom is made long; as,

Occultā spolia, & plures de pace triumphos.

4. A short vowel before a mute, with a liquid following is common, i. e. long or short; as,

Et primo volŭcri similis, mox vera volūcris.

But a long vowel is not changed; as, Arātrum, Simulācrum.

II. A Vowel before another in the same word is short; as, Dĕus. nĭhil.

[Page 280] But 1. Genitive cases in ius, make the last sylla­ble save one common; as, Ʋnius, illius. Except that i in alterĭus is alwaies short, and in alīus al­waies long.

2. In the fifth Declension e betwixt a double i is long; as, Faciēi.

3. Fi in Fio is everie where long, but where e and r follow it both together; as,

Omnia jam fient, fĭeri quae posse negabas.

4. Ohe hath the first syllable doubtful; ēheu al­waies long.

5. A Vowel before another in Greek words is long; as, Dicite Pīerides; and in Possessives; as, Aenēia nutrix.

But the quantitie of Greek syllables is better to bee found from the Greeks.

6. In forrain words the quantitie is doubtful; as, Michaël, Abraham.

III. Everie Diphthong is long; as, Aūrum, Musae. And syllables that are Contracted; as, Cōgo, nil.

But prae before a vowel is often made short; as, Ver prāit aesatem; and but seldom long; as, Domino praēiret Arion. ae in Maeotis is doubtful.

IV. Derivatives have the same quantitie that their Primitives have; as, ămator of ämo. Yet there bee excepted,

1. Som which are long, and are derived from them that bee short, viz.
Vox, vōcis,ofVŏco.
Lex, lēgis,Lĕgo.
Rex, rēgis,Rĕgo.
Sēdes.Sĕdeo.
Junior,Jŭvenis.
Hūmanus,Hŏmo.
Jūcundus,Jŭvo.
Vōmer,Vŏmo:
Lāterna,Lăteo.
Tēgula,Tĕgo.
Mācero,Măcer.
Pēnuria,Pĕnus.

[Page 282]

2. Som that are short, and are derived of them that are long, viz.
Dux, dŭcis,ofDūco.
Dĭcax,Dīco.
Fĭdes,Fīo.
ărena, ărista,āreo.
Pŏsui,Pōno.
Gĕnui,Gīgno.
Frăgor,ofFrāngo.
Frăgilis
Nŏto, tas,Nōtu.
Năto, tasNātu.
Dĭsertus,Dīssero.
Sŏpor,Sōpio.

And som others of both sorts.

V. Compound words have the quantitie of the Sim­ple; as, Pŏtens, impŏtens. Sōlor, consōlor.

1. ExceptInnŭba,of Nūbo.Cognĭtum,of Nōtum.
Pronŭba.Agnĭtum,
Dejĕro,of jūro.Restĭturus,of Stāturus.
Pejĕro,Perstĭturns,

2. Also the Compounds of Dīco, that end in dĭcus; as, Maledĭcus.

3. Ambĭtus the Noun hath i short, Ambītus the Participle hath i long.

4. Idem in the Masculine gender hath i long, in the Neuter i short.

5. In words that are Compounded

1. With Verbs, the former part ending in e is short; as, Valedico.

2. With Particles, bi, tri, tre, du, the same are short; as, Bĭceps, trĭceps, trĕcenti, dŭcenti.

3. With Nouns, the former part ending in i, y, u, is short, as, Tardĭgradus, Polydorus, cornŭpeta. Ex­cept quivis and som others.

6. These words make long the last syllable of their simples, which is common, viz. ubîque, ubīlibet, ibīdem, quandō (que), quandōcunque, but do in quandŏquidem is short.

VI. Of the Prepositions,

1. A, de, è, se, prae, and those that end in (a) are long, except a vowel follow; as, Ʋnda dĕhiscens.

2. Pro the Latine syllable is long, except in these [Page 284] words, Prŏcella, prŏfugus, prŏtervus, prŏnepos, proneptis, prŏfanus, prŏfiteor, prŏfundus, prŏficiscor, prŏfari, prŏparo, prŏfugio, prŏfectò, prŏpello, prŏpulso. But

1.Propago, gas, andhave pro doubtful.
Propago, gĭnis,

2. Pro the Greek syllable is short; as, Prŏpheta, prŏlogus, Prŏmetheus, &c. but in propino it is doubtful.

3. Di is long except in Dĭrimo, and dĭsertus.

4. The rest of the Prepositions bee short, if positi­on do not hinder, for re in resert it is good, com­eth of res, and is therefore long.

VII. There bee two Rules,1. Of Preterperfect tenses and Supines of two syllables.
2. Of Preterperfect tenses that double the first syllable.

1. Every preterperfect tens & supine of two syllabls hath the first syllable long, as, Lēgi, ēmi, mōtum, lātum. Except

1. Six preterperfect tenses; Fĭdi, bĭbi, dĕdi, scĭdi, tŭli, stĕti.

2. Nine supines; Dătum, sătum, cĭtum, (of cieo) ĭtum, lĭtum, quĭtum, sĭtum, rătum, rŭtum.

2. Preterperfect tenses that double the first syl­lable of their Present tens, have their first syllable short; as, Pēpendi, mŏmordi, spŏspondi.

VIII. The quantitie of such syllables as com not under the rules aforegoing is to bee known by the Example and Autoritie of Poëts; and this is the most certain and most general waie,

1. Becaus everie rule resteth upon the autoritie of the Antient.

2. Becaus the quantitie of manie syllables is not known but by examples.

1. These words have their first syllable common, [Page 286] viz. Britannus, Bithynus, Cacus, Cofyra, Crathys, Creti­cus, Curetes, Fidene, Gradivus, Hinulus, Hymen, Italus, liquor, liquidus, Lycas, Orion, Pachinus, palatium, Pelion, Pyrene, rud [...], Sychaeus, &c.

2. And these their middle; Batavus, connubium, ficedula, malea, Pharsalia, Sidonius, &c.

IX. Middle syllables are partly known the same waie that the first, and partly 1. by the increas of the Genitive case, and 2. the Analogie of the Conjugation.

1. The increas of the Genitive case is, when a Noun hath more syllables in the Genitive case singular, then it had in the Nominative, and according to it, the last syllable save one of Nouns increasing

1. Sharp, is long.

2. Flat, is short.

2. The Analogie of Conjugation is, when Verbs fol­low their common Rule of Conjugating, and ac­cording to this

athe character or note of theFirstConjuga­tion islong.
eSecondlong.
eThirdshort.
iFourthlong.

But in Do and its Compounds, when they are of this Conjugation, a is short; as in dămus circumdă­mus, dăbis circundăbis, dăre circundăre.

The Syllables rimus and ritis in the Preterperfect tens of the Subjunctive mood are short; as, Amave­rĭmus, amaverĭtis; but long in the Future tens; as, Amaverīmus, amaverītis.

Latine Adjectives in inus make (i) long; as, Clan­destīnus, mediastīnus. Except these following, Diutĭ­nus, crastĭnus, pristĭnus, perendĭnus, hornotĭnus, serotĭnus Oleagĭnus, fagĭnus, cedrĭnus, carbasĭnus, and others that signifie matter, or that are made of the mines of me­tals, and end in inus; as, Chrystallĭnus, myrrhĭnus, &c. which are derived of Greek Nouns?

Chap. 3. Of the quantitie of the last syllables.

And last Syllables.

THe last Syllables are reckoned according to the order of the letters with which words do end, thus,

Words that end inAare long; as, Amā, contrā, ergā.
 Except,
 1. Pută, ită, quiă, ejă.
 2. Likewise all cases in a, besides Voca­tives in a, of Greek Nouns in as; as, ô Ae­neā, and the Ablative case of the first De­clension; as, Musâ.
 3. Numerals in ginta, which have a com­mon; as, Triginta, quadraginta.
Bare short; as, ăb.
 Except,
 1. Hebrew words; as, Jacōb.
Care long; as, āc, sīc, and hīc the Adverb.
 Except,
 1. Lăc, nĕc, donĕc, which are short.
 2. Fac, and the Pronoun hic are common, as also its Neuter Gender hoc, so that it bee not of the Ablative case.
Dare short; as, ăd.
 1. Except Hebrew words; as, Davīd.
Eare short; as, Marĕ, penĕ, legĕ, scribĕ.
 Except,
 1. Nouns of the Fift Declension in e; as, Fidē, diē, rē, with the Adverbs that com of them; as, Hodiē, quarē.
 2. Fame, now of the Third Declension, here­tofore of the Fifth.
 3. The second person singular of the Im­perative mood, of the Active voice, of the second Conjugation; as, Docē, movē, manē.
 But e in Cave, vide, salve, and vale is som­times short.
 4. Monosyllables in e; as, Mē, tē, cē, ex­cept quĕ, nĕ, vĕ, the Inclinative Conjuncti­ons.
 5. Adverbs in e derived of Adjectives; as, Doctē, valdē, and fermē, ferē: yet benĕ and malĕ are short.
 6. Words that in Greek are writ with an Eta, or e long; as, Anchisē, cetē, tempē.
Iare long; as, Domini, amavī.
 Except,
 1. Mihi, tibi, sibi, ubi, ibi, uti for ut, and cui a word of two syllables, which are com­mon.
 2. Nisĭ, and quasĭ which are short, as are also the Vocative cases of Greek Nouns, whose Genitive singular endeth in os; as, Palladĭ, Daphnĭ.
Lare short; as, Animăl, mĕl.
 Except
 1. Sāl and Sōl.
 2. Hebrew words which are writ in Greek with a long vowel; as, Michaēl.
Nare long; as, Paeān, Hymēn, nōn.
 Except
 1. Forsăn, forsităn, ăn, tamĕn, attamĕn, verun­tamĕn.
 2. Words cut off by an Apocope; as, Mén', vidén'.
 3. In with its Compounds; as, Exĭn, subĭn. &c.
 4. Nouns ending in en, whose Genitive case singular hath ĭnis short; as, Garmĕn, pectĕn, tibicĕn.
 5. Greek Nouns in on by little o; as, Ili­ŏn, Peliŏn, Caucasŏn.
 6. Greek Nouns in in, yn, and an, whose Nominative case is short; as, Alexĭn, Ity̆n, Maiăn.
Oare common; as, Amo, porrò, docende.
 Except
 1. Oblique cases in o which are alwaies made long; as, Dominō, servō.
 2. Adverbs derived of Adjectives; as, Tan­tō, falsō, &c. But Sedulò, crebrè, and mutuò are common, rather to bee made long.
 3. Monosyllables in o are long; as, dō, stŏ, and ergō for caussâ.
 4. Ambo, duo, ego, homo, citò, modò with its compounds are seldom read long.
 5. Greek words in o are long; as, Sappho, unless they com of Nominative cases in [...] from which (n) is taken away; as, Leo, Plato, which for the most part are short.
Rare short; as, Caesăr, torcúlăr, pĕr, diciĕr.
 Except
 1. Fār, lār, nār, vēr, fūr, cūr, and pār with its compounds. Cor is once read long in Ovid.
 2. Greek words that end in er with e long; as, Aēr, cratēr, except patĕr, matĕr.
Shave termination answerable to the number of vowels.
asare long; as, Amās, musās.
 Except
 1. Greek nouns, whose Genitive case singu­lar endeth in dos; as, Archăs, Pallăs.
 2. The Acusatives plural of Nouns encreas­ing; as, Heroăs, Phillidäs.
esare long; as, Anchisēs, sedēs, docēs.
 Except
 1. Nouns in es of the Third Declension that encreas short; as, Milĕs, divĕs. But of these, Cerēs, abiēs, ariēs, pariēs, and pēs, with its Compounds are long.
 2. Es of sum, with its Compounds, potĕs, a­dĕs, prodĕs, obĕs, and penĕs the Preposition are short.
 3 Neuters singular, and Nominatives plu­ral of Greek Nouns that end in es not eis; as, Cacoéthĕs, Cyclopĕs.
isare short; as, Parĭs, panĭs, tristīs,
 Except
 1. Oblique cases plural in is; as Musīs, do­minīs, and quēīs for quibus.
 2. Words that make long the last syllable save one of the Genitive case increasing; as, Samnīs, nitis.
 3. Which are made in is of the Diphthong eis; as, Omnīs, Simoīs.
 4. All Monosyllables; as, Vis, līs, besides ĭs, bĭs, and quĭs.
 5. Velīs with its Compounds, malīs, nolīs, and ausīs faxīs.
 6. The second persons singular of the In­dicative mood present tens of the fourth Conjugation; as, Audīs, dormīs.
 7. The second persons of the Future tens of the Subjunctive mood, which are com­mon; as, dederis, amaveris.
osare long; as Herōs, honōs, dominōs.
 Except
 1. Compŏs, impŏs, and ŏs ossis.
 2. Greek Nouns with little o; as, Delŏs, Palladŏs.
usare short; as, Famulŭs, tempŭs.
 Except
 1. The Nominative cases of Nouns that increas long; as, Virtūs, salūs.
 2. The Genitive cases singular, the Nomina­tives, the Vocatives and Accusatives plural of the fourth Declension; as, hujus manūs, hae manūs, has manūs, ô manūs.
 3. Monosyllables in us; as, pūs, crūs.
 4. Words which are writ in Greek with [...]; as, Panthūs, Cliūs.
 And the name Jesūs to bee reverenced of of all good men.
uare long; as, Manū, genū.
yand ys are short as, Moly̆, Tiphy̆s.
 The last syllable in everie Vers is common, i. e it may bee either long or short.

A TABLE of the Heads of the Latine-Grammar.

Chap.  Pag.
 OF Grammar and its Parts.2
 LIB. I. Of Orthographie.2
1Of Letters.4
2Of Syllables.10
3Of Right Ʋtterance.12
4Of Points in Sentences.14
 LIB. II. Of Etymologie.17
1Of the eight Parts of Speech, and their general Accidents.16
2Of a Noun and its propér Ac­cidents.20
3Of Case.22
4Of Gender.24
5Of the general Rules of Pro­per Names.26
6Of the general Rules of Com­mon Names.28
7Of the first Special Rule.30
8Of the second Special Rule.34
9Of the third Special Rule.38
10Of the Genders of Adjectives.42
11Of the first Declension.46
12Of the second Declension.50
13Of the third Declension.52
14Of the fourth Declension.60
15Of the fift Declension.62
16Of the Declining of Adje­ctives.64
17Of Comparison.68
18Of varying Heteroclits.74
19Of Heteroc that want Case.78
20Of Heteroclits that want Number.80
21Of Redundant Heteroclits.86
22Of the Kindes of Nouns.90
23Of a Pronoun.95
24Of a Verb and its Accidents.106
27Of the form of the first Con­jugation.112
28Of the form of the second Con­jugation.116
29Of the form of the third Con­jugation.120
30Of the form of the fourth Con­jugation.124
31Of the Preterperfect tenses of Verbs Simple.128
32Of the Preterperfect tenses of Compound Verbs.136
33Of the Supines of Simple Verbs.142
34Of the Supines of Compound Verbs, and of the Preterperfect tens of Verbs in or, 
35Of certain Verbs Irregular.148
36Of Verbs that want certain Moods and Tenses.154
37Of forming the Verb Sum.160
38Of Verbs impersonals and De­rivatives.162
39Of a Participle.166
40Of an Adverb.172
41Of a Conjunction.178
42Of a Preposition.182
43Of an Interjection184
 LIB. III. Of Syntax.188
1Of Concordance.188
2Of the Government ofNouns.200
3Pronouns.214
4Verbs.219
5Participles.246
6Adverbs.248
7Conjunctions.252
8Prepositions.256
9Interjections.260
10Of the Figures of a word.262
11Of the Figures of Constructi­on.264
 LIB. IV. Of Prosodie.270
1Of Spirits, Tones, or Accents.270
2Of the Quantitie of the first and middle Syllables.276
3Of the Quantitie of the last Syllables.188
 Appendix Grammatices.198
1De Ordine VocumGrāmatico298
2Oratorio.299
3Poëtico.301
4De Pede & ejus generibus.302
5De Versuum variis generibus.304

A PRAIER to bee used everie daie, for Children's good proceeding at their BOOKS.

O Almighty Lord and merciful Father, maker of Hea­ven and Earth, which of thy free liberality givest wise­dom abundantly to all that with faith and full assurance ask it of thee: Beautifie by the light of thy heavenly grace the towardness of our wits, the which with all powers of nature thou hast powred into us; that wee may not one­ly vnderstand those things which may effectually bring us to the knowledg of thee and the Lord Iesus our Saviour, but also with our whole heart and will constantly follow the same, and receiv daslie encreas through thy bountiful goodness towards us, as well in good life as learning; so that thou which workest all things in all creatures, maiest make thy gracious benefits shine in vs, to the endless glo­rie and honour of thine immortal Maiestie.

Amen.

OUr Father which art in heaven, Hallowed bee thy Name; Thy Kingdom come, Thy will bee done in Earth as it is in Heaven. Give us this daie our dailie bread: And forgive vs our trespasses, as wee forgive them that trespass against us: And lead vs not into temptation: But deliver us from evil, For thine is the Kingdom, the Power, and the Glorie, for ever and ever,

Amen.

FINIS.

This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal. The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.